Architectural Cutsheets - North Slope Borough Procurement Projects

Architectural Cutsheets - North Slope Borough Procurement Projects
Architectural Cutsheets
REV
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
3
1
D4 OPEN BACK TOP TRACK
FOR SHALLOW DISPLAY CASE
APPLICATIONS TO LOAD
HANGERS FROM SAME SIDE
H
(50" MAX)
D4
1
1
2
3
ELEVATION VIEW
REF:
SECTION VIEW
Scale: NTS.
Scale: NTS
SPRING-LOADED
GUIDE
2
1
1
CAT. NO.
D1040A
D104ODU
D1041A
D1041DU
D1042A
D1042DU
D1043A
D1043DU
PLAN VIEW
FINISH
SATIN ANODIZED
DURANODIC BRONZE
SATIN ANODIZED
DURANODIC BRONZE
SATIN ANODIZED
DURANODIC BRONZE
SATIN ANODIZED
DURANODIC BRONZE
CE
C.R.LAURENCE CO.
R
OM
PA
NY
Scale: NTS.
JAMBS
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
DESCRIPTION:
RT I F I E D
ISO9000
C
REF:
OVERHEAD
D4
D4
D6
D6
D4
D4
D6
D6
ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS
PH: 800-421-6144 FX: 800-262-3299
WWW.CRLAURENCE.COM
4
SECTION VIEW
Scale: NTS.
ALWAYS USE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE PLAN.
DO NOT SCALE OR DIMENSION ACTUAL DRAWING
TO ENSURE ACCURACY
DAISY MODEL PASS-THRU
MODELS D1040 - D1041- D1042 & D1043 INTERIOR USE ONLY
CAT. NO:
DATE:
D1040-D1041-D1042&D1043
SCALE:
FILE NAME:
D1040 & D1041
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
J.V.
3-22-13
AS SHOWN
R.D.
SHT
1
OF
1
local*
materials
waste
mgmt
recycled
content
renewable
materials
indoor air
quality
Calculate LEED contribution at armstrong.com/greengenie Key Selection Attributes
1911, 1911HRC
1912, 1912HRC
1914, 1914HRC, 1915
1915HRC, 1916, 1917
Avail able
daylight
& views
fine texture
acoustics
LEED
Square Lay-in
®
energy
Up to
Shasta
71%
®
EPD
Recycled
Content
$$
$$
*Location Dependent
Typical Applications
E xcellent sound absorption
D
iscount/grocery stores
L ocker rooms
• U tility rooms
• L avatories/restrooms
•
•
(perforated options)
• E asy-clean, durable surface
• E conomical
• 3 0-Year Limited System Warranty
against visible sag, mold/mildew, and
bacterial growth
•
Color
Shasta Item 2906 with Prelude® 15/16" suspension system (Pg. 259)
SHASTA (Perforated)
15/16"
Square
Lay-in
Square Lay-in
HumiInherent Guard+
UL Classified
Water
Repel Wash Scrub Impact
Warranty†
Recycle
Program
Durability
Recycled
Content◆
CAC
Sag
Resist
Dimensions
(Inches)
Anti-Mold
& Mildew
Item
No.
Certified Low
VOC Emissions
armstrong.com/
catdwgs
Light
Reflect
Susp. Dwg.
Pgs. 273-277
Tech Black (BL)
Dots represent high level of performance.
Fire
Rating
Edge
Profile
Performance
Acoustics
Visual Selection
White (WH)
No. of
Years
Soil
1
2904
24 x 24 x 5/8"
0.70
N/A
Class 0.72
A
•
•
–
–
•
•
•
•
High
–
30
1
2906 _ _ ◆◆ 24 x 48 x 5/8"
0.70
N/A
Class 0.72
A
•
•
–
–
•
•
•
•
High
–
30
0.70 K2C2 N/A
Short
Class 0.72
A
•
•
–
–
•
•
•
•
High
–
30
0.50
Class 0.72
A
•
•
–
•
•
•
•
•
High
–
30
Class 0.72
A
•
•
Class 0.72
A
•
•
1
9/16" Angled Tegular
Other
Sizes
15/16" Angled Tegular
•
•
Ultima Plank ShipLap
W: 12" - 30" / L: Long
12"Edge
- 60"
Detail
5/8" Thick
Ultima Plank ShipLap
•
SHASTA (Unperforated)
15/16"
1
Square
9/16" Chamfered Tegular
Lay-in
Cirrus Profiles Chamfered
1
Square Lay-in
1
9/16" Beveled Tegular
◆◆
2905 _ _ ◆◆ 24 x 24 x 5/8"
15/16" Chamford Tegular
Cirrus Profiles Chamfered
2907
Classic Step Tegular
24 x 48 x 5/8"
9/16" Angled Tegular
15/16" Angled Tegular
15/16" Beveled Tegular
9/16" Square Cut Tegular
Other
Sizes
Ultima Plank ShipLap
Long Edge Detail
Ultima Plank ShipLap
W: 12" - 30" / L: Long
12"Edge
- 60"
Detail
5/8" Thick
0.50
15/16" Chamford Tegular
Profiles Chamfered
SuspensionCirrus
Systems
9/16" Beveled Tegular
Concealed
Square Edge K4C4
Prelude
Linear Cubic
Beveled Crossgate
15/16" Square Tegular
•
•
•
•
•
High
–
30
–
•
•
•
•
•
High
–
30
Ultima Plank ShipLap
Beveled
Tegular Short
C
D
A
B
15/16" Vector
C
D
15/16" Vector C & D
15/16 Classic Step Tegular
~8-ID (99) (drw 10)
®
15/16" Beveled Tegular
9/16" Square Cut Tegular
Material
Fiberglass with vinyl facing
Tongue and Groove
9/16" Cubic Graphis
Surface Finish
NeoCubic
Scrubbable vinyl film facing (UV protected)
9/16" Wrapped Linear and
Concealed
Linear Cubic
Fire
Performance
Mixed
Corner
“B”
Square Edge K4C4
Beveled Crossgate
ASTMLinear
E84
and CAN/ULC S102 surface burning
(Flumes, Graphis
Corner
characteristics.
Flame Spread Index 25 or less.
& Dots
& Squares)
Smoke Developed Index 50 or less. (UL labeled)
ASTM E1264 Classification
2904, 2906 – Type XII, Form 1, Pattern E C
9/16"
Flush Tegular
Flush Tegular
2905,
2907 – Type 15/16"
XII, Form
1, Pattern E
Ledges
Ledges
Fire
Class A
SagK4C4
ResistanceTongue and Groove
Concealed Beveled
9/16" Cubic Graphis
HumiGuard ® Plus – superior resistance to sagging
NeoCubic
in high humidity conditions up to, but not including,
standing water and outdoor applications.
SM
TechLine / 1 877 ARmSTRONG
armstrong.com/commceilings
(search: shasta)
BPCS-3697-413
9/16" Flush Tegular
Ledges
–
9/16" Wrapped Tegular
Graphis Wrapped Linear
and Cubic
Ultima Plank ShipLap
ALong Edge Detail
B
15/16" Square Tegular
Physical Data
Concealed Beveled K4C4
Ultima Plank ShipLap
15/16 Classic Step Tegular
~8-ID (99) (drw 10)
15/16" Flush Tegular
Ledges
9/16" Wrapped Tegular
Graphis Wrapped Linear
and Cubic
Anti Mold/Mildew & Bacteria
Fiberglass substrate is inherently resistant
to the Concealed
growth
of mold,
mildew, Dand bacteria.
A
B
C
Soft Look Radiused Tegular
30-Year Performance Guarantee & Warranty †
When installed with Armstrong Suspension System.
Details at armstrong.com/warranty
High Recycled Content ◆
Contains
A
Bgreater than C50% total
D recycled content.
Total
content
based
15/16"recycled
Vector
15/16"
Vector on
C & Dproduct composition
of post-consumer and pre-consumer (post-industrial)
recycled content per FTC guidelines.
Weight; Square Feet/Carton
0.17 lbs/SF; 128 SF/ctn
Acoustical Details
A CAC value of 37 can be achieved by backloading
fiberglass products with item 769 or 770.
Metric Items Available
Items 2904M, 2906M, 2905M, 2907M –
Metric items are subject to extended
lead times and minimum quantities.
Contact your representative for more
details.
Insulation Value
R Factor - 2.6 (BTU units)
R Factor
- 0.46 (Watts units)
Concealed
Minimum Order Quantity
1 carton, excludes other sizes
Soft Look Radiused Tegular
LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council
All other trademarks used herein are the property of AWI Licensing
Company and/or its affiliates © 2013 AWI Licensing Company Printed in the United States of America
214
Fiberglass
15/16"
9/16" Wrapped Linear and
Mixed Corner “B”
(Flumes, Graphis Linear Corner
& Dots & Squares)
Classic Step Tegular
N/A
0.50 K2C2 N/A
Short
Add 2-letter color suffix to item number when specifying or ordering (e.g., 2904 B L).
9/16" Chamfered Tegular
Cirrus Profiles Chamfered
N/A
Ultima Plank ShipLap
Beveled Tegular Short
Tate Product Guide-13v2:Tate Product Guide.qxd 3/25/14 11:10 AM Page 1
Access Floor Solutions
Product Guide
SustainAbility
to the Power of
Tate Product Guide-13v2:Tate Product Guide.qxd 3/25/14 11:11 AM Page 6
Important Load Criteria and Key Features
CISCA Recommended Test Procedures for Raised Floors is the
system Tate conducts CISCA Concentrated load tests with
most widely accepted test methodology for raised floors in the
panels installed on thier actual understructure. This test is called
United States. This document provides a standard methodology
Design or Working Load defined as:
for all manufacturers to use when testing their products to
Design Load1 is the safe working load that can be applied to
determine the performance. When a raised floor system is
the system using a one sq.in. indentor without experiencing
specified to a performance criteria per CISCA the specification is
permanent set. This test is conducted in conformance with
stating the type of test method that must be used in order to
CISCA Concentrated Load test method but with panel tested on
evaluate if the raised floor system meets the said criteria.
actual understructure instead of steel blocks.
In addition to CISCA test methods Tate lists performance
Safety Factor is another term used by Tate to indicate that the
characteristics using test methods similar to CICSA, but are
panel supported on actual understructure system can withstand
used in international raised floor standards. We provide this
a point load of no less than (2) two times its design load rating
information to help report the load performance of an installed
without failure when tested in accordance with CISCA Ultimate
system more accurately.
Load test method. Failure is defined as the point at which the
system will no longer accept the load.
For Instance, Tate uses Design Load because CISCA’s method
for Concentrated load is conducted with the panel resting on
Safety Factor2 is the multiple of the design load to the ultimate load.
ConCore System (Explanation and/or benefit)
Design Features
Panel Construction
Flat steel top sheet welded 156 times to a waffle shape bottom sheet then filled internally with lightweight cement.
Recycled Content
49% recycled content. Over 15% post-consumer.
Positive Engagement
Tate’s PosiLock® pedestal head positions and retains panels in place without screws.
Combustibility*
Class A flame spread rating, and noncombustible compliant with ASTM E136-99.
Corner Screws
Screws do not extend below panel underneath. Screws are designed with retention feature.
Finish Options
Almost unlimited factory laminated finish options. PosiTile® carpet & Integral Trim® edge for HPL.
Performance
Walkability*
Quiet & solid underfoot with a sound transmission of 53 NNIC.
Safety Factor*
System provides a safety factor greater than two during static point load tests meeting all international standards.
Overload Protection
System yields gradually for built in safety.
Panel Strength Options
5 interchangeable panel strengths, meet all the requirements of a modern office building.
Cutout Strength*
System maintains design load and minimum safety factor strength when cut.
Air Leakage*
Straight, die cut panel edges yield low and predictable panel seam air leakage rates.
Plenum Divider
Attaches to pedestals maintaining underfloor access. Adjustable to meet any width requirement.
Clean Air Plenum
Painted steel panels with tight seams minimize dust and debris entering the air delivery plenum.
Industry Commitment
Tate is the oldest and largest manufacturer dedicated solely to the R&D and marketing of access flooring.
Lifting & Handling
Easy to carry with one hand and can be removed with a suction cup lifter. Panels are 25% lighter than concrete panels.
Shock Resistance
Fully encapsulated steel shell designed to resist damage when dropped.
Cracking & Reuse
Steel panels are free from unsightly cracks which improve life cycle and reuse.
Edge Design
Thin edge design eliminates adhesives from leaking between panels locking them place.
Ease of Cutting
Steel panel filled with cement cuts without special blades.
Attaching Walls
Screws and shot-pin can be driven directly into the panel without sacrificing it’s integrity.
Service & Usability
Key Features
Plenum
steel blocks. In order to more accurately represent an installed
*Independently certified test reports are available upon request.
1 For more information on design load visit Tate’s website and click on Resources / White Papers.
2 The UK’s PSA MOB PF2 PS/SPU for raised access floors, the Australian Standard AS 4154-1993 for access floors and The European Standard for Access Floors EN
12825:2001 all require a min safety factor based on point load tests.
ACCESS FLOOR PRODUCTS
6
Tate Product Guide-13v2:Tate Product Guide.qxd 3/25/14 11:11 AM Page 8
All Steel Panels
All Steel Access Floor panels are epoxy coated unitized
shells consisting of a flat steel top sheet welded to a
Table
formed steel bottom sheet. Manufactured to exacting
Header
tolerances, these non-combustible rigid, solid panels
deliver the ultimate in strength and durability with the
Table
Table
Header
Header
Content
Content
Content
convenience of lightweight construction.
Panel Features
•
The safe working load or design load for the panels are
equal to the concentrated load
•
Lightweight for ease of handling
•
Excellent grounding and electrical continuity
Applications
•
Full range of factory applied finishes
•
Completely non-combustible
•
Interchangeable with Concore, Perforated, and Grate panels
•
Available in 24" and 60cm sizes
With three standard load performance grades and complete
interchangeability with ConCore, Perforated and Grate airflow
panels, these panels coupled with an extensive selection of
understructure supports and floor finishes are suitable for a wide
range of applications from typical data/computer centers to
telecommunication rooms, mission critical facilities, electronic
assembly areas, and general purpose equipment applications.
Casino: Starlight Casino, Queensborough, BC, 100,000 ft 2
Renovation: Engberg Anderson Design Partnership,
Milwaukee, WI, 18,800 ft 2, LEED Gold
All Steel Performance Selection Chart
System Performance Criteria* (Tested on Actual Understructure)
Static Loads
Rolling Loads
Panel
Understructure
System
Weight
(lbs/ft2)
Design
Loads1
(lbs)
Safety
Factors2
(min 2.0)
10
Passes
(lbs)
10,000
Passes
(lbs)
Impact
Loads
(lbs)
All Steel 1000
Bolted Stringer
6.0 (29kg/m2)
1000 (4.4kN)
PASS
400 (1.8kN)
400 (1.8kN)
150 (68kg)
All Steel 1250
Bolted Stringer
7.0 (34kg/m2)
1250 (5.6kN)
PASS
500 (2.2kN)
500 (2.2kN)
150 (68kg)
All Steel 1500
Bolted Stringer
8.5 (42kg/m2)
1500 (6.7kN)
PASS
600 (2.7kN)
600 (2.7kN)
150 (68kg)
*All tests are performed using CISCA’s Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors with the exception of Design Load
1. Design Load is tested using CISCA’s Concentrated Load test method on actual understructure instead of steel blocks. Design Load is
determined by taking the lesser value of ultimate load divided by two or the point at which permanent damage begins to occur (yield point).
2. Safety factor is the multiple of Design load to the Ultimate Load. International standards and Tate recommend a minimum of 2.
ACCESS FLOOR PRODUCTS
8
Tate Product Guide-13v2:Tate Product Guide.qxd 3/25/14 11:12 AM Page 9
Understructure Systems
for ConCore and All Steel Systems
PosiLock®
Understructure Features
•
PosiLock® design provides self-engagement and positioning of
floor panels.
•
Self-capturing fastener remains within the panel - will not get lost.
•
Steel pedestal head provides optimum strength.
•
Pedestal nut provides anti-vibration and locking features.
•
Seismic force-resistant pedestals are available that limit or
eliminate the need for special bracing.
•
Typical floor heights from 6"-16" (15cm-40cm).
Panel engagement
feature viewed from
underside
Low Finished Floor Height PosiLock®
Understructure Features
•
Available in floor heights from 27/8" to 4" (7cm-10cm).
•
PosiLock® design provides self-engagement and positioning
of floor panels.
•
27/8" (7cm) finished floor height is ideal for renovation applications while
providing enough space under the floor to allow for easy cable
management.
•
Excellent for classroom renovations and the creation of training areas.
•
Easily levels uneven floors.
PosiLock® pedestal for low floor
height systems
Bolted Stringer
Understructure Features
•
Designed for computer rooms, data centers, industrial applications,
and heavy rolling load areas.
•
Allows floors to be built over 24" (60cm) high.
•
Panels can be gravity-held in understructure for fast removal and replacement.
•
Stringers provide lateral resistance to heavy rolling loads and seismic loading.
•
Seismic force-resistant pedestals are available that limit or eliminate the
need for special bracing.
•
Typical floor heights from 12"-36" (30cm-90cm).
Hot Dipped Galvanized Pedestals
Seismic Pedestals
Understructure Features
•
Available with standard and fillet welded base assembly.
•
Steel pedestal head provides optimum strength.
•
Seismic force-resistant pedestals are available that limit or eliminate the
need for special bracing.
•
Vertical supports ranging from 16 gauge 7/8” (2.2cm) galvanized tubing
to Schedule 40 pipe.
•
Pedestals can accommodate finished floor heights over 36" (90cm).
•
Easily levels uneven floors.
9
Tate Product Guide-13v2:Tate Product Guide.qxd 3/25/14 11:16 AM Page 29
Underfloor Service Distribution
Underfloor Wire & Cabling ...........page
Underfloor Air Distribution ...........page
In-Floor Chilled Beam..................page
EcoCore......................................page
Casino Air»Connect.....................page
30
31
32
33
34
Tate Product Guide-13v2:Tate Product Guide.qxd 3/25/14 11:16 AM Page 30
Underfloor Wire & Cable Management
Tate’s has partnered with Cii, the leading manufacturer of
Key features Modular Power & Data Management
modular power and voice data systems to provide flexible
• Flexibility- with plug-and-play units, installing and reconfiguring
solution for commercial interiors. Cii offers superior quality and
the office layout is fast, easy and cost-effective.
fast, flexible service with custom application capabilities.
• Capacity – multiple outlet units allow high capacity multi-circuit
Cii’s StationLink® and PVD Servicenter® are the modular answer
wiring configurations to be added for future staffing needs.
to providing multiple power and data circuits to desktops and
• Customization – the StationLink® and PVD Servicenter® can be
workstations in the office. This plug-and-play system allows you
custom engineered to accommodate any office furniture and
to add new equipment or make moves, adds and changes very
provide any power, voice or data service required.
simply and quickly. The patented connectors are UL listed and
• Life Cycle Costs – the mobility of these devices allow you to
approved to connect and disconnect while energized, meaning
the circuit breaker does not need to be locked and tagged-out
add, move or relocate as often as you need, without having to
to make changes. As easy as unplugging a lamp, the user can
reinvest in a new power system.
disconnect and move an entire workstation with a minimal
• Safety – all StationLink and PVD Servicenters are UL and CSA
amount of disruption to the rest of the office.
approved. The power connectors have a “first make – last
break” grounding and are keyed to ensure proper connection.
Telecom
Rack
Power
Breaker
Panel
Zone
Distribution
Box
Home Run
Cable
Power
Distribution
Box
Power
Extender
Cable
Thermostat
Power
Extender
Cable
PCM
(24 volt)
PVD
Servicenter™
Data
Voice
30
In-floor Active
Chilled Beams
PANEL SCHEDULE
JAMB
(3'-8.38")
3'-6.62"
EXPANDABLE
PANEL NO. 2
PANEL
3'-6.62"
PANEL NO. 3
3'-6.62"
PANEL NO. 4
3'-6.62"
PANEL NO. 5
1.50"
BULB
SEAL
18'-9"
TO BE ADVISED
DATE
REV
ISSUED FOR
DRN.
04/30/14
0
APPROVAL
MPM
1
2
3
4
5
6
INSTALLATION WIDTH
PANEL PLAN
DOOR SYSTEMS OF ALASKA, INC.
FABRIC
UNKNOWN
ARCHITECT:
4'-1"
UNKNOWN
5
ARCHITECT:
4
ANCHORAGE, AK
SIDE "L"
LOCATION:
3
CONTRACTOR:
4"
2
0
1
UIC CONSTRUCTION
MIN. CLR.
MIN. CLR.
SIDE "R"
JOB NAME:
2'-3"
2'-3"
DEPTH
SELECTION
CLOSURE METHOD
STACK
DISTRIBUTOR:
3'-6.62"
TO BE ADVISED
5
PANEL FINISH
MB
TO BE ADVISED
3'-6.62" MB
GYPSUM
4
TRIM COLOR
2'-0"
MB
HINGE COLOR
5. HINGE POINTS ARE SHOWN FOR DIAGRAMMATIC PURPOSES ONLY.
3'-6.62" MB
8 (lbs./sq.ft.)
INDICATES BOTTOM SEAL OPERATOR HANDLE.
3
PANEL SKIN/FACING
INDICATES OPERABLE PANEL ACCESS HOLE.
MB
50 STC
4. AFS INDICATES ADJUSTABLE FIXED SEALS.
3'-6.62" MB
HANGING WEIGHT
AND WITHSTANDING FORCE EXERTED BY THE EXPANDABLE PANEL.
2
FIXED
,
4'-1"
A DORMA Group Company
PASSDOOR
PANEL ACOUSTICAL RATING
SUPPORT, ADJOINING CONSTRUCTION AND TRIM.
3. WALL CONSTRUCTION AT JAMBS MUST BE ADEQUATE FOR SECURING JAMBS
1
SIDE L
#17 STD BKT
SIDE ``R'': COLOR SELECTION: WHITE 30" A.F.F.
SIDE ``L'': COLOR SELECTION: WHITE 30" A.F.F.
SIDE R
BOTTOM SEALS
TRIMMED WITH MOLDING
CONSTRUCTION/FIXTURES FOR ADJUSTMENT, OPERATION, AND SAFETY.
2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL STRUCTURAL
WIDTH
TRACK SYSTEM
FORMED AROUND PANEL EDGES. TOP AND BOTTOM EDGES
1. MINIMUM DIMENSIONS PROVIDE FOR CLEARANCE FROM ALL ADJACENT
PANEL
EXPANDABLE - 6"
8'-0"
48" HIGH, COATED STEEL NON-POROUS WRITING SURFACE
FABRICATION HEIGHT
MB - MARKERBOARD
932FS LAYOUT - OP-01
ARCHITECT / GENERAL CONTRACTOR NOTES
PROJECT REFERENCE NUMBER
P-043014141418
ORDER NO.
SHEET NO.
1
OF:
4
SHEET NO.
2
OF:
2
1
4
3
6
5
PROJECT REFERENCE NUMBER
P-043014141418
ORDER NO.
4
DISTRIBUTOR:
CONTRACTOR:
ARCHITECT:
ARCHITECT:
LOCATION:
DOOR SYSTEMS OF ALASKA, INC.
UNKNOWN
UNKNOWN
ANCHORAGE, AK
0
UIC CONSTRUCTION
PANEL ELEVATION - SIDE "L"
JOB NAME:
8 (lbs./sq.ft.)
TO BE ADVISED
FABRIC
TO BE ADVISED
PANEL FINISH
SELECTION
TO BE ADVISED
TRIM COLOR
HINGE COLOR
GYPSUM
50 STC
HANGING WEIGHT
PANEL SKIN/FACING
FIXED
PANEL ACOUSTICAL RATING
#17 STD BKT
EXPANDABLE - 6"
8'-0"
932FS ELEVATION - OP-01
BOTTOM SEALS
TRACK SYSTEM
FABRICATION HEIGHT
CLOSURE METHOD
A DORMA Group Company
DATE
REV
ISSUED FOR
DRN.
04/30/14
0
APPROVAL
MPM
ARCHITECT / GENERAL CONTRACTOR NOTES
A DORMA Group Company
1. REFER TO MODERNFOLD ASCE7 DESIGN GUIDE FOR SEISMIC BRACING REQUIREMENTS
FIXED BOTTOM SWEEP
TO BE ADVISED
FABRIC
TO BE ADVISED
SELECTION
TO BE ADVISED
GYPSUM
REV
ISSUED FOR
DRN.
0
APPROVAL
MPM
1
3
4
5
FINISHED
6
.25" X .62" STEEL BAR
FLOOR
.31"
BY MODERNFOLD
PROJECT REFERENCE NUMBER
P-043014141418
GROUT BY OTHERS
1" X 1" RECESS
DOOR SYSTEMS OF ALASKA, INC.
DATE
04/30/14
2
RECESSED FLOOR TRACK
DISTRIBUTOR:
UNKNOWN
CONTRACTOR:
ARCHITECT:
ARCHITECT:
UNKNOWN
ANCHORAGE, AK
BULB SEAL
JOB NAME:
HINGED PANEL JOINT
UIC CONSTRUCTION
VINYL BULB SEAL
FABRICATION HEIGHT
FINISHED OPENING HEIGHT
TRACK
PANEL FINISH
EXPANDABLE PANEL WITH JAMB
4.25"
TRIM COLOR
REQUIREMENTS BY OTHERS
HINGE COLOR
BLOCKING AND
8 (lbs./sq.ft.)
BALL BEARING TROLLEY
CLOSURE METHOD
STEEL, 4-WHEEL,
PANEL SKIN/FACING
JAMB FINISH
SAME AS PANELS
VINYL TOP SEAL
50 STC
PRE-PAINTED OFF WHITE
HANGING WEIGHT
#17 TRACK, STEEL,
.75"
FIXED
DROPPED SOFFIT TRIM
LOCATION:
CEILING
WRAPPED WITH MATERIAL
0
FINISHED
EXPANDABLE PANEL NOSE
RECOMMEND SOUND
BAFFLE - NOT BY
MODERNFOLD OR
DISTRIBUTOR
MINIMUM
4"
TRAVEL
PANEL ACOUSTICAL RATING
0" - 5.75"
#17 STD BKT
HANGER BRACKET
BY MODERNFOLD
BOTTOM SEALS
CAULKING BETWEEN
JAMB AND WALL
TRACK SYSTEM
GAGE
HANGER RODS
BY DISTRIBUTOR
EXPANDABLE - 6"
8'-0"
4.50"
0.38" DIAMETER
FABRICATION HEIGHT
BRACKET
932FS DETAILS - OP-01
5.75"
ORDER NO.
SHEET NO.
3
OF:
4
A DORMA Group Company
18'-9"
FABRIC
TO BE ADVISED
SELECTION
REV
ISSUED FOR
DRN.
0
APPROVAL
MPM
1
3
4
5
6
PROJECT REFERENCE NUMBER
1.
PUNCH OR DRILL .44" DIA. HOLES, 2.25" EACH SIDE OF
CENTERLINE, 4.50" GAGE, AT ALL LOCATIONS, AS NOTED.
2. OMIT RODS AND NUTS
DISTRIBUTOR:
CONTRACTOR:
DATE
04/30/14
2
NOTES:
DOOR SYSTEMS OF ALASKA, INC.
TO BE ADVISED
PANEL FINISH
TO BE ADVISED
UNKNOWN
HINGE COLOR
TRIM COLOR
8 (lbs./sq.ft.)
GYPSUM
50 STC
HANGING WEIGHT
PANEL SKIN/FACING
ARCHITECT:
JOB NAME:
RECESSED FLOOR TRACK
FIXED
TRACK SECTION
PANEL ACOUSTICAL RATING
TRACK SECTION
CLOSURE METHOD
2'-9"
UIC CONSTRUCTION
16'-0"
UNKNOWN
6"
ARCHITECT:
1'-6"
#17 STD BKT
1'-6"
BOTTOM SEALS
O/C
6"
VARIABLE
TRACK SYSTEM
SPACES @
1'-9"
48"
ANCHORAGE, AK
O/C
2
STACK END
SPACES @
24"
LOCATION:
8'-0"
4'-0"
2
EXPANDABLE - 6"
8'-0"
TRACK SECTION
6"
6"
FABRICATION HEIGHT
4'-0"
REMOVABLE
0
14'-9"
TRACK SECTION
932FS TRACK - OP-01
TRACK INSTALLATION WIDTH
P-043014141418
ORDER NO.
SHEET NO.
4
OF:
4
KITCHEN
FAUCETS
■Signature™ Pull-Out Series
■Single Handle Deck Mount
■Single or 3 Hole Sink Applications
470-DST, 470-WE-DST
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS:­
• Single handle kitchen faucets for exposed
472-DST
mounting on single and three hole sinks.
Submitted Model No.:________________________________________________
Specific Features:___________________________________________________
470-DST / 472-DST
• Centermount or 8" (203 mm) centers with optional
included 10 3/4" (273 mm) long escutheon.
• 8" (203 mm) high, 9" (229 mm) long spout
[includes 6 1/4" (159 mm) long pull-out spray]
nestled in all metal hub assembly, swings 120°.
• Spout is connected to valve body with a 53"
(1346 mm) long hose that extends to 34"
(864 mm) usable length.
• Pull-out spout operates in an aerated or spray
mode via an easy side-to-side push lever.
• Lever or loop handle shall return to neutral
position when faucet is turned off.
• Control mechanism shall be the diamond coated
ceramic cartridge.
• Red/blue graphics on handle button to indicate
hot/cold temperature.
• Touch-Clean® sprayhead.
• 3/8" O.D. straight, staggered pex supply
tubes - 35" (889 mm) and 36" (914 mm) long.
• Standard 3/8" (10 mm) compression gasket fittings.
• Integral double check valves in spout.
9"
(229 mm)
10"
(254 mm)
8"
(203 mm)
6 5/8"
(168 mm)
1 15/16"
(50 mm)
2 1/2"
(64 mm)
Max. Deck
Thickness
35"
(889 mm)
36"
(914 mm)
WARRANTY
10 3/4"
(273 mm)
• Lifetime limited warranty on parts (other than
electronic parts and batteries) and finishes:
or, for commercial users, for 5 years from
date of purchase.
• 5 year limited warranty on electronic parts
(other than batteries); or, for commercial
users, for 1 year from the date of purchase.
No warranty is provided on batteries.
8"
(203 mm)
Centers
3/8" Compression Fitting
470-DST / 472-DST
9"
(229 mm)
®
COMPLIES WITH:
• ASME A112.18.1 / CSA B125.1
• ASME A112.18.6
Indicates compliance to 10"
(254 mm)
8"
(203 mm)
ICC/ANSI A117.1
6 5/8"
(168 mm)
average Pb content regulations.
35"
(889 mm)
36"
(914 mm)
4.50
0
69
138
Pressure (kPa)
207
276
345
414
483
552
621
17.0
3.75
14.2
3.00
11.4
2.25
8.5
1.50
5.7
.75
2.8
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Pressure (PSI)
70
80
90
3/8" Compression Fitting
Delta reserves the right (1) to make changes in specifications and materials, and (2) to change or discontinue
models, both without notice or obligation. Dimensions are for reference only. See current full-line price book or
www.deltafaucet.com for finish options and product availability.
DSP-K-141-DST Rev. E
55 E. 111th Street, Indianapolis, Indiana 46280
350 South Edgeware Road, St. Thomas, ON N5P 4L1
© 2014 Masco Corporation of Indiana
0
Flow (Liters Per Minute)
2 1/2"
(64 mm)
Max. Deck
Thickness
• Verified compliant with .25% weighted
Flow (U.S. Gallons Per Minute)
2 5/16"
(59 mm)
Dia.
Electrical Cutsheets
PW-Series
Modular Access
Control System
Intelligent Controllers
The PW-Series Modular Control System is an advanced access
control hardware architecture capable of providing solutions for
large enterprise applications. The Intelligent Controller (PW6K1IC,
PW3K1IC or PW6K1ICE) provides power and flexibility with its
32-bit architecture, TCP/IP support, flash memory, large local
cardholder database, and large reader and I/O module support.
The Intelligent Controller is designed to operate off-line, making
access control decisions independently from a PC or other
controlling device. It can also be connected to a host computer
for system configuration, alarm monitoring and direct control.
Connectivity to the host computer is accomplished via direct
serial communication (RS232 or RS485), dial-up modem, or
TCP/IP network connection. The PW-6000 has Ethernet directly
embedded and will support a second Ethernet connection.
The PW6K1IC Intelligent Controllers support any combination of
up to 32 I/O or reader boards (16 for the PW3K1IC) to monitor
alarm input points, relay output points and access control reader
interfaces. By offering a modular design, the system can be
tailored to meet a wide range of applications, while optimizing
cost and mounting space.
The PW-6000 will support up to 600,000 cards and 50,000
transactions. The PW-6101 will support up to 240,000 cards
and 50,000 transactions. The PW-3000 Intelligent Controller
accommodates a card database of 7,800 cards and a standard
transaction buffer of 5,000 transactions.
The PW-Series access modules have been designed to
accommodate various mounting options. Units can be wall
mounted in a high density configuration (PW5K2ENC1) when
space is limited, a 19" rack configuration (PW5K2ENC2), or
in a tile mount configuration (PW5K1ENC3). The PW-6000
controller utilizes a built-in Web server to configure the hardware
attributes of the controller.
K E Y F E AT U R E S
• Up to 12 intervals per time zone where
each interval is a start time, stop time
and day map. The day map indicates
the day of the week or holiday
• 255 possible holidays are defined by a
starting date and duration
• Automatic calculation of leap year and
Daylight Saving Time
• 9-digit (32-bit) user ID standard /
15-digit maximum - PW-3000, 19-digit
(64-bit) user ID - PW-6000/PW-6101
• Support for FIPS long card numbers
• Activation and deactivation dates by card
• Up to 32 access levels per card or
individual time zones per readers
• Up to 8-digit Personal Identification
•
•
•
•
•
•
Numbers (PIN) - PW-3000,
15-digit - PW6000/PW-6101
Operating modes include locked,
unlocked, facility code, card only, card
and PIN, card or PIN, and PIN only
Strike modes include fail-safe and
fail-secure
Up to eight card formats per reader
Entire card bit-stream reported with
invalid facility code or invalid card format
Anti-passback support – free pass
and exempt flags, last area accessed,
last reader accessed and time/date of
last access
Configurable as standard, entry delay
latching, entry delay non-latching
and exit delay
• Configurable as standard (energize
to activate) or fail-safe (de-energize
to activate)
• Pulse control: single pulse (up to 24
hours) or repeating pulses (on/off in 0.1
second increments, up to 255 times)
• Any combination of 32 I/O or reader
modules may be connected to the
PW6K1IC RS485 ports. 4,000 feet /
1,250 meters total bus length per port
(a max 16 I/O or reader board may
connect to the PW3K1IC)
• UL294, UL1076 Listed
• AES FIPS 197 Encryption
• PW-6000 Web server for
hardware configuration
PW-Series Modular Access Control System
Intelligent Controllers
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
Database:
• Cardholders:
- 7,800 on PW-3000
- 600,000 on PW-6000
- 240,000 on PW-6101
• Transaction storage:
- 5,000 standard, 35,000
with memory expansion
on PW-3000
- 50,000 on PW-6000/PW-6101
• Flash programming for firmware
revision updates
• Access codes: virtually unlimited
• Holidays: virtually unlimited
• Time codes: 255
• Card reader formats: 8 per reader
• Credential facility codes: 8
• Elevator support: 128 floors
• Dedicated tamper alarm
• Dedicated power fail alarm
• Real time clock:
- Geographic time zone support
- Daylight Saving Time
- Leap year support
- 4 bit parallel accurate to 50 ppm
Database values may exceed current limitations of some
security management systems.
Communication Modules:
• Primary communication support:
- RS232
- RS485
- Dial up modem
- Ethernet (TCP/IP)
• Communication speed: 38.4 KBps
• Redundant communication support,
automatic dial back: (PW6K1IC)
- Dial back on alarm condition
- Dial back on transaction buffer
capacity reached
- Dial back on primary power loss
• Download functionality:
- System functional during system
download: Yes
- System functional during
credential download: Yes
Access Modules:
PW-6000
• 2 RS485 ports supporting
32 total devices
PW-6101
• POE - Supporting 16 Single Reader
Modules via ethernet (PW6K1ICE or
PW6K1R1E)
PW-3000
• 2 RS485 ports supporting
16 total devices
• Access modules available:
- Single reader module (PW5K1R1)
- Dual reader module (PW6K1R2)
- 16 relay output module
(PW6K1OUT) (12 from the
front edge)
- 16 alarm input module (PW6K1IN)
• Module connectivity via RS485
protocol (4000')
Operational Functionality:
• Duress detection
• Operational modes:
- Credential only
- PIN only
- Credential or PIN
- Credential and PIN
- Facility code only
• Maximum PIN size: 8 digit
• Door object support
• Threat level support: 100 levels
• Two person access rule
• Offline modes (selectable per reader):
- Facility code access
- Locked (no access)
- Unlocked (free access)
• Anti-passback support:
- While preventing access (hard)
- While allowing access (soft)
• Transaction prioritization: 999 levels
Reader Support:
• HID
• Indala
• OmniProx
• OmniClass
• DigiReaders
• Wiegand
• Keypads
• Ingersoll Rand AD-400 Wireless
Lock Sets (PW-6000 panels only)
Readers and Credentials:
• Prox:
- OmniProx
- HID Prox
- DigiReaders
- Indala Readers
• Smart:
- OmniClass
- iClass
- Mifare
- DESFire
• Keypad
• Magstripe
• Wiegand
C O M M O N S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
Enclosure Dimensions:
• Board:
PW-3000/PW-6000
9.0" H x 5.5" W x 1.0" D
(228.6 mm H x 139.7 mm W x 25.4 mm D)
Environment:
• Temperature: 32 to 158° F (0 to 70° C) operational;
-67 to 185° F (-55 to 85° C) storage
• PW-6101 IC and 0.96" H x 5.5" W x 2.75" D
Reader Module: (24mm H x 140mm W x 92mm D)
Wire requirements:
• Power - twisted pair, 18 AWG
• PW5K2ENC1:
13.9" H x 17" W x 9" D
(353.0 mm H x 431.8 mm W x 228.6 mm D)
• RS485 - 24 AWG, 4,000' (1,200m) max, 2 twisted pairs
with shield (120W, 23 pF, Belden 9842 or equiv.)
• PW5K2ENC2:
13.9" H x 18.9" W x 9" D
(353.0 mm H x 480.0 mm W x 228.6 mm D)
• PW5K1ENC3:
14" H x 16" W x 4.5" D
(355.6 mm H x 406.4 mm W x 114.3 mm D)
• Humidity: 0 to 95% RHNC
• RS232 - 24 AWG, 25' (7.6m) max
• Alarm input - twisted pair, 30 ohms max
Communication Features:
• RS485 port, 4000’ (1,250m) total bus length
• Standard speed is 38,400 bps
BENEFITS
• True 32-bit microprocessor provides
fast transaction processing for the
most demanding network applications
• Modular hardware architecture provides
flexibility and expansion capabilities
• Flash memory allows new versions of
firmware to be downloaded from the
host computer to the controller(s)
through the central network
• Large, local controller database allows
access control decisions to be made
by controller in real time without the
need to communicate to the server
• Scalable architecture ensures optimal
performance with a seamless upgrade
path to accommodate future growth
beyond its initial installation
• Seamless support for TCP/IP
protocols to allow intelligent
controllers to tap into a LAN
or WAN connectivity
• Supports multiple reader and card
formats for maximum flexibility and
security options
• Multiple communication methods
provide redundant paths for more
robust system connectivity
P W - S E R I E S C O N F I G U R AT I O N
• Supervised communication and
Lithium battery backup ensures
system reliability
• System offline modes customizable
per reader include facility code
access, locked (no access), and
unlocked (full access)
• Redundant communication port
feature allowing secondary port
communication if primary fails
PW-Series Modular Access Control System
Intelligent Controllers
ORDERING
Order #
Order #
Description
PW-3000 and PW-6000 Intelligent Control System
PW6K1IC
PW-6000 Intelligent Controller – Capacity for 32 I/O or reader boards
PW3K1IC
PW-3000 Intelligent Controller – Capacity for 16 I/O or reader boards
PW6K1IN
PW-Series 16 input module
PW6K1OUT
PW-Series 16 relay output module
PW5K1R1
PW-Series single reader module (only for use in PW5K1ENC4)
PW6K1R2
PW-Series dual reader module
PW5K1MX8
8-Port multiplexer
PW-6101 Intelligent Control System
PW6K1ICE
Intelligent Controller
PW6K1R1E
One door reader module
Enclosures and Accessories
PW5K2ENC1
PW-Series high density enclosure (power supply and battery not
included) PW-Series high density enclosure for 19" rack installations
(power supply and battery not included)
PW6K2E2PS
PW-Series 110/220 VAC, 4 amp power supply for PW5K2ENC1
and PW5K2ENC2 enclosures
PW5K1ENC3
PW-Series remote enclosure with plug-in with 110V
transformer/power supply
PW5K1ENC4
Single reader enclosure (for use with PW5K1R1)
PW5K1DCC
PW-Series daisy chain cable
Pro-Watch® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.
Microsoft®, Microsoft® BackOffice® and Windows® 2000 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
For more information: www.honeywellintegrated.com
Automation and Control Solutions
Honeywell Security Products Americas
2700 Blankenbaker Pkwy, Suite 150
Louisville, KY 40299
1.800.323.4576
www.honeywell.com
Description
L/PWSMACSD/D
October 2012
© 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
User and Job File Information
User Information
Voice Number :
Fax Number :
Email Address :
Job File Information
Filename :
Location :
Created By :
Created Date :
Created Version :
Modified By :
Modified Date :
Modified Version :
Total Time (Hrs) :
Description :
EOS First Floor.AGI
W:\040\Lcopping\Alaska_Borrow_EOC\Lighting\
KNVGNH45R1
6/9/2014 4:42:07 PM
2.36.0
KNVCT7RBS1
8/6/2014 8:55:03 AM
15.2.10
.87
Information :
1
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOS First Floor.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Luminaire Definition(s)
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
6HF 2/26DTT F6O2AZ
Filename
Lumens Per Lamp
Number of Lamps
Total Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Efficiency (%)
Total Light Loss Factor
Luminaire Watts
Arrangement Watts
Arrangement
Arm Length
Offset
Road Classification
Upward Waste Light Ratio
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ.ies
1800
2
3600
3600
1752
1752
49
0.640
62
62
SINGLE
0
0
Type VS, Very Short, Full Cutoff (deprecated)
0.00
Luminaire Classification System (LCS)
LCS-FL
LCS-FM
LCS-FH
LCS-FVH
LCS-BL
LCS-BM
LCS-BH
LCS-BVH
LCS-UL
LCS-UH
Total
Lumens
370.2
501.3
4.6
0.0
370.2
501.3
4.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
1752.2
Indoor Classification
LER
B1-U0-G0
Direct
28
% Lamp
10.3
13.9
0.1
0.0
10.3
13.9
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
48.6
% Luminaire
21.1
28.6
0.3
0.0
21.1
28.6
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
100.0
2PM4_2_32_12LD
2PM4 2 32 12LD
Filename
Lumens Per Lamp
Number of Lamps
Total Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Efficiency (%)
Total Light Loss Factor
Luminaire Watts
Arrangement Watts
2PM4_2_32_12LD.ies
2900
2
5800
5800
3999
3999
69
0.640
77
77
2
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOS First Floor.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Luminaire Definition(s) - Cont.
Arrangement
Arm Length
Offset
Road Classification
Upward Waste Light Ratio
SINGLE
0
0
Type VS, Very Short, Full Cutoff (deprecated)
0.00
Luminaire Classification System (LCS)
LCS-FL
LCS-FM
LCS-FH
LCS-FVH
LCS-BL
LCS-BM
LCS-BH
LCS-BVH
LCS-UL
LCS-UH
Total
BUG Rating
Indoor Classification
LER
Lumens
597.0
1282.5
118.8
1.4
597.0
1282.5
118.8
1.4
0.0
0.0
3999.4
B2-U0-G0
Direct
52
% Lamp
10.3
22.1
2.0
0.0
10.3
22.1
2.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
68.8
% Luminaire
14.9
32.1
3.0
0.0
14.9
32.1
3.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
100.0
3
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOS First Floor.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Calculation Summary
CORRIDOR 133_Floor
Project: Project_1
CORRIDOR 133_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
26.30
31.5
13.8
1.91
2.28
UNDER STAIR STORAGE_Floor
Project: Project_1
UNDER STAIR STORAGE_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
25.73
30.3
20.4
1.26
1.49
4
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOS First Floor.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Room(s):
CORRIDOR 133
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Polygon Shaped Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
8.5 ft
UNDER STAIR STORAGE
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Rectangular Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
8.5 ft
5
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOS First Floor.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
105 105
105
106
101A
UP
UP
UP
101
116
103
102
D
D
124
126
122
117
125
123
21.7
24.1
25.7
25.3
29.1
30.3
24.9
29.2
29.9
20.4
18.7
20.9
22.1
22.6
22.6
23.0
23.5
23.7
23.7
23.5
23.2
23.7
24.1
24.3
24.1
23.8
23.3
23.4
23.3
22.7
20.9
18.3
15.7
13.8
22.1
24.8
26.2
26.8
26.7
27.3
27.8
28.2
28.1
27.8
27.4
27.8
28.3
28.6
28.4
28.0
27.4
27.5
27.6
27.0
25.1
22.1
19.2
17.0
23.6
136
26.3
28.2
29.4
29.7
30.2
30.4
30.4
30.4
30.3
30.0
30.2
30.4
30.5
30.5
30.4
29.9
29.9
29.8
29.1
27.5
25.0
22.3
20.0
23.5
26.2
28.5
30.3
31.3
31.5
31.1
30.5
30.6
31.0
31.1
31.1
30.9
30.4
30.8
31.0
30.9
30.7
30.2
29.2
28.2
26.6
24.7
22.3
23.7
24.9
136
25.8
30.3
29.9
24.8
24.5
29.5
28.6
23.3
21.0
24.9
24.7
20.9
121
119
118
133
2'-7"
23.1
25.9
27.9
29.2
30.2
30.1
29.2
28.3
28.7
29.4
29.8
29.6
29.1
28.5
28.9
29.5
29.7
29.2
28.4
27.4
26.9
26.0
24.8
22.3
21.7
23.7
24.3
25.2
26.3
26.0
25.5
25.1
25.4
26.0
26.4
26.4
25.9
25.3
25.6
26.2
26.4
26.0
25.3
24.4
24.0
23.5
22.7
20.6
17.9
18.5
16.1
120
133A
133A
3
E
3'-10"
135
132
134
F
133B
133B
User and Job File Information
User Information
Voice Number :
Fax Number :
Email Address :
Job File Information
Filename :
Location :
Created By :
Created Date :
Created Version :
Modified By :
Modified Date :
Modified Version :
Total Time (Hrs) :
Description :
EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
W:\040\Lcopping\Alaska_Borrow_EOC\Lighting\New floor plans\
KNVGNH45R1
6/10/2014 4:14:51 PM
2.36.0
KNVCT7RBS1
8/6/2014 9:33:46 AM
15.2.10
22.87
Information :
1
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Luminaire Definition(s)
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
2RT8S 2 32 LP735
Filename
Lumens Per Lamp
Number of Lamps
Total Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Efficiency (%)
Lamp Lumen Depreciation (LLD)
Luminaire Dirt Depreciation (LDD)
Total Light Loss Factor
Luminaire Watts
Arrangement Watts
Arrangement
Arm Length
Offset
Road Classification
Upward Waste Light Ratio
2RT8S_2_32_LP735.ies
2800
2
5600
5600
4516
4516
81
0.800
0.800
0.640
54.8
54.8
SINGLE
0
0
Type VS, Very Short, Full Cutoff (deprecated)
0.00
Luminaire Classification System (LCS)
LCS-FL
LCS-FM
LCS-FH
LCS-FVH
LCS-BL
LCS-BM
LCS-BH
LCS-BVH
LCS-UL
LCS-UH
Total
BUG Rating
Indoor Classification
LER
Lumens
599.4
1216.3
423.9
18.3
599.4
1216.3
423.9
18.3
0.0
0.0
4515.8
B2-U0-G1
Direct
82
% Lamp
10.7
21.7
7.6
0.3
10.7
21.7
7.6
0.3
0.0
0.0
80.6
% Luminaire
13.3
26.9
9.4
0.4
13.3
26.9
9.4
0.4
0.0
0.0
100.0
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
6HF 2/26DTT F6O2AZ
Filename
Lumens Per Lamp
Number of Lamps
Total Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Efficiency (%)
Total Light Loss Factor
Luminaire Watts
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ.ies
1800
2
3600
3600
1752
1752
49
0.640
62
2
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Luminaire Definition(s) - Cont.
Arrangement Watts
Arrangement
Arm Length
Offset
Road Classification
Upward Waste Light Ratio
62
SINGLE
0
0
Type VS, Very Short, Full Cutoff (deprecated)
0.00
Luminaire Classification System (LCS)
LCS-FL
LCS-FM
LCS-FH
LCS-FVH
LCS-BL
LCS-BM
LCS-BH
LCS-BVH
LCS-UL
LCS-UH
Total
BUG Rating
Indoor Classification
LER
Lumens
370.2
501.3
4.6
0.0
370.2
501.3
4.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
1752.2
B1-U0-G0
Direct
28
% Lamp
10.3
13.9
0.1
0.0
10.3
13.9
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
48.6
% Luminaire
21.1
28.6
0.3
0.0
21.1
28.6
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
100.0
WC_2_32
WC 2 32
Filename
Lumens Per Lamp
Number of Lamps
Total Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Efficiency (%)
Total Light Loss Factor
Luminaire Watts
Arrangement Watts
Arrangement
Arm Length
Offset
Road Classification
Upward Waste Light Ratio
WC_2_32.ies
2900
2
5800
5800
3706
3706
64
0.640
58
58
SINGLE
0
0
Type IV, Medium, Non-Cutoff (deprecated)
0.50
Luminaire Classification System (LCS)
LCS-FL
LCS-FM
LCS-FH
LCS-FVH
LCS-BL
LCS-BM
LCS-BH
Lumens
146.1
389.4
276.4
115.6
146.1
389.4
276.4
% Lamp
2.5
6.7
4.8
2.0
2.5
6.7
4.8
% Luminaire
3.9
10.5
7.5
3.1
3.9
10.5
7.5
3
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Luminaire Definition(s) - Cont.
LCS-BVH
LCS-UL
LCS-UH
Total
BUG Rating
Indoor Classification
LER
115.6
2.0
226.0
3.9
1624.6
28.0
3705.6
63.9
B1-U5-G2
General Diffuse
64
3.1
6.1
43.8
100.0
2PM4_2_32_12LD
2PM4 2 32 12LD
Filename
Lumens Per Lamp
Number of Lamps
Total Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Efficiency (%)
Total Light Loss Factor
Luminaire Watts
Arrangement Watts
Arrangement
Arm Length
Offset
Road Classification
Upward Waste Light Ratio
2PM4_2_32_12LD.ies
2900
2
5800
5800
3999
3999
69
0.640
77
77
SINGLE
0
0
Type VS, Very Short, Full Cutoff (deprecated)
0.00
Luminaire Classification System (LCS)
LCS-FL
LCS-FM
LCS-FH
LCS-FVH
LCS-BL
LCS-BM
LCS-BH
LCS-BVH
LCS-UL
LCS-UH
Total
BUG Rating
Indoor Classification
LER
Lumens
597.0
1282.5
118.8
1.4
597.0
1282.5
118.8
1.4
0.0
0.0
3999.4
B2-U0-G0
Direct
52
% Lamp
10.3
22.1
2.0
0.0
10.3
22.1
2.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
68.8
% Luminaire
14.9
32.1
3.0
0.0
14.9
32.1
3.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
100.0
AF_2_32
AF 2 32
Filename
Lumens Per Lamp
Number of Lamps
AF_2_32.ies
2900
2
4
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Luminaire Definition(s) - Cont.
Total Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Efficiency (%)
Total Light Loss Factor
Luminaire Watts
Arrangement Watts
Arrangement
Arm Length
Offset
Pendant Mounted
Road Classification
Upward Waste Light Ratio
5800
5800
5258
5258
91
0.640
58
58
SINGLE
1.5
0
Luminaire Classification System (LCS)
LCS-FL
LCS-FM
LCS-FH
LCS-FVH
LCS-BL
LCS-BM
LCS-BH
LCS-BVH
LCS-UL
LCS-UH
Total
BUG Rating
Indoor Classification
LER
Lumens
% Lamp
497.4
8.6
1058.9
18.3
435.3
7.5
43.6
0.8
497.4
8.6
1058.9
18.3
435.3
7.5
43.6
0.8
59.1
1.0
1128.9
19.5
5258.4
90.9
B2-U5-G1
Semi-Direct
91
Type VS, Very Short, Non-Cutoff (deprecated)
0.23
% Luminaire
9.5
20.1
8.3
0.8
9.5
20.1
8.3
0.8
1.1
21.5
100.0
2PM4_3_32_24LS
2PM4 3 32 24LS
Filename
Lumens Per Lamp
Number of Lamps
Total Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Lamp Lumens
Arrangement Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Lumens
Luminaire Efficiency (%)
Total Light Loss Factor
Luminaire Watts
Arrangement Watts
Arrangement
Arm Length
Offset
Road Classification
Upward Waste Light Ratio
2PM4_3_32_24LS.ies
2850
3
8550
8550
5727
5727
67
1.000
87.2
87.2
SINGLE
0
0
Type VS, Very Short, Full Cutoff (deprecated)
0.00
5
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Luminaire Definition(s) - Cont.
Luminaire Classification System (LCS)
LCS-FL
LCS-FM
LCS-FH
LCS-FVH
LCS-BL
LCS-BM
LCS-BH
LCS-BVH
LCS-UL
LCS-UH
Total
BUG Rating
Indoor Classification
LER
Lumens
1005.7
1788.1
69.2
0.4
1005.7
1788.1
69.2
0.4
0.0
0.0
5726.8
B3-U0-G0
Direct
66
% Lamp
11.8
20.9
0.8
0.0
11.8
20.9
0.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
67.0
% Luminaire
17.6
31.2
1.2
0.0
17.6
31.2
1.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
100.0
6
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Luminaire Location(s)
Luminaire Locations
Project Name : Project_1
Coordinates in Feet
Aiming Point
Lum.
No.
Label
X
68
75
77
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
58
59
50
51
52
53
34
35
36
39
38
37
31
32
33
8
9
10
27
30
29
26
25
28
11
13
14
15
49
48
47
40
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 62.9
AF_2_32
57.7
AF_2_32
46.4
AF_2_32
35.2
AF_2_32
36.5
AF_2_32
36.5
AF_2_32
13.9
AF_2_32
2.6
AF_2_32
25.5
WC_2_32
31.7
WC_2_32
28
WC_2_32
31.7
WC_2_32
28.3
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 35.9
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 29.9
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 23.5
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 23.5
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 23.5
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 23.5
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 17
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 17
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 17
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 11.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 11.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 11.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 5.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 5.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 5.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 3.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 3.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 3.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 9.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 15
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 15
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 9.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 9.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 15
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ18.8
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ18.8
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ18.8
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ18.8
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ13.2
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ9.1
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ5.1
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ1.4
Y
Z
Orient
Tilt
Roll Spin X
Y
Z
Status
76.2
66.3
66.3
67.9
58.3
50.1
52
52
52
78.7
78.7
74.5
72.6
83.2
83.2
70
65.9
62
57.9
59.3
65.4
71.4
71.4
65.4
59.3
59.3
65.4
71.4
80.4
86.5
92.5
92.5
92.5
86.5
86.5
80.4
80.4
93.5
89.5
85.5
81.4
76.4
76.4
76.4
76.4
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
90
0
0
0
90
90
0
0
0
90
90
90
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
37.875
307.875
270
270
37.875
37.875
37.875
37.875
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
76.2
66.3
66.3
67.9
58.3
50.1
52
52
52
78.7
78.7
74.5
72.6
83.2
83.2
70
65.9
62
57.9
59.3
65.4
71.4
71.4
65.4
59.3
59.3
65.4
71.4
80.4
86.5
92.5
92.5
92.5
86.5
86.5
80.4
80.4
93.5
89.5
85.5
81.4
76.4
76.4
76.4
76.4
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
62.9
57.7
46.4
35.2
36.5
36.5
13.9
2.6
25.5
31.7
28
31.7
28.3
35.9
29.9
23.5
23.5
23.5
23.5
17
17
17
11.1
11.1
11.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
9.1
15
15
9.1
9.1
15
18.8
18.8
18.8
18.8
13.2
9.1
5.1
1.4
7
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Luminaire Location(s) - Cont.
41
42
43
46
44
67
65
66
97
71
72
73
74
80
81
78
79
98
99
100
101
102
107
108
109
110
55
56
93
103
69
70
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ1.4
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ1.4
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ1.4
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ1.3
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ1.3
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 53.7
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 56.7
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 52.7
AF_2_32
9.7
AF_2_32
77.7
AF_2_32
77.7
AF_2_32
67.7
AF_2_32
67.7
AF_2_32
77.7
AF_2_32
67.7
AF_2_32
46.75
AF_2_32
49
AF_2_32
41.9
AF_2_32
53.5
AF_2_32
53.5
AF_2_32
60
AF_2_32
60
AF_2_32
4.5
AF_2_32
4.5
AF_2_32
4.5
AF_2_32
4.5
2PM4_3_32_24LS
29.9
2PM4_3_32_24LS
29.9
2PM4_3_32_24LS
44.7
2PM4_3_32_24LS
44.7
2PM4_2_32_12LD
73.6
2PM4_2_32_12LD
69.5
72.4
68.4
64.3
60.6
56.6
77.8
72.8
72.8
46.6
66.3
58.3
66.3
58.3
50.1
50.1
60.3
50.2
50.2
58.3
50.1
58.3
50.1
45.1
40.5
36
31.5
59
66.9
71.6
77.5
92.3
88.3
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8
8
8
8
12
12
12
12
12
12
9.5
9.5
9.5
12
12
12
12
8
8
8
8
8.5
8.5
8
8
8
8
307.875
270
270
307.875
270
0
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
180
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
0
0
90
90
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.3
1.3
53.7
56.7
52.7
9.7
77.7
77.7
67.7
67.7
77.7
67.7
46.75
49
41.9
53.5
53.5
60
60
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
29.9
29.9
44.7
44.7
73.6
69.5
72.4
68.4
64.3
60.6
56.6
77.8
72.8
72.8
46.6
66.3
58.3
66.3
58.3
50.1
50.1
60.3
50.2
50.2
58.3
50.1
58.3
50.1
45.1
40.5
36
31.5
59
66.9
71.6
77.5
92.3
88.3
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8
8
8
8
12
12
12
12
12
12
9.5
9.5
9.5
12
12
12
12
8
8
8
8
8.5
8.5
8
8
8
8
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Summary By Label
Project Name : Project_1
Label
On
2RT8S_2_32_LP735 28
2VT8_3_32_ADP_LPSM735
0
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ13
WC_2_32
4
RT8B_1_32_LP735
0
2PM4_2_32_12LD
2
AF_2_32
26
2PM4_4_32_32LD
0
2PM4_3_32_24LS
4
Off
Total
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
28
0
13
4
0
2
26
0
4
8
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Calculation Summary
2ND STORY CORRIDOR STORAGE_Floor
Project: Project_1
2ND STORY CORRIDOR STORAGE_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
21.72
30.9
8.6
2.53
3.59
CORRIDOR_Floor
Project: Project_1
CORRIDOR_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
20.56
24.5
17.9
1.15
1.37
KITCHEN 207_Floor
Project: Project_1
KITCHEN 207_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
9
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Calculation Summary - Cont.
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
36.27
47.1
22.0
1.65
2.14
MEZZ STAIR AREA_Floor
Project: Project_1
MEZZ STAIR AREA_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
33.93
40.4
21.3
1.59
1.90
OFFICE 206_Floor
Project: Project_1
OFFICE 206_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
64.17
81.6
44.6
1.44
1.83
ROOM 201_Floor
Project: Project_1
ROOM 201_Floor
10
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Calculation Summary - Cont.
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
59.77
73.5
40.0
1.49
1.84
ROOM 202_Floor
Project: Project_1
ROOM 202_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
60.93
78.4
29.7
2.05
2.64
ROOM 203 DISPATCH_Floor
Project: Project_1
ROOM 203 DISPATCH_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
41.85
50.5
31.5
11
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Calculation Summary - Cont.
Avg/Min
Max/Min
1.33
1.60
ROOM 204 SERVER_Floor
Project: Project_1
ROOM 204 SERVER_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
44.25
53.1
28.0
1.58
1.90
STAIR_Floor
Project: Project_1
STAIR_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
31.29
42.2
17.9
1.75
2.36
STORAGE 211_Floor
Project: Project_1
STORAGE 211_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
2
2
12
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Calculation Summary - Cont.
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
25.91
30.5
20.4
1.27
1.50
UPS ROOM_1_Floor
Project: Project_1
UPS ROOM_1_Floor
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
25.44
32.3
14.7
1.73
2.20
UPS ROOM_Workplane
Project: Project_1
UPS ROOM_Workplane
Coordinates in Feet
Point Spacing L-R
Point Spacing T-B
Grid Orient
Grid Tilt
Meter Type
2
2
0
0
Normal to grid
Illuminance (Fc)
Average
Maximum
Minimum
Avg/Min
Max/Min
27.93
36.0
17.0
1.64
2.12
13
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Room(s):
2ND STORY CORRIDOR STORAGE
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Polygon Shaped Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
10 ft
CORRIDOR
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Rectangular Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
8.5 ft
KITCHEN 207
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Rectangular Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
8.5 ft
MEZZ STAIR AREA
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Rectangular Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
18 ft
OFFICE 206
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Rectangular Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
8 ft
ROOM 201
EOC
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Rectangular Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
8.5 ft
ROOM 202
EOC
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Rectangular Floor - Flat Ceiling
14
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
Room(s): - Cont.
Wall Height
8.5
ft
ROOM 203 DISPATCH
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Rectangular Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
8.5 ft
ROOM 204 SERVER
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Rectangular Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
8.5 ft
STAIR
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Polygon Shaped Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
12 ft
STORAGE 211
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Polygon Shaped Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
8.5 ft
UPS ROOM
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Rectangular Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
10 ft
UPS ROOM_1
Project: Project_1
Room Type: Polygon Shaped Floor - Flat Ceiling
Wall Height
18 ft
15
AGi32 - Copyright 1999-2014 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
Job File: EOC_2nd_Floor Lighting New Flooor Plan.AGI
Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.
Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file.
8/6/2014
1
2
3
4
5
A
B
208
209
210
C
C
MB
40.0
MB
45.0
47.6
49.6
51.0
52.6
53.6
54.4
51.0
ROOM 201
Wall height =
22.7
25.7
27.4
30.2
29.8
24.6
DN
DN
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
8.5
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
47.9
52.5
55.9
58.8
60.9
62.2
63.1
63.0
60.3
51.9
56.9
60.7
64.0
66.5
68.1
68.6
68.9
65.5
53.9
59.6
63.7
66.9
69.9
71.5
72.3
72.9
68.4
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
200
11'-5 5/8"
2'-0 7/8"
211
21.6
211
26.7
23.7
27.8
20.4
23.9
2PM4_2_32_12LD
28.7
30.5
28.7
28.9
28.1
25.7
24.7
23.4
20.9
211
8'-9 1/2"
9'-10 1/2"
5'-4 1/2"
2PM4_2_32_12LD
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
54.5
60.2
64.2
67.7
70.7
72.5
73.0
73.5
68.9
53.7
59.4
63.2
66.8
69.4
70.9
71.4
71.3
66.4
51.6
56.8
60.5
63.5
65.9
67.0
67.2
67.1
62.2
RAMP
DOWN
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
52.2
55.5
58.0
39.9
35.5
31.0
42.2
38.0
32.0
28.5
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
59.6
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
60.7
60.7
59.8
39.8
WC_2_32
45.3
47.9
49.5
50.7
201B
201B
51.5
51.3
50.1
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
56.5
59.0
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
60.3
58.9
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
56.3
50.4
44.4
38.0
202
202
56.2
68.3
70.8
70.4
68.9
65.7
60.6
54.7
55.4
51.1
44.6
25.7
207203 30.9
65.2
72.0
67.1
54.8
33.0
40.4
74.2
81.3
75.9
63.0
37.2
44.5
74.9
81.6
76.4
63.9
38.3
46.0
68.7
76.4
70.8
57.7
35.3
43.7
29.9
28.2
22.0
40.2
37.1
28.8
45.3
42.0
33.7
47.1
44.4
36.1
44.4
42.6
205
2PM4_3_32_24LS
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
23.3
47.4
20.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
ROOM 202
17.9
28.1
Wall height = 8.5103
36.6
19.4
25.8
32.2
206
207
WC_2_32
27.7
20.1
24.5
20.8
17.9
21.5
213A
17.9
1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
D
D
18.9
29.7
4'-6 1/2"
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
52.2
WC_2_32
46.0
35.9
47.3
212
212B
23.4
55.1
201A
201A
41.0
26.3
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
103
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
47.5
39.7
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
201
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
WC_2_32
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
60.3
72.0
74.4
74.2
72.5
69.1
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
64.6
59.5
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
52.7
42.4
32.2
64.9
74.6
77.0
76.6
74.7
71.7
67.1
62.7
56.8
46.6
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
76.3
78.4
77.6
76.1
72.8
68.9
64.5
59.2
38.0
203
203
37.4
64.6
2PM4_3_32_24LS
34.2
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
37.8
31.7 29.4
31.9
28.0
16.3
17.7
ROOM
203
DISPATCH
204
204
Wall height = 8.5
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
44.7
45.2
37.8 39.2
42.1
48.5
40.9 46.5
49.1
37.4
48.0
18.2
20.2
17.1
17.7
20.0
20.3
53.9
19.6
58.1
54.5
18.7
19.2
46.3
28.1
20.2
19.8
34.4
18.5
33.9
17.9
33.6
18.3
9.0
8.8
8.6
15.2
12.1
10.5
27.2
18.7
14.7
17.1
19.3
20.8
21.4
20.8
19.4
18.1
16.3
19.2
22.3
23.8
24.2
23.3
21.5
19.8
18.3
22.2
25.6
26.3
26.1
25.2
23.1
21.4
26.0
27.6
28.1
27.6
26.4
24.3
22.7
28.1
28.3
29.1
28.6
26.9
24.6
23.2
29.0
29.5
29.0
27.2
24.6
23.1
AF_2_32
41.1
63.8
76.3
77.9
76.9
75.3
72.3
68.3
64.5
59.3
48.6
2PM4_3_32_24LS
44.1
47.7
20.0
21.9
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
63.1
74.9
76.3
73.4
74.9
73.6
72.4
74.1
70.4
202
70.5
66.7
67.7
22.5
3
21.0
18.9
18.3
19.1
AF_2_32
63.3
64.3
61.3
58.6
50.4
50.5
42.1 49.2
52.0
45.3
48.0
56.7
42.4
50.3
41.2
48.8
50.4
42.4 50.0
52.5
46.9
47.3
20.1
19.7
18.5
17.9
18.2
18.5
AF_2_32
16.7
14.0
11.7
214
21.3
22.9
23.4
AF_2_32
AF_2_32
213B
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
42.3
63.8
4'-11"
203
21.4
18.0
TR-SD
17.8
19.2
TR-SD
DISC
24.6
22.1
23.5
23.4
18.8
23.2
22.5
24.0
23.7
22.3
27.3
20.2
19.6
22.3
17.7
26.1
17.0
18.4
17.8
18.1
18.2
16.8
13.7
11.8
17.8
20.0
21.8
23.0
23.1
23.6
24.5
26.7
20.0
22.8
24.7
26.3
26.7
27.2
29.7
30.3
21.6
24.3
26.8
28.2
28.5
29.7
31.7
30.9
29.0
22.5
24.7
27.9
29.6
29.9
31.0
32.1
31.6
29.5
29.7
29.4
28.8
27.1
24.4
23.0
23.0
24.4
28.1
30.2
30.2
31.2
32.3
32.1
29.6
30.0
29.6
28.5
26.6
24.1
22.8
22.0
24.2
27.0
29.8
29.3
30.2
31.2
31.0
28.3
28.8
28.5
27.4
25.7
23.0
21.9
20.7
23.1
25.6
28.2
27.7
28.5
29.6
29.3
26.7
27.1
26.8
25.7
24.1
21.4
20.5
18.5
19.9
23.5
25.0
24.4
25.1
27.0
25.9
23.5
24.1
24.3
23.2
21.9
19.0
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
204
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
58.4
68.4
68.7
67.4
66.0
63.2
60.1
57.2
53.3
48.6
41.0 50.3
53.1
47.3
43.6
28.9
AF_2_32
213
214
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
37.9
53.1
62.0
62.5
60.9
59.4
57.2
54.3
51.4
47.8
45.3
44.8
37.5 48.6
2PM4_3_32_24LS
52.0
44.8
38.3
23.2
24.7
AF_2_32
24.3
24.5
29.4
30.9
28.3
23.3
AF_2_32
AF_2_32
AF_2_32
AF_2_32
2RT8S_2_32_LP735
MB
6HF_2_26DTT_F6O2AZ
43.7
50.4
50.6
49.5
48.4
46.7
19'-2 25.4
1/2"
17.7
20.4
23.4
24.9
25.3
18.3
21.2
24.9
27.2
28.2
28.4
43.9
25.5
28.4
AF_2_32
18.2
21.1
MB
41.1
31.5
38.0
37.6
38.0
7'-0 1/2"
20.1
25.4
24.2
22.2
6" 20.4
19.6
27.8
26.3
23.9
21.7
20.7
28.5
30.2
30.9
30.7
29.0
21.8
21.4
AF_2_32
25.0
32.2 40.9
44.4
37.0
31.6
23.1
24.7
25.5
7'-926.2
3/4"
5'-5"23.7
23.2
24.7
26.1
ROOM
204 SERVER
Wall height = 8.5
24.5
24.9
25.5
26.4
26.1
24.6
29.9
27.2
26.6
33.3
33.0
26.0
AF_2_32
36.8
36.9
38.9
39.4
135
AF_2_32
39.6
40.4
39.4
40.3
37.2
38.3
33.7
35.0
28.3
29.8
AF_2_32
AF_2_32
21.3
F
23.2
134
30.0
29.3
26.2
24.6
AF_2_32
27.3
30.8
3'-6"
31.9
3'-2" 26.0
30.2
371 LBS
BYPASS
24.7
30.1
33.6
34.2
24.3
32.7
PWR
35.8
27.2
2,760 LBS
BATTERY
30.7
34.3
1,192 LBS
MOD
36.0
33.2
29.6
35.7
32.4
AF_2_32
26.7
24.0
21.7
20.8
21.4
23.0
24.3
24.6
24.6
25.0
24.4
22.7
24.6
21.9
20.0
19.2
19.9
21.3
22.2
22.5
22.4
22.5
E
21.7
30.6
AF_2_32
AF_2_32
E
3'-2"
26.8
20.0
22.2
27.1
AF_2_32
2,760 LBS
BATTERY
25.3
29.0
25.2
21.8
AF_2_32
AF_2_32
AF_2_32
AF_2_32
17.6
eFlow3NX
Power Supply/Charger
Rev. DSeFlow3NX_10242013
Overview
eFlow3NX is a power supply/charger that converts a 120VAC/60Hz input into a single
12VDC or 24VDC power limited output.
eFlow3NX
Input:
• 120VAC, 60Hz, 3.5 amp.
• Input fuse: 5A/250V.
Specifications
Fire Alarm Disconnect:
• Supervised Fire Alarm disconnect (latching or
non-latching) 10K EOL resistor. Operates on a
normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) trigger.
Output:
• 12VDC or 24VDC selectable output.
• 12VDC or 24VDC @ 2.0 amp supply current.
• Power-limited output.
• Auxiliary Power-limited output
rated @ 1 amp (unswitched).
• Ripple voltage: 960mV.
• Over Voltage Protection.
Battery Backup:
• Built-in charger for sealed lead acid or gel type batteries.
• Maximum charge current 1.54 amp.
• Automatic switch over to stand-by battery when
AC fails. Transfer to stand-by battery power is
instantaneous with no interruption.
Supervision:
• AC fail supervision (form “C” contacts).
• Battery fail & presence supervision
(form “C” contacts).
• Low power shutdown. Shuts down DC output terminals if battery voltage drops below 71-73% for 12V units
and 70-75% for 24V units (depending on the power
supply). Prevents deep battery discharge.
Electrical:
• Operating temperature: 0º C to 49º C ambient.
• BTU/Hr.:
12VDC: 12.28 BTU/Hr.
24VDC: 24.57 BTU/Hr.
• System AC input VA requirement: 420VA.
Visual Indicators:
• Green AC Power LED indicates 120VAC present.
• AC input, DC output and Battery LED indicators.
Additional Features:
• Short circuit and overload protection.
• Unit is complete with power supply, enclosure,
battery leads and cam lock.
Mechanical:
• Enclosure Dimensions (H x W x D approx.):
15.5” x 12” x 4.5” (393.7mm x 304.8mm x 114.3mm)
- Accommodates up to two (2) 12VDC/12AH batteries.
• Product weight (approx.): 8.15 lbs. (3.7 kg).
• Shipping weight (approx.): 9.1 lbs. (4.13 kg).
Agency Approvals
UL 294
UL 603
UL 1481
UL Listed for Access Control
System Units.
UL Listed for Power Supplies
for Use with Burglar-Alarms
Systems.
UL Listed for Power Supplies
for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems.
ULC-S318-96 - Power Supplies for Burglar
Alarm Systems. Also suitable for Access Control.
CE - European Conformity
Altronix Corp.
140 58th St. Brooklyn, NY
CSFM - California State Fire
Marshal Approved.
Enclosure Dimensions (H x W x D approximate):
15.5” x 12” x 4.5” (393.7mm x 304.8mm x 114.3mm)
1.5”
(38.1mm)
4.615”
(117.22mm)
4.615”
(117.22mm)
1.5”
(38.1mm)
1.75”
(44.45mm)
1.375”
(34.925mm)
1.125”
(28.575mm)
1.25”
(31.75mm)
4.5”
(114.3mm)
12.23”
(310.64mm)
1.1”
(27.94mm)
0.91”
(23.114mm)
1.5”
(38.1mm)
4.5”
(114.3mm)
1.1”
(27.94mm)
1.25”
(31.75mm)
0.91”
(23.114mm)
2.0”
(50.8mm)
1.5”
(38.1mm)
15.5”
(393.7mm)
2.0”
(50.8mm)
5.0”
(127.0mm)
5.0”
(127.0mm)
1.1”
(27.94mm)
1.25”
(31.75mm)
0.79”
(20.06mm)
1.75”
(44.45mm)
1.5”
(38.1mm)
4.615”
(117.22mm)
4.615”
(117.22mm)
Altronix Corp. - 140 58th Street, Brooklyn, NY 11220 • 718-567-8181 • 888-258-7669 • altronix.com
1.5”
(38.1mm)
1.25”
(31.75mm)
Rack Systems
RACK ENCLOSURES AND OPEN FRAME RACKS FOR SERVER
AND NETWORKING APPLICATIONS IN IT ENVIRONMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NetShelter® SX
2
NetShelter® 2 Post Rack
7
2 Post racks for networking
applications in IT environments
Enclosures providing cooling, power
distribution, cable management, and
environmental monitoring for
applications in IT environments.
NetShelter® WX
ACCESSORIES
OPEN FRAME RACKS
ENCLOSURES
NetShelter® 4 Post Rack
6
Wall-mounted rack enclosures for
networking applications in IT
environments
7
4 post racks with advanced power
distribution and cable management
features for server, networking, and
telecom applications in secure IT
environments
Enclosure and Rack Accessories
8
Power distribution, cooling, and cable
management accessories, shelving,
grounding, keyboards, keyboard drawers,
LCD monitors, KVM switches, security
devices, stabilization accessories required
for a complete rack solution
Cooling
Rack Power Distribution
Cable Management
8
9
10
Rack Keyboard Monitor Mouse
11
Keyboards and drawers
11
KVM switches
11
Rack Mounting Hardware
11
Rack Security Devices
12
Shelving
12
Stabilization
12
Troughs and Ladders
12
Security and Environmental
14
Accessories Compatibility Chart
16
“Fits Like a Glove” NetShelter® SX
Guaranteed Compatibility
Whether you are designing
X-Certified
a wiring closet or the largest
NetShelter® SX rack enclosures and accessories are X-certified,
data center, or just looking for
meaning they are tested and certified for use with InfraStruXure™
the most flexible rack solution,
architecture. InfraStruXure is on-demand architecture for power,
APC NetShelter SX rack enclosures provide a secure and ven-
cooling and environmental management. An effective solution
dor-neutral environment for your IT equipment.
to Network-critical Physical Infrastructure (NCPI), InfraStruXure
GUARA NTE E D COMPATIBILITY
®
APC is committed to ensuring that your rack-mount equipment will fit into NetShelter SX enclosures. APC guarantees
that all 19” EIA-310-D compliant equipment will physically fit
into NetShelter SX enclosures with the mounting hardware
provided by the original equipment manufacturer (OEM),
APC, a third party vendor, or any combination thereof or your
money back.*
is the industry’s only integrated architecture robust enough to
effectively maintain highly available and manageable networks.
Look for the words (X-CERTIFIED) and the“Fits like a glove” icon
throughout this brochure to determine which racks and accessories are compatible with APC InfraStruXure architecture.
*See www.apc.com for more details.
Every product carrying this mark has been tested and certified
for use with InfraStruXure™ architecture. Before you buy, check
for the “X” to guarantee product compatibility.
InfraStruXure™ Supports
Dynamic Systems
Environment at Microsoft
Technology Center
“We change configurations
in our data center on
a weekly basis. The
InfraStruXure™ system
with its ability to balance
loads as we swap servers,
battery modules and
power modules, helps
to make these changes
worry-free.”
Chuck McCann
Technical Director
Microsoft Technology Center
– Boston
O
nce concerned with environmental design at the
current needs and adapt to future technology trends. APC
room-level, consulting engineers now direct
NetShelter® rack systems provide the most progressive
their attention to power distribution, cooling,
feature-set available in a vendor-neutral rack environment
and cable management at the rack level. The
while allowing the user the flexibility to quickly adapt to
driving force behind this shift is technology
emerging trends. Available in a variety of heights and
compaction, as today’s IT equipment is designed
widths, NetShelter racks and enclosures support applica-
with efficient rack-mounting capabilities to maximize the
tions ranging from branch offices and wiring closets to
utilization of valuable floor space.
enterprise data centers. With an extensive line of leading-edge power distribution, cooling and cable manage-
The ideal rack enclosure maximizes flexibility with a
ment accessories, APC offers the most comprehensive
progressive, non-proprietary feature-set as well as an
rack solutions to protect the critical components of the
extensive line of scalable accessory products to address
IT environment.
NETSHELTER® SX
NetShelter® SX
Enclosures providing cooling, power distribution, cable management,
and environmental monitoring for applications in IT environments.
NetShelter® SX is APC’s next generation rack enclosure solution influenced by 10 years of customer feedback addressing current IT market
trends for high-density server and networking applications. With a
strong focus on cooling, power distribution, cable management and
environmental monitoring, the NetShelter SX provides a reliable rackmounting environment for mission-critical equipment.
NetShelter® SX Product Design Benefits
Scalable
Cooling Options
Enhanced door ventilation
with scalable cooling
options for high-density
applications
Environmental & Security
Integrate environmental & security
solutions for protection against
physical threats
Rack Power
Distribution
Toolless 0U mounting for
rack PDUs
2
Cable Management
Integrated features and options
for horizontal and vertical routing
of high-density cabling
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
NETSHELTER® SX
NetShelter® SX Features and Benefits
Compatibility
• Door ventilation exceeds 919 in2
(5933 cm2)
• Captive adjustment of Vertical Mounting Rails
[fig 3a]
• Fits-Like-A-Glove guaranteed compatibility
[fig 3a]
Convenience
• Toolless installation and removal of roof
(fig 3b)
• Rapid adjustment of leveling feet (fig 3c)
• Toolless PDU mounting provisions
• Numbered U positions (fig 3d)
• Light-weight, half-height side panels
• Toolless cable management options
• 42U models roll through 2 meter doorways
• Cable openings for overhead or underfloor
applications
Safety
• Integrated grounding
• UBC Zone 4 stabilization provisions
Protection
• Lockable doors and side panels
• Door access monitoring
• Static weight load rating of 3,000 lbs
Serviceability
• Quick release doors
• Quick release side panels (fig 3e)
• Split rear doors
Adaptability
• Reversible doors
• Scalable cooling options
• Seamless integration of environmental monitoring
devices
• External baying for easy deployment in rows
(fig 3f)
[fig 3b]
Every product carrying
this mark has been tested
and certified for use with
InfraStruXure™ architecture.
Before you buy, check
for the “X” to guarantee
product compatibility.
[fig 3c]
[fig 3d]
[fig 3e]
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
[fig 3f]
3
NETSHELTER® SX
NetShelter® SX 42U×600mm (W) Enclosure
Black 42U×600 Enclosure:
AR3100
AR3100
Net Weight
275.20 lbs (125.09 kg)
Net Height
78.40 inches (1991 mm)
Net Width
23.62 inches (600 mm)
Net Depth
42.13 inches (1070 mm)
Shipping Weight
318.00 lbs (144.55 kg)
Shipping Height
83.40 inches (2118 mm)
Shipping Width
35.38 inches (899 mm)
Shipping Depth
48.00 inches (1219 mm)
Weight Capacity (static load)
3000 lbs (1363.6 kg)
Weight Capacity (dynamic load)
2250 lbs (1022.7 kg)
NetShelter® SX 48U×600mm (W) Enclosure
Black 48U×600mm Enclosure:
AR3107
AR3107
Net Weight
304.10 lbs (138.23 kg)
Net Height
88.90 inches (2258 mm)
Net Width
23.62 inches (600 mm)
Net Depth
42.13 inches (1070 mm)
Shipping Weight
Shipping Height
346.90 lbs (157.68 kg)
93.90 inches (2385 mm)
Shipping Width
35.38 inches (899 mm)
Shipping Depth
48.00 inches (1219 mm)
Weight Capacity (static load)
3000 lbs (1363.6 kg)
Weight Capacity (dynamic load)
2250 lbs (1022.7 kg)
NetShelter SX 42U×750mm (W) Enclosure
Black wide enclosure:
AR3150
AR3150
Net Weight
343.10 lbs (155.95 kg)
Net Height
78.40 inches (199.1 cm)
Net Width
29.53 inches (75.0 cm)
Net Depth
42.13 inches (107.0 cm)
Shipping Weight
4
370.00 lbs (168.18 kg)
Shipping Height
87.25 inches (221.6 cm)
Shipping Width
35.25 inches (89.5 cm)
Shipping Depth
48.00 inches (121.9 cm)
Weight Capacity (static load)
3000 lbs (1363.6 kg)
Weight Capacity (dynamic load)
2250 lbs (1022.7 kg)
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
NETSHELTER® SX/VX
NetShelter SX 48U×750mm (W) Enclosure
Black 48U×750mm Enclosure
AR3157
AR3157
Net Weight
372.00 lbs (169.09 kg)
Net Height
88.90 inches (2258 mm)
Net Width
29.53 inches (750 mm)
Net Depth
42.13 inches (1070 mm)
Shipping Weight
Shipping Height
405.00 lbs (184.09 kg)
94.50 inches (2400 mm)
Shipping Width
35.25 inches (895 mm)
Shipping Depth
48.00 inches (1219 mm)
Weight Capacity (static load)
3000 lbs (1363.6 kg)
Weight Capacity (dynamic load)
2250 lbs (1022.7 kg)
NetShelter® VX 25U×600mm (W) Enclosure
Black 25U×600mm Enclosure:
AR2105BLK
AR2105BLK
Net Weight
255.00 lbs (115.91 kg)
Net Height
51.70 inches (1313 mm)
Net Width
23.50 inches (597 mm)
Net Depth
42.20 inches (1072 mm)
Shipping Weight
Shipping Height
301.00 lbs (136.82 kg)
57.30 inches (1455 mm)
Shipping Width
29.50 inches (749 mm)
Shipping Depth
47.50 inches (1207 mm
Weight Capacity (static load)
2000 lbs (909.1 kg)
Weight Capacity (dynamic load)
2000 lbs (909.1 kg)
NetShelter® VX 42U×600mm (W) Seismic Enclosure
Black 42U×600mm Enclosure:
AR2144BLK/AR2145BLK
AR2144BLK
Net Weight
518.00 lbs (235.45 kg)
Net Height
81.50 inches (2070 mm)
Net Width
23.50 inches (597 mm)
Net Depth
42.20 inches (1072 mm)
Shipping Weight
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
556.00 lbs (252.73 kg)
Shipping Height
87.00 inches (2210 mm)
Shipping Width
29.50 inches (749 mm)
Shipping Depth
47.50 inches (1207 mm)
Weight Capacity (static load)
2000 lbs (909.1 kg)
Weight Capacity (dynamic load)
2000 lbs (909.1 kg)
5
NETSHELTER® WX
NetShelter® WX
Wall-mounted rack enclosures for networking applications
in IT environments
NetShelter® WX Enclosures are specifically designed for networking professionals to securely store and wire 19" EIA compatible
equipment such as hubs, routers, concentrators and patch panels. Typical applications include small hub and LAN applications
within wiring closets and computer rooms with floor space constraints. The NetShelter® Wall-Mount Enclosure mounts directly
to building walls without occupying valuable or unavailable floor
space. Rubber feet are provided with the enclosure for those
applications that require floor mounting.
Convenience
Availability
• Wall-mountable
• Multi-purpose mounting rails
• Adjustable front rail
• Integrated cable access holes
• Labeled U positions
• Unit symmetry allows left or right
hand door swing operation
• Ventilation front doors and
side panels
Serviceability
• Quick release doors
Protection
• Lockable doors
NetShelter® WX Wall-Mount Enclosure 13U Glass Door
Black13U Enclosure with glass front
door:
AR100
AR100
Net Weight
Net Height
Net Width
Net Depth
Shipping Weight
Shipping Height
Shipping Width
Shipping Depth
Weight Capacity (static load)
94.00 lbs (42.73 kg)
25.75 inches (65.41 cm)
23.00 inches (58.42 cm)
24.50 inches (62.23 cm)
115.00 lbs (52.27 kg)
33.00 inches (83.82 cm)
27.00 inches (68.58 cm)
30.50 inches (77.47 cm)
100.00 lbs (45.36 kg)
NetShelter® WX Wall-Mount Enclosure 13U Vented Door
Black13U Enclosure with vented door:
AR100HD
6
AR100HD
Net Weight
Net Height
Net Width
Net Depth
Shipping Weight
Shipping Height
Shipping Width
Shipping Depth
Weight Capacity (static load)
94.00 lbs (42.73 kg)
25.75 inches (65.41 cm)
23.00 inches (58.42 cm)
24.50 inches (62.23 cm)
115.00 lbs (52.27kg)
33.00 inches (83.82 cm)
27.00 inches (68.58 cm)
30.50 inches (77.47 cm)
100.00 lbs (45.36 kg)
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
®
NETSHELTER® 2- AND 4 POST OPEN
FRAME RACKS
NETSHELTER
SX
NetShelter® 2 Post Open Frame Racks
2 Post racks for networking applications in IT environments
The NetShelter® 2 Post Rack offers a quality solution for the economical
installation of rack-mountable networking equipment. The 2 Post Rack
offers cost conscious customers a simple solution for rack mounting
network equipment in a secure managed environment including data
centers, wiring closets and co-location facilities. Each NetShelter® 2-Post
Rack is made with high grade aluminum extrusions and offers a generous 45U (78.75" or 200cm) of equipment mounting space in a 7 foot high
design. The self-squaring design makes assembly quick and easy and
2-Post Rack with
Aluminum finish:
AR200
2-Post Rack with
black finish:
AR201
requires only one person to fully assemble each unit.
AR200, AR201
2 Post rack features
• 6061-T6 Structural grade aluminum:
High quality aluminum ensures
product durability
• Self squaring design: Allows for fast
and easy installation
Net Weight
Net Height
Net Width
Net Depth
Shipping Weight
Shipping Height
Weight Capacity (static load)
26.00 lbs (11.82 kg)
83.50 inches (212.09 cm)
20.20 inches (51.31 cm)
14.80 inches (37.59 cm)
30.00 lbs (13.64 kg)
86.00 inches (218.44 cm)
750.00 lbs (340.19 kg)
NetShelter® 4 Post Open Frame Racks
4 post racks with advanced power distribution and cable
management features for server, networking, and telecom
applications in secure IT environments.
(X-CERTIFIED)
APC 4 Post Open Frame Racks provide simple, low cost mounting
means for rack-mount equipment in IT environments. Ideal for rackmount servers, networking, and telecom equipment where security
at the individual rack level is not required, open frame racks provide
unobstructed airflow and fast, easy access to installed equipment.
Provisions for vertically mounting APC Rack PDUs in the rear combined with options for easily routing, organizing, and storing large
bundles of cables make APC 4 Post Open Frame Rack solutions the
best alternative on the market.
4 post rack features
• Numbered U positions
• Optimized width
• Reversible stabilization plates
4 Post 43U Rack with
Square Mounting Holes: AR203
4 Post 43U Rack with #12-24
Threaded Mounting Holes: AR204
AR203, AR204
Net Weight
Net Height
Net Width
Net Depth
Shipping Weight
Shipping Height
Shipping Width
Shipping Depth
Weight Capacity (static load)
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
92.00 lbs (41.82 kg)
80.90 inches (205.49 cm)
20.60 inches (52.32 cm)
29.50 inches (74.93 cm)
102.00 lbs (46.36 kg)
82.00 inches (208.28 cm)
10.00 inches (25.40 cm)
7.40 inches (18.80 cm)
1000.00 lbs (453.59 kg)
7
ACCESSORIES: COOLING
Rack Air Distribution Unit
Rack Air Removal Unit
Air distribution for power dense enclosures and
low pressure areas
Heat removal for high density
enclosures
The Rack Air Distribution Unit is a 2U
fan unit that works with an existing
precision air conditioning system
to deliver cool air to the equipment
contained in a rack enclosure. The
Rack Air Distribution Unit connects
into the raised floor and pulls supply air directly into the enclosure.
This prevents the conditioned air from mixing with warmer room
air before reaching the equipment. The Rack Air Distribution Unit
minimizes temperature differences between the top and bottom of the enclosure.
It also prevents hot exhaust air from recirculating to the inlet of the enclosure.
The product is recommended for rack enclosures with loads greater than 1.5kW
and can provide airflow for loads up to 3.0kW. It is also ideal for enclosures in
raised floor environments where underfloor air distribution is inadequate.
Densely packed enclosures can overheat IT equipment and cause
downtime. High density enclosures create an environment where
traditional air distribution methods are not effective.
The Air Removal Unit captures exhaust heat, ducting it to the
return air plenum and eliminating hot spots. Through automatic
fan speed adjustment based on temperature or power
consumption, a desired temperature can be set and fans will
self-adjust for optimal energy efficiency. The Rack Air Removal
Unit can cool up to a 7.5 kW rack and provide fan redundancy
up to 5.0 kW, as well as provide power redundancy through dual
corded input. This space saving product mounts to the back of the
enclosure – requiring zero U space.
ACF001
ACF002
ACF003
(115VAC, 60HZ)
(230VAC, 50HZ)
(100VAC, 50/60HZ)
Rack Side Air Distribution Unit
ACF400
ACF402
ACF126
ACF127
ACF122
(100–240V 50/60HZ for NetShelter SX 600mm Wide Rack)
(100–240V 50/60HZfor NetShelter SX 750mm Wide Rack)
(ARU Ducting Kit for 24” Ceiling Tiles)
(ARU Ducting Kit for 600mm Ceiling Tiles)
ARU DOOR GRILLE KIT
FAN TRAYS
Air distribution for networking equipment with side to side airflow.
Housing equipment with side to side airflow
creates many challenges for IT and
facility managers, particularly in
regards to cooling. Because most
enclosures are designed for a front
to back airflow pattern, it is difficult
to maintain ideal operating temperatures on side to side
airflow equipment. The Rack Side Air Distribution Unit allows for greater security
and organization by allowing racks to be placed adjacent to one another without
impeding airflow.
Roof Fan Tray (120, 208, 230 VAC) Black
ACF501(115 VAC, 600mm), ACF502 (208 – 230 VAC,
600mm), ACF503 (115 VAC, 750mm), and ACF504
(208 – 230 VAC, 750mm). (X-CERTIFIED)
Occupies 0U of rack space, Integrated cable
access holes, promotes bottom to top airflow.
Includes Installation Guide, mounting hardware.
Wall-Mount Fan Tray 120, 230 VAC Black
AR8206BLK (120 VAC), AR8207BLK (230 VAC)
The Rack Side Air Distribution Unit is a 2U rack mountable air distribution
product for networking equipment or servers with side to side airflow. It pulls in
conditioned air from the front of the rack and distributes it to the side air intake
of the networking equipment. This extends equipment life by providing proper
inlet temperatures.
Occupies 1U of rack space, promotes bottom
to top airflow. Includes Installation Guide,
Qty 1 – IEC to NEMA 5 –15P Power Cord (120V),
IEC to IEC 320 Power (230V) Cord; Qty 2 – Fans.
This product is recommended for one or more networking products that are
stacked consecutively in a rack. Rack Side Air Distribution Units may be
placed above and/or below the networking equipment. Airflow pattern is user
configurable via an interchangeable air turning vane.
AR8355
ACF201BLK
ACF202BLK
Wall-Mount Ventilation Plate
Ventilated. Includes Installation Guide.
(115VAC, 60HZ)
208/230VAC, 50/60HZ
To determine which cooling accessories are compatible
with specific models of NetShelter enclosures and racks,
check the Accessory Compatibility Chart on page 16–17.
8
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
ACCESSORIES: RACK POWER DISTRIBUTION
Basic Rack PDUs
Metered Rack PDUs
Power distribution for
rack-mount equipment
Power distribution units that monitor the aggregate
power consumption of connected equipment
APC offers a wide variety
of Basic Rack Power
Distribution Units (PDUs),
which allow users to
distribute power outlets to rack-mount equipment. Horizontal and vertical units
are available as well as a variety of power inputs and outputs to fit most power
environments. APC now offers Basic Rack PDUs that mount vertically, without
tools in the rear channel of a NetShelter® SX. The Basic Rack PDU family
contains solutions that support up to 14.4kW of load.
APC's Metered Rack Power Distribution Units (PDUs) provide power
distribution as well as equip on-site installers with the ability to
monitor the aggregate current draw as equipment is connected to
the unit. These Metered Rack PDUs also have alarm thresholds that
when exceeded provide alarms to alert users of potential problems.
These features help eliminate the possibility of an overloaded circuit.
Units listed below include installation guide, rack mounting brackets,
toolless mounting kit, and user manual. The Basic Rack PDU family
contains solutions that support up to 14.4kW of load.
Switched Rack PDUs
BLANKING PANELS
1U Modular Toolless Blanking Panels
AR8136BLK (Qty 10)/AR8136BLK200 (Qty 200)
(X-CERTIFIED)
Modular 1U plastic blanking panels allow quick
and easy installation in any EIA-310-D compliant
square hole mounting rail rack or enclosure, toolless
mounting.
Blanking Panel Kit (1U, 2U, 4U, 8U)
AR8101BLK (Black) (X-CERTIFIED)
Metal blanking panels are designed for use in
vertical rails with threaded holes. They promote
proper airflow, preventing air recirculation by
occupying unused rack space. Their use will
improve the efficiency of cooling within the
enclosure. Includes mounting hardware.
Qty 1 each: 1U, 2U, 4U and 8U Panel.
Power distribution that remotely controls power
to individual outlets and monitors the aggregate
power consumption
APC’s Switched Rack Power Distribution Units (PDUs) are
premium solutions to many of the power management problems
seen in today’s IT environments. Some of the problems are
unauthorized use of power outlets, locked-up equipment, in-rush
current, overloaded circuits, and the need of remote access to
power outlets in the rack. Users can access, configure, and
control the Switched Rack PDUs through Web, SNMP, or Telnet
Interfaces. The Basic Rack PDU family contains solutions that
support up to 12.5kW of load.
1U Blanking Panel Kit (Qty 2)
AR8108BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
Metal blanking panels are designed for use in
vertical rails with threaded holes. They promote
proper airflow, preventing air recirculation by
occupying unused rack space. Their use will
improve the efficiency of cooling within the
enclosure. Includes mounting hardware Qty
2 – 1U Panels.
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
9
ACCESSORIES: CABLE MANAGEMENT
Cable Management
As the number of IT components
within each rack enclosure
continues to increase, so do the
number of power and data cables.
Traditionally, overhead cable trays
and under-floor cabling systems limit
flexibility and adaptability. Underfloor plenum material is costly and
resource-intensive to install, and
under-floor branch circuits can
negatively effect air distribution.
Recognizing these challenges, APC responded with a comprehensive selection of
optional components that allows users to pick the ideal cable management solution for
their particular IT environment. Accessories such as shielded power cable troughs and
data partitions create self-contained cabling, eliminating the need to use space under
a raised floor and permitting better organization in non-raised floor environments.
VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT
Cable Management Rings
AR8113A (X-CERTIFIED)
Facilitates side/vertical cable management. Organizes
data and power cables. Includes Mounting hardware,
Velcro Mounting Straps.
NetShelter® SX Wide Cable Ring Set
AR7707 (X-CERTIFIED)
Deep cable management rings to facilitate vertical cable
management in typically networking environments.
NetShelter SX 42U/48U Vertical PDU
Mount and Cable Organizer
AR7502/AR7572 (X-CERTIFIED)
Cable management accessory to help eliminate cable
stress and maintain a neat, organized cable layout
within an enclosure or a rack.
Cable Containment Brackets for NetShelter SX
AR7702 (X-CERTIFIED)
Cable management accessory to help eliminate cable
stress and maintain a neat, organized cable layout
within an enclosure or a rack.
HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT
Side Channel Cable Trough
AR8008BLK/AR8016ABLK (X-CERTIFIED)
Adjustable mounting depth, facilitates side
cable management, tool-less mounting. Includes
Installation Guide, Velcro Mounting Straps.
Cable Management Arm
AR8129 (X-CERTIFIED)
Organizes data and power cables. Includes
Installation Guide, Mounting hardware, Velcro
Mounting Straps.
NetShelter SX Wide Mounting Rail
Brush Strips
AR7706 (X-CERTIFIED)
Promotes proper airflow through the rack while
allowing cables to be passed from the front to the
rear of the rack.
1U and 2U Horizontal Cable Organizer
AR8425A, AR8426A (X-CERTIFIED)
Facilitates front cable management. Integrated front
cable hoops. Occupies 1U of rack space. Includes
Installation Guide, Mounting hardware.
2U Patch Cord Organizer Black
AR8427A (X-CERTIFIED)
Facilitates front cable management. Integrated front
cable hoops. Occupies 2U of rack space. Includes
Installation Guide, Mounting hardware.
1U Cable Pass-Thru w/Brush Strip Black
AR8429 (X-CERTIFIED)
Includes Mounting hardware.
2U Horizontal Cable Organizer w/ Pass-Thru
AR8428 (X-CERTIFIED)
Facilitates front cable managent while allowing
cables to pass through to rear appliances. Occupies
2U of rack space.
Cable Tree for NetShelter SX
AR7505 (X-CERTIFIED)
Cable management accessory to facilitate rear cable
management within an enclosure or a rack. Helps to
eliminate cable stress and maintain a neat, organized cable
layout. Works in both 42U and 48U racks.
Vertical Cable Organizer for NetShelter 0U Channel
AR8442 (X-CERTIFIED)
To determine which accessories are compatible with
specific models of NetShelter enclosures and racks,
check the Accessory Compatibility Chart on page 16-17.
Toolless, vertical cable management accessory that
allows for quick installation and takes up zero U of
space within the rack. It helps to eliminate cable
stress and organize the cable layout within the rear
channels of the NetShelter® enclosure.
10
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
ACCESSORIES
RACK LCD MONITOR KEYBOARD MOUSE
RACK KVM
Rack LCD
16-Port IP KVM Switch
AP5015 (15-inch LCD Monitor) (X-CERTIFIED)
AP5017 (17-inch LCD Monitor) (X-CERTIFIED)
AP5405
Integrated keyboard, 15” or 17” monitor, and mouse;
occupies 1U of rack space; allows for rear mounting
of 1U device; integrated touchpad pointing device; power
tilt sensor; PS/2 terminations; standard VGA connector;
low cooling requirements; slide rails; quick release tabs;
On-Screen Display (OSD) adjustments; includes cable
management arm and rack-mount brackets.
KEYBOARDS AND DRAWERS
Enterprise-class KVM solution for managing Windows,
Sun and Linux/UNIX servers; supports connections
to PS/2, Sun and USB; integrated Microsoft Remote
Desktop Protocol (RDP) functionality; CAT5- or
6-based cabling, supporting distances of up to
500 ft (153 meters); occupies only 1U of rack space;
server-based authentication support for RADIUS,
TACACS+, LDAP, NTLM, Kerberos, and Active
Directory, user access lists per port and user
access logging; centralized management through
cascading with support for up to 1024 servers.
16-Port CAT5 KVM Switch
17" Keyboard Drawer
AR8126ABLK (X-CERTIFIED)
AP5401
4 Post Mounting. Accommodates 17 inch
keyboards. Adjustable mounting depth. Allows for
rear mounting of 1U device. Integrated wrist rest.
Includes Installation Guide, mounting hardware.
19" Rotating Keyboard Drawer
AR8127BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
4 Post Mounting. Adjustable mounting depth.
Designed for standard desktop keyboards.
Occupies 2U of rack space. Includes Cable
Management Clips, Installation Guide, mounting
hardware, mouse pad, wrist rest.
17" Keyboard
AR8250BLK (Black) (X-CERTIFIED)
104 key keyboard, 2 mouse buttons, integrated
number pad, integrated touchpad pointing device,
mechanical keyswitches, PS/2 terminations.
Includes User Manual.
Enterprise-class KVM solution for managing
Windows, Sun and Linux/UNIX servers; supports
connections to PS/2, Sun and USB; CAT5- or
6-based cabling, supporting distances of up to
500 ft (153 meters); occupies only 1U of rack space;
server-based authentication support for RADIUS,
TACACS+, LDAP, NTLM, Kerberos, and Active
Directory, user access lists per port and user access
logging; centralized management through cascading
with support for up to 1024 servers.
8- and 16-Port Analog KVM Switches
AP5201 and AP5202
Multi-platform support (PS/2, USB, or SUN); firmware
upgradeable; hot pluggable; read-only user option;
desktop placement or 1U rack-mount; on-screen
display (OSD) capability; scanning capabilities; daisychain compatible units and manage up to 512 servers
RACK MOUNTING HARDWARE
# 10-32 Hardware Kit
AR8005 (X-CERTIFIED)
Equipment Support Rails for 600mm
Wide Enclosure.
Additional hardware for mounting equipment.
Qty 36 #10–32 caged nuts.
AR8006A
M6 Hardware Kit
AR8100 (X-CERTIFIED)
M6 hardware for mounting equipment in 600mm wide
enclosures. Qty 32 sets of M6 caged nuts and nylon
washers and slot/Philips screws
Recessed Rail Kits for NetShelter SX
®
AR7503, AR7504, AR7508, and AR7578
Enables users to mount networking and server equipment
in the same rack or enclosure. Includes: Installation Guide,
Mounting Hardware, Rack mounting hardware
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
The Equipment Support Rails will support any non-Rack
Mount piece of equipment that measures 16.75” (43cm) to
17.7” (45cm) wide and has a maximum weight of 200 lbs/
91kg. The Support Rails attach to the side mounting holes
of the vertical mounting rails.
NetShelter SX HP Adapter Kit – L Class/RP54XX
Series
AR8013A
This adapter kit allow HP’s L Class/RP54xx Series
servers to be installed in the NetShelter® SX Enclosure.
This kit is configured for the installation of one server
Includes: Installation Guide, Mounting Hardware
11
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
RACK MOUNTING HARDWARE
SHELVING
NetShelter SX HP Adapter Kit –
N Class/RP7400
Fixed Shelf 50lbs/22.7kg
AR8105BLK (Black) (X-CERTIFIED)
AR8014A
Occupies 2U of rack space, ventilated, cantilever
(2 post) mount. Includes Installation Guide, mounting
hardware.
®
This adapter kit allow HP’s N Class/RP7400
server to be installed in the NetShelter
SX Enclosure. This kit is configured for the
installation of one server. Includes: Installation
Guide, Mounting Hardware
®
RACK SECURITY DEVICES
Door Switch Kit
AP9513 (X-CERTIFIED)
Advanced security, interior and exterior
mounting capabilities. Includes User Manual.
Combination Lock Handles (Qty 2)
AR8132A (X-CERTIFIED)
Master key override, Three digit thumbwheel
combination, User configurable combination
STABILIZATION
Fixed Shelf 250lbs/114kg
AR8122BLK (Black) (X-CERTIFIED)
Occupies 1U of rack space, 4 post mounting, adjustable
mounting depth, ventilated. Includes Installation Guide,
Mounting hardware.
Sliding Shelf 100lbs/45.5kg
AR8123BLK (Black) (X-CERTIFIED)
Occupies 1U of rack space, 4 post mounting, adjustable
mounting depth, ventilated. Includes
friction pads, Installation Guide, Mounting hardware,
User Manual.
Sliding Shelf 200lbs/91kg
AR8128BLK (Black) (X-CERTIFIED)
4 post mounting, adjustable mounting depth, full
extension. Occupies 1U of rack space.
Includes Installation Guide, Mounting hardware,
Qty 4–Retaining clips.
NetShelter SX Bolt-Down Kit
AR7701
Bolt-down brackets for UBC Zone-4 Seismic
anchoring options in row applications. Includes:
Installation Guide, Mounting Hardware
NetShelter SX 600mm/750mm Stabilizer Plate
AR7700
Stabilization plates to prevent tip-over in stand-alone
rack applications. Includes: Front stabilizing plate,
Installation Guide, Mounting Hardware
TROUGHS AND LADDERS
PDU Shielding Trough 600mm wide Black
AR8160ABLK, AR8160ABLKSEISMIC (X-CERTIFIED)
Facilitates overhead power distribution. Protective
grounding provisions. Toolless mounting. Includes
Installation Guide, Qty 1–8 inch/20cm grounding strap.
NetShelter Shielding Trough 600mm wide
AR8161ABLK, AR8161ABLKSEISMIC (X-CERTIFIED)
Facilitates overhead power distribution. Protective
grounding provisions. Toolless mounting. Includes
Installation Guide, Qty 1 – 8 inch/20cm grounding strap.
To determine which accessories are compatible with
specific models of NetShelter enclosures and racks,
check the Accessory Compatibility Chart on page 16–17.
12
Shielding Partition Solid 600mm
wide Black
AR8162ABLK, AR8162ABLKSEISMIC (X-CERTIFIED)
Facilitates overhead cable management. Protective
grounding provisions, toolless mounting. Includes
Installation Guide, Qty 1 – 8 inch/20cm grounding strap.
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
ACCESSORIES
TROUGHS AND LADDERS
TROUGHS AND LADDERS
Shielding Partition Pass-through 600mm wide
Black
AR8163ABLK, AR8163ABLKSEISMIC (X-CERTIFIED)
Shielding Trough Cover 600mm wide
AR8174BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
Cable pass-through. Facilitates overhead cable
management. Protective grounding provisions.
Toolless mounting. Includes Installation Guide,
Qty 1 – 8 inch/20cm grounding strap.
Shielding Trough Cover 750mm wide
AR8175BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
Data Cable Ladder 6" (15cm) with Bracket Kit
AR8164ABLK (X-CERTIFIED) , AR8164AKIT
(ladder alone)
Power Cable Ladder 12" (30cm)
with Bracket Kit
AR8165ABLK (X-CERTIFIED), AR8165AKIT (ladder alone)
APC Ladder Bracket Kit
750mm Wide Trough Brackets
AR8176BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
750mm Wide Partition Brackets
AR8177BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
PDU Shielding Trough 750mm Wide Black
AR8178BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
AR8166ABLK (X-CERTIFIED)
Facilitates overhead power distribution. Protective
grounding provisions. Tool-less mounting. Includes
Installation Guide, Qty 1– 8 inch/20cm grounding strap.
Shielding Trough End Cap Black
Ladder Attach Bracket 2 Post Rack
AR8167BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
AR8460
ISX Type A Ladder Brackets
Allows cable ladders to attach to 2-post racks, running
parallel and perpendicular to a row of racks. This
increases agility by providing solutions for environments
with layout challenges
AR8168BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
Installation Guide, Qty 1–8 inch/20cm grounding strap.
Ladder Corner Clamp Kit
APC Ladder Clamp Kit
AR8169 (X-CERTIFIED)
Ladder clamps allow two cable ladders to be connected
end-to-end, extending the cable run.
NetShelter Shielding Trough 750mm wide Black
AR8171BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
®
Facilitates overhead power distribution. Protective grounding
provisions. Toolless mounting. Includes Installation Guide,
Qty 1–8 inch/20cm grounding strap.
Shielding Partition Solid 750mm wide Black
AR8172BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
Facilitates overhead cable management. Protective
grounding provisions. Tool-less mounting. Includes
Installation Guide, Qty 1 – 8 inch/20cm grounding strap.
Shielding Partition Pass-through
750mm wide Black
AR8173BLK (X-CERTIFIED)
Cable pass-through. Facilitates overhead cable
management. Protective grounding provisions.
Toolless mounting. Includes Installation Guide,
Qty 1–8 inch/20cm grounding strap.
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
AR8461
These brackets allow ladders to be connected at
90-degree angles to address unique layouts or cable
management needs.
Ladder Angle Clamp Kit
AR8462
These brackets are adjustable to allow the connection
of ladders that are going up a rise between racks and/or
enclosures of different heights.
Ladder Stacking Kit
AR8463
This allows for the vertical stacking of one row of
ladders to separate data and power lines running to and
from racks. APC recommends that the ladders only be
stacked two high.
Ladder Wall Termination Kit 6” & 12” Wide
AR8465
A solution for those applications in which a ladder must
terminate at a wall rather than at another rack
or enclosure.
13
SECURITY AND ENVIRONMENTAL
NetBotz 420
NetBotz monitoring appliances
connect to existing IP networks
allowing for easy deployment.
Sensors and cameras may be
attached to provide additional
monitoring capabilities.
Centralized management allows all
aspects of the NetBotz appliances
to be monitored and managed.
®
NetBotz 500
Sensor Pod
NetBotz 320
IP Network
NetBotz 500
Centralized
Management Server
Sensor Pod
Temperature sensor
Fluid sensor
Security & Environmental
Solutions for RACKS
Security & Environmental Solutions
for ROOMS
Keeping the racks and enclosures
in your data center safe and
secure should incorporate more
than the latest digital security
solutions. Physical security and
environmental monitoring are key
to protecting the resources in your
racks and enclosures.
As the IP environment expands
to touch all aspects of your
business, important systems
and resources are often kept in
sub-optimal rooms and closets
that are usually unmanned.
This combination of distributed
resources and unoccupied
spaces is an ideal situation for the
introduction of physical threats.
APC environmental solutions
monitor conditions in each rack
such as temperature, humidity,
and airflow. The scalable solutions
easily expand to monitor large
numbers of racks, and can be
customized with the appropriate
sensors deployed in strategic
locations for optimal monitoring.
The advanced policy engine
which resides on each monitoring
appliance accommodates
multiple thresholds per sensor,
sophisticated alert mechanisms,
and built-in alert escalation,
enabling you to receive immediate
notification when issues occur.
APC physical security solutions
for racks include access control
and IP-based video surveillance
appliances. Access control
14
Camera Pod
solutions manage entry to individual
racks, ensuring that only authorized
personnel reach important
equipment and resources. Apply a
strict access schedule to specific
doors on individual enclosures,
providing even greater security.
IP-based video surveillance
appliances allow you to know whodid-what-when on a rack-by-rack
basis. Couple NetBotz camera
pods or third-party closed-circuit
TV cameras with advanced motion
detection capabilities to create a
comprehensive video monitoring
solution. Recorded video can be
centrally accessed, searched, and
tagged for quick retrieval with the
NetBotz centralized management
platform, allowing for a scalable
solution and easy administration for
your enterprise deployments.
APC environmental solutions
monitor conditions such as
temperature, humidity, and water
leaks in closets and rooms. Rackand wall-mount environmental
monitoring appliances and
low-profile sensors are
easily installed for seamless
incorporation into your rooms.
Deploying door sensors allows
for notification when doors to
remote and unmanned locales
are opened.
In addition to monitoring the
environmental conditions
of rooms, physical security
solutions for rooms includes
video monitoring, which captures
a visual record each time a
person accesses a remote room.
The video monitoring solution is
fully customizable, allowing for
configuration of specific days
and times when motion detection
and alarming is enabled or
disabled. Monitoring appliances
include an advanced policy
engine that can be configured
to provide multiple types of
notifications when thresholds
are reached. The APC physical
security solution can easily scale
from a small number of rooms
to a large number of rooms
via an intelligent centralized
management platform.
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
SECURITY AND
ENVIRONMENTAL
ACCESSORIES
COMPATIBILITY
CHART
PHYSICAL THREAT
Security & Environmental
Monitoring Solutions
Address Multiple Risk Areas
SURVEILLANCE
Create a visual record of who enters secure
areas and what they do while there
Wall- and rack-mount appliances with cameras
Capture video in response to motion, door
opening, and more
Sort and search recorded clips by many criteria
Control frame rate and resolution to match
network and storage capabilities
ACCESSORIES
AND SENSORS
Extend the capabilities of your monitoring
appliances
Pods, external sensors, cables, and mounting
brackets
Environmental
Disruption
The #1 physical cause of downtime at remote
locations, environmental problems go beyond
worries of fires and floods. Ventilation and
power are key points of exposure and become
more so as equipment density increases.
Position sensors at desired monitoring points
Support wide variety of analog and digital
sensors via dry contact, 4-20mA, 0-5V
ENVIRONMENTAL
Mounting and deployment hardware supports
flexible placement of appliances and pods
Human Error
We call this the "unspoken epidemic" because
no one likes to discuss human error and the
Protect your Network-critical Physical
Infrastructure from environmental threats
tremendous impact it can have on availability.
Wall- and rack-mount appliances
cause of downtime in remote or unsupervised
Protect against damage due to heat, humidity,
water, smoke, dust, and much more
locations because systems are often housed
Multiple thresholds for each sensor allowing
for notifications at the informational, warning
and critical levels
less-than-optimal settings.
However, it’s the second greatest physical
in janitor closets, wiring closets, and other
Various types of alert actions allow
notifications to be sent to SNMP managers,
email systems, and web servers phones,
pagers, etc.
Physical Theft
As assets become smaller and more efficient,
they become more attractive targets to steal.
CENTRALIZED MANAGEMENT
ACCESS CONTROL
Network appliances enabling remote and local
authentication for your APC rack enclosure
Physical attacks against digital assets are often
overlooked and are a source of real concern.
Central server that enables management and
monitoring all of your NetBotz® appliances
Standard and enterprise servers available
Proximity-enabled rack access system
Centralized management, configuration and
administration gives you a 24x7 real-time view
into the status of your environment
Audit trail allows for troubleshooting and
record-keeping
For use in a single data center, multiple data
centers, or IDF/MDF closets
Local authentication for front and rear door of
rack
Access alarms based on remotely configurable
settings
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
Sabotage
On everyone’s minds as a result of current
events, terrorism must be given due
consideration, regardless of cost.
There may be threats within your own building
from disgruntled employees who may strike
and, without any prevention, succeed.
15
ACCESSORIES COMPATIBILITY CHART
NetShelter
Enclosure &
Rack Accessory
SKUs
16
Rack Enclosures
AR7000
Description
NetShelter SX 42U 600mm Wide Perforated Curved Door Black
Color
Black
AR7007
NetShelter SX 48U 600mm Wide Perforated Curved Door Black
Black
AR7050
NetShelter SX 42U 750mm Wide Perforated Curved Door Black
Black
AR7057
NetShelter SX 48U 750mm Wide Perforated Curved Door Black
Black
AR7100
NetShelter SX 42U 600mm Wide Perforated Split Doors Black
Black
AR7107
NetShelter SX 48U 600mm Wide Perforated Split Doors Black
Black
AR7150
NetShelter SX 42U 750mm Wide Perforated Split
Black
AR7157
NetShelter SX 48U 750mm Wide Perforated Split Doors Black
Black
AR7201
NetShelter SX 600mm Wide x 1070mm Deep Standard Roof Black
Black
AR7202
Roof Match Kit for SX to VX, 750mm
Black
AR7203
Roof Match Kit for SX to VX, 600mm
Black
AR7204
Grommet/Cover for Roof Openings on NetShelter SX
Black
AR7209
NetShelter SX Roof Bridge to Facilitate Overhead Cabling
Black
AR7251
NetShelter SX 750mm Wide x 1070mm Deep Standard Roof Black
Black
AR7301
NetShelter SX 42U 1070mm Deep Split Side Panels Black Qty 2
Black
AR7371
NetShelter SX 48U 1070mm Deep Split Side Panels Black Qty 2
Black
AR7502
NetShelter SX 42U Vertical PDU Mount and Cable Organizer
Black
AR7503
NetShelter SX 42U 600mm Wide Recessed Rail Kit
Black
AR7504
NetShelter SX 48U 600mm Wide Recessed Rail Kit
Black
AR7505
Cable Tree for NetShelter SX
Black
AR7508
NetShelter SX 42U 750mm Wide Recessed Rail Kit
Black
AR7572
NetShelter SX 48U Vertical PDU Mount and Cable Organizer
Black
AR7578
NetShelter SX 48U 750mm Wide Recessed Rail Kit
Black
AR7600
NetShelter SX 42U/48U Baying Trim Kit Black
Black
AR7601
Baying Kit for 42U SX to VX or VS – 600mm centers
Black
AR7602
Baying Kit for 42U SX to VX or VS – 24 inch centers
Black
AR7700
NetShelter SX 600mm/750mm Stablilizer Plate Black
Black
AR7701
NetShelter SX Bolt-Down Kit
Black
AR7702
Cable Containment Brackets for Netshelter SX
Black
AR7706
NetShelter SX 750mm Mounting Rail Brush Strips
Black
AR7707
NetShelter SX Wide Cable Ring Set
Black
AR7708
NetShelter SX Air Recirculation Prevention Kit
Black
AR8005
#10-32 Hardware Kit (Qty-36)
AR8006A
Equipment Support Rails 600mm wide
AR8008BLK
Side Channel Cable Trough
Black
AR8010BLK
Recessed Rail Kit for 600mm wide
Black
AR8011BLK
Dual PDU Mounting Brackets 600mm wide
Black
AR8013
HP Adapter Kit – L Class/RP54XX Series
Black
AR8013A
NetShelter SX HP Adapter Kit – L Class/RP54xx Series
Black
AR8014
HP Adapter Kit – N Class/RP7400 Series
Black
AR8014A
NetShelter SX HP Adapter Kit – N Class/RP7400 Series
Black
AR8015
AR8016ABLK
M6 Hardware Kit (Qty-32) for AR203
NetShelter SX Side Channel Cable Trough
Black
Black
AR8100
M6 Hardware Kit (Qty-32)
AR8101BLK
Blanking Panel Kit 19” Black (1U, 2U, 4U, 8U)
Black
AR8105BLK
Fixed Shelf 50lb/23kg Black
Black
AR8108BLK
1U Blanking Panel Kit 19” Black
Black
AR8112BLK
Bolt-Down Bracket Kit Black
Black
AR8113A
Cable Management Rings
Black
AR8115ABLK
Stabilizer Plate 600mm Wide Black
Black
AR8116BLK
Cable Containment Brackets Black
Black
AR8122BLK
Fixed Shelf 250lbs/114kg Black
Black
AR8123BLK
Sliding Shelf 100lbs/45kg Black
Black
AR8126ABLK
17” Keyboard Drawer Black
Black
AR8127BLK
19” Rotating Keyboard Drawer Black
Black
AR8128BLK
Sliding Shelf 200lbs/91kg Black
AR8129
1U Cable Management Arm
AR8132A
NetShelter SX-VX-VS Combination Door Lock Handle
Black
AR8136BLK
1U Plastic Blanking Panel Kit 19” Black (Qty – 10)
Black
AR8136BLK200
1U Plastic Blanking Panel Kit 19” Black (Qty – 200)
Black
AR8160ABLK
PDU Shielding Trough 600mm wide Black
Black
AR8161ABLK
NetShelter Shielding Trough 600mm Wide Black
Black
AR8162ABLK
Shielding Partition Solid 600mm Wide Black
Black
AR8163ABLK
Shielding Partition Pass-Through 600mm Wide Black
Black
N/A
White-Zinc
N/A
Black
White-Zinc
AR3100
AR3150
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AR3107
AR3157
Open Frame Racks
AR100 &
AR2105BLK AR100HD
AR200 &
AR201
AR203 &
AR204
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AR203 only
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AR203 only
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AR203 only
AR203 only
•
•
•
•
•
AR203 only
AR203 only
•
•
•
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
NetShelter
Enclosure &
Rack Accessory
SKUs
Rack Enclosures
AR8164AKIT
Description
Data Cable Ladder 6” (15cm) wide (Qty 1)
Color
Black
AR8164ABLK
Data Cable Ladder 6” (15cm) wide w/ Bracket Kit
Black
AR8165AKIT
Power Cable Ladder 12” (30cm) wide (Qty 1)
Black
AR8165ABLK
Power Cable Ladder 12” (30cm) wide w/ Bracket Kit
Black
AR8166ABLK
Ladder Bracket Kit
Black
AR8167BLK
Trough End Cap Black (Qty-2)
Black
AR8168BLK
Ladder to Enclosure Connection Brackets
Black
AR8169
Ladder Clamp Kit
Black
AR8171BLK
NetShelter Shielding Trough 750mm Wide Black
Black
AR8172BLK
Shielding Partition Solid 750mm Wide Black
Black
AR8173BLK
Shielding Partition Pass-Through 750mm Wide Black
Black
AR8174BLK
Shielding Trough Cover 600mm Wide Black (Qty-2)
Black
AR8175BLK
Shielding Trough Cover 750mm Wide Black (Qty-2)
Black
AR8176BLK
750mm Wide Trough Brackets
Black
AR8177BLK
750mm Wide Partition Brackets
Black
AR8178BLK
PDU Shielding Trough 750mm Wide Black
Black
AR8355
NetShelter WX Vented Gland Plate
Black
AR8359
NetShelter WX Caster Kit
Black
AR8390
Grounding Kit
AR8400
#12-24 Hardware Kit (Qty-24)
Black
AR8410
NetShelter 4-Post Rack Baying Brackets 24” Centers
Black
AR8411
NetShelter 4-Post Rack Baying Brackets 600mm Centers
Black
AR8415
NetShelter 4-Post Rack PDU Mounting Brackets
Black
AR8416
NetShelter 4-Post Rack PDU Adapter Plates
Black
AR8417
NetShelter 4-Post Rack PDU Adapter Brackets
Black
AR8422
Double-Sided Fixed Shelf for 2-Post Rack 250lbs/114kg
Black
AR8425A
1U Horizontal Cable Organizer
Black
AR8426A
2U Horizontal Cable Organizer
Black
AR8427A
2U Patch Cord Organizer
Black
AR8428
2U Patch Cord Organizer with Pass-Thru
Black
AR8429
1U Cable Pass-Thru with Brush Strip
Black
AR8440A
3” Vertical Cable Organizer
Black
AR8441A
6” Vertical Cable Organizer
Black
AR8442
Vertical Cable Organizer for NetShelter 0U Channel
Black
AR8445
3” Control Bracket Kit
Black
AR8446
6” Control Bracket Kit
Black
AR8450
NetShelter 4-Post Rack Roof
Black
AR8460
Ladder Attach Bracket 2 Post Rack
Black
AR8461
Ladder Corner Clamp Kit
Black
AR8462
Ladder Angle Clamp Kit
Black
AR8463
Ladder Stacking Kit
Black
AR8465
Ladder Wall Termination Kit 6” & 12” Wide
Black
AP9513
Door Switch Kit
Grey
AR3100
AR3150
AR3107
AR3157
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open Frame Racks
AR100 &
AR2105BLK AR100HD
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AR203 &
AR204
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N/A
AR200 &
AR201
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AR204 only
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open Frame Racks
Rack Cooling
SKUs
Description
Color
AR3100
AR3150
AR3107
AR3157
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ACF001
RM Air Distribution Unit 120V
Black
ACF002
RM Air Distribution Unit 208/230V
Black
ACF003
RM Air Distribution Unit 100V
Black
ACF400
Black
ACF126
Rack Air Removal Unit 100-240V 50/60HZ for NetShelter SX 600 mm
Wide Rack
Rack Air Removal Unit 100-240V 50/60HZ for NetShelter SX 750 mm
Wide Rack
Rack Air Removal Unit SX Ducting Kit for 24”
ACF127
Rack Air Removal Unit SX Ducting Kit for 600mm Ceiling Tiles
Black
ACF122
ARU Door Grille Kit
Black
AR8206BLK
NetShelter WX Fan Tray 120VAC Black
Black
AR8207BLK
NetShelter WX Fan Tray 230VAC Black
Black
ACF501
Netshelter SX Roof Fan Tray 115 VAC
Black
ACF502
Netshelter SX Roof Fan Tray 208-230 VAC
Black
ACF503
Netshelter SX Roof Fan Tray 115 VAC 750mm
Black
ACF504
Netshelter SX Roof Fan Tray 208-230 VAC 750mm
Black
ACF201BLK
Rack Side Air Distribution 2U 115V 60HZ
Black
ACF202BLK
Rack Side Air Distribution 2U 208/230 50/60HZ
Black
ACF402
For more information about APC’s Availability Solutions, visit www.apc.com
Black
Black
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AR100 &
AR2105BLK AR100HD
AR203 &
AR204
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AR200 &
AR201
•
•
•
•
17
S
ince 1981, APC has been a global leader in power availability solutions, setting the
industry standard for quality, innovation, and support. From its corporate headquarters in West Kingston, Rhode Island, APC operates sales offices throughout
the world and manufacturing facilities on four continents and distribution facilities on five continents. APC ships products to over 150 countries.
Over 15 million satisfied customers worldwide depend on APC’s Legendary Reliability®.
Propelled by real-world experience and a drive towards technological innovation, APC
has the experience, scale, global presence, and stability to respond to emerging IT
availability needs.
9
®
O
F
1
9
“… the highest technical support rating received by any vendor in any category of the 2002 Channel Champions Survey.”
— Channel Champions 2002 – Rack-Mounted UPSs”, Computer Reseller News
News, Mark Spiwak
Systems
Essential Rack
for
Requirements
Next Generation
rs
Data Cente
To receive a FREE APC white paper on essential rack systems requirements for
next generation data centers, please visit us online at http://promo.apc.com
and enter key code p733y. Other APC white papers are also available.
APC’s quality
system is
certified by
ISO 9002
standards
For more information call:
Tel: 800 800 4APC - US & Canada
Tel: 401 789 0204 - World wide
APC Corporate
APC North America
132 Fairgrounds Road
West Kingston, RI
02892 USA
Call: 800 800 4APC
Fax: 401 789 3710
APC Latin America
5301 Blue Lagoon Drive
Suite #610
Miami, FL 33126 USA
Call: 305 266 5005
Fax: 305 266 9695
APC Europe
APC Ireland
Ballybrit Business Park
Galway, Ireland
Call: +353 91 702000
Fax: +353 91 756909
APC Asia Pacific
APC Australia
Level 13 The Denison
65 Berry Street
North Sydney, NSW 2060
Call: +61 2 9955 9366
Fax: +61 2 9955 2844
Visit: www.apc.com
E-mail: [email protected]
Web Support: : support. apc.com
PowerFax™: 800-347-FAXX
©2006. All rights reserved. All APC trademarks are property of American Power Conversion. Other trademarks are property of their respective owners. Specifications are subject to change without notice. PART# 996-1654G
SecurityCameraWorld.com
Your Sales Rep: Luis
6191 Orange Drive Suite 6151-A Davie FL, 33314 Phone: 954-252-7090
Quotation: 97145
7/16/2014 4:42:56 PM
Billing:
North Slope Borough
A & F / Purchasing PO Box 69
Cornelio Alcantara
BARROW,AK 99723 USA
Shipping:
NORTH SLOPE BOROUGH
NOELANI
WOOD/SHIPPING&RECEIVING
PO BOX 69, 1795 AHKOVAK ST.
BARROW,AK 99723 USA
SKU
Product
B-1000-EX
Bullet, 1000 TVL 3.6MM LENS
C2-MAX-16D1
16 Ch H.264 D1 @ 30fps all channels, Hdmi, Vga, BNC video
outputs,VGA, HDMI, 1ch D1. Main & Spot Multi display output, USB
2.0, 2 HD Bay
Price
$425.95
Qty
Total
1
$425.95
$45.95
3
$137.85
Bullet, 1000 TVL, 3.6MM,vandal resistant
LCD19W
19" LCD Widescreen TFT Monitor
$159.95
1
$159.95
CB-201B
500 Foot Reel - 95% Copper Shield - RG59 with 18/2 - Siamese
Black
$101.00
1
$101.00
MARS5000
12Volt 5amps Power Supply
$40.00
1
$40.00
4-SPIDER-CABLE
4 port DC Power Splitter
$9.95
1
$9.95
CT117
DC Female Pig Tail
$2.00
3
$6.00
The connector has a 10" two wire lead
CT115
DC male Pig Tail 24"
$2.00
3
$6.00
CT114
Male BNC Twist-On Connector RG-59
$0.75
6
$4.50
$0.00
1
$0.00
SATA3000
Sub-Total: $891.20
Tax: $0.00
Shipping UPS Ground 1 Boxes: $342.00
Grand Total: $1,233.20
Remaining Balance: $1233.2
Data Sheet
Cisco Nexus 3548 and 3524 Switches
Cisco Nexus 3000 Series Switches Overview
The Cisco Nexus® 3000 Series Switches are a comprehensive portfolio of 1, 10, and 40 Gigabit Ethernet switches
built from a switch-on-a-chip (SoC) architecture. Introduced in April 2011, this series of switches provides line-rate
Layer 2 and 3 performance and is suitable for top-of-the-rack (ToR) architecture. This series of switches has
established itself as a leader in high-frequency trading (HFT), high-performance computing (HPC), and big data
environments by pairing high performance and low latency with innovations in performance visibility, automation,
and time synchronization.
Cisco Nexus 3500 Platform Overview
The Cisco Nexus 3500 platform further extends the leadership of the Cisco Nexus 3000 Series by including the
innovative Cisco® Algorithm Boost (or Algo Boost) technology. Algo Boost technology, built into the switch
application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), allows the Cisco Nexus 3500 platform to achieve exceptional Layer 2
and 3 switching latencies of less than 200 nanoseconds (ns). In addition, Algo Boost offers several innovations in
latency, forwarding, and performance visibility capabilities:
●
Three configurable modes for low latency
◦ Normal mode: This mode is excellent for environments needing low latency and high scalability. In this
mode, latencies as low as 250 ns can be paired with the higher of the Layer 2 and 3 scaling values listed
later in this document, in Table 6.
◦ Warp mode: For those customers with smaller environments who demand the lowest latencies possible,
warp mode consolidates forwarding operations within the switch ASIC, lowering latency by up to an
additional 20 percent compared to normal operation. In this mode, latencies as low as 190 ns can be
paired with the smaller of the Layer 2 and 3 scaling values listed later in this document, in Table 6.
◦ Warp SPAN: In some environments, a stream of traffic entering one port simply needs to be copied to a
list of outgoing ports as quickly as possible without processing or modification. The Cisco Nexus 3500
platform’s warp SPAN capability allows all traffic entering a single port on the switch to be replicated to
any number of destination ports at latencies as low as 50 ns.
●
Hitless Network Address Translation (NAT): In many financial trading environments, trade orders must be
sourced from the IP space of the provider, requiring NAT at the border between networks. The Cisco Nexus
3500 platform can perform NAT for IPv4 unicast routed packets without incurring any additional latency.
●
Active buffer monitoring: Even on the lowest-latency switches, data packets can incur a millisecond or more
of latency during periods of congestion. Today’s switches do not adequately inform administrators about the
presence of this congestion, leaving them unaware and hindered in their ability to address the conditions
causing suboptimal performance. Previous buffer utilization monitoring techniques were based entirely on
software polling algorithms with polling intervals higher than 100 ms, which can miss important congestion
events. In contrast, Algo Boost accelerates the collection of buffer utilization data in hardware, allowing
sampling intervals of 10 ns or less.
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 1 of 15
●
Advanced traffic mirroring: The Algo Boost technology on the Cisco Nexus 3500 platform facilitates not only
network troubleshooting by supporting Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) and Encapsulated Remote SPAN
(ERSPAN) technologies, but also in-service network monitoring with enhancements including the capability
to:
◦ Apply user-configurable filters to reduce the amount of captured traffic to a specified flow or protocol*
◦ Capture a sample of eligible packets, such as one out of every thousand*
◦ Truncate packets after a user-defined threshold
◦ Insert a nanosecond-level timestamp in the ERSPAN header of captured packets (requires ERSPAN and
Precision Time Protocol [PTP])
●
IEEE 1588 PTP with pulse-per-second (PPS) output*
◦ The capability to build and maintain a synchronized, accurate timing solution is the basis for successful
provisioning and management of HFT networks and applications. Using IEEE 1588 PTP, Cisco Nexus
3000 Series Switches can deliver highly accurate precision time synchronization to applications within
existing network infrastructure with no need to invest in and deploy a separate timing network.
◦ Network administrators deploying IEEE 1588 PTP often find it challenging to measure the accuracy to
which each device is synchronized. To assist in this effort, the Cisco Nexus 3500 platform includes a
1-PPS output port that can be used to measure timing drift from the grandmaster clock.
●
Network traffic monitoring with Cisco Nexus Data Broker
◦ Build simple, scalable and cost-effective network tap or Cisco Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN)
aggregation for network traffic monitoring and analysis. With Cisco Nexus 3500 platform switches, you
can:
◦ Truncate packets after a user-defined threshold at ingress
◦ Time-stamp packets using Precision Time Protocol (PTP) with nanosecond accuracy
Cisco Nexus 3548 Switch
The Cisco Nexus 3548 Switch (Figure 1), the first member of the Cisco Nexus 3500 platform, is a compact onerack-unit (1RU) form-factor 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch providing line-rate Layer 2 and 3 switching with ultra-low
latency. The switch runs the industry-leading Cisco NX-OS Software operating system, providing customers with
comprehensive features and functions that are widely deployed globally. The Cisco Nexus 3548 contains no
physical layer (PHY) chips, allowing low latency and low power consumption. This switch supports both forward
and reversed airflow schemes and both AC and DC power inputs.
Figure 1.
Cisco Nexus 3548 Switch
The Cisco Nexus 3548 has the following hardware configuration:
*
●
48 fixed Enhanced Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP+) ports (1 or 10 Gbps)
●
Dual redundant, hot-swappable power supplies
1-PPS output will be enabled in a future software revision.
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 2 of 15
●
Four individual, redundant, hot-swappable fans
●
One 1-PPS timing port, with the RF1.0/2.3 QuickConnect connector type*
●
Two 10/100/1000 management ports
●
One RS-232 serial console port
●
One USB port
●
Locator LED
●
Locator LED button
Support for both forward (port-side exhaust) and reversed (port-side intake) airflow schemes is available. Forward
airflow is useful when the port side of the switch sits on a hot aisle and the power supply side sits on a cold aisle.
Reverse airflow is useful when the power supply side of the switch sits on a hot aisle and the port side sits on a
cold aisle.
Colored handles on each fan or power supply clearly indicate the airflow direction, as seen in Figures 2 and 3.
Figure 2.
Cisco Nexus 3548 with Blue Handles Indicating Forward Airflow
Figure 3.
Cisco Nexus 3548 with Red Handles Indicating Reversed Airflow
Cisco Nexus 3524 Switch
The Cisco Nexus 3524 Switch (Figure 4), the second member of the Cisco Nexus 3500 platform, is a compact 1RU
form-factor 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch providing line-rate Layer 2 and 3 switching with ultra-low latency. The switch
has 48 ports, but only 24 ports are active by default. A license is required to enable the remaining 24 ports. The
switch runs the industry-leading Cisco NX-OS Software operating system, providing customers with a
comprehensive feature set, including Algo Boost technology and functions that are widely deployed globally. The
Cisco Nexus 3524 contains no PHY chips, allowing low latency and low power consumption. This switch supports
both forward and reversed airflow schemes and both AC and DC power inputs.
Figure 4.
Cisco Nexus 3524 Switch
The Cisco Nexus 3524 has the following hardware configuration:
●
24 fixed SFP+ ports (1 or 10 Gbps); 48 ports total are available with a license
●
Dual redundant, hot-swappable power supplies
●
Four individual, redundant, hot-swappable fans
●
One 1-PPS timing port, with the RF1.0/2.3 QuickConnect connector type*
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 3 of 15
●
Two 10/100/1000 management ports
●
One RS-232 serial console port
●
One USB port
●
Locator LED
●
Locator LED button
Support for both forward (port-side exhaust) and reversed (port-side intake) airflow schemes is available. Forward
airflow is useful when the port side of the switch sits on a cold aisle and the power supply side sits on a hot aisle.
Reverse airflow is useful when the power supply side of the switch sits on a cold aisle and the port side sits on a
hot aisle.
Colored handles on each fan or power supply clearly indicate the airflow direction, as seen in Figures 5 and 6.
Figure 5.
Cisco Nexus 3524 with Blue Handles Indicating Forward Airflow
Figure 6.
Cisco Nexus 3524 with Red Handles Indicating Reversed Airflow
Cisco NX-OS Software Overview
Cisco NX-OS is a data center-class operating system built with modularity, resiliency, and serviceability at its
foundation. Cisco NX-OS helps ensure continuous availability and sets the standard for mission-critical data center
environments. The self-healing and highly modular design of Cisco NX-OS makes zero-impact operations a reality
and provides exceptional operational flexibility.
Focused on the requirements of the data center, Cisco NX-OS provides a robust and comprehensive feature set
that meets the networking requirements of present and future data centers. With an XML interface and a
command-line interface (CLI) like that of Cisco IOS® Software, Cisco NX-OS provides state-of-the-art
implementations of relevant networking standards as well as a variety of true data center-class Cisco innovations.
Cisco NX-OS Software Benefits
Table 1 summarizes the benefits that Cisco NX-OS Software offers.
Table 1.
Benefits of Cisco NX-OS Software
Feature
Benefit
Common software throughout the data center: Cisco NX-OS runs on all Cisco
data center switch platforms (Cisco Nexus 7000, 5000, 4000, and 1000V Series
Switches and Cisco Nexus 2000 Series Fabric Extenders).
● Simplification of data center operating environment
● End-to-end Cisco Nexus and Cisco NX-OS fabric
Software compatibility: Cisco NX-OS interoperates with Cisco products
running any variant of Cisco IOS Software and also with any networking OS
that conforms to the networking standards listed as supported in this data
sheet.
● Transparent operation with existing network
infrastructure
● Open standards
Modular software design: Cisco NX-OS is designed to support distributed
multithreaded processing. Cisco NX-OS modular processes are instantiated
on demand, each in a separate protected memory space. Thus, processes are
● Robust software
● Fault tolerance
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
● No retraining necessary for data center engineering and
operations teams
● No compatibility concerns
Page 4 of 15
Feature
started and system resources allocated only when a feature is enabled. The
modular processes are governed by a real-time preemptive scheduler that
helps ensure timely processing of critical functions.
Benefit
● Increased scalability
● Increased network availability
Troubleshooting and diagnostics: Cisco NX-OS is built with unique
serviceability functions to allow network operators to take early action based
on network trends and events, enhancing network planning and improving
network operations center (NOC) and vendor response times. Cisco Smart
Call Home and Cisco Online Health Management System (OHMS) are some of
the features that enhance the serviceability of Cisco NX-OS.
● Quick problem isolation and resolution
● Continuous system monitoring and proactive
notifications
● Improved productivity of operations teams
Ease of management: Cisco NX-OS provides a programmatic XML interface
based on the NETCONF industry standard. The Cisco NX-OS XML interface
provides a consistent API for devices. Cisco NX-OS also provides support for
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Versions 1, 2, and 3 MIBs.
● Rapid development and creation of tools for enhanced
management
● Comprehensive SNMP MIB support for efficient remote
monitoring
Using the Cisco Nexus Data Broker software and Cisco Plug-in for OpenFlow
agent, the Cisco Nexus 3500 platform can be used to build a scalable, costeffective, and programmable tap or SPAN aggregation infrastructure. This
approach replaces the traditional purpose-built matrix switches with these
switches. You can interconnect these switches to build a multilayer topology
for tap or SPAN aggregation infrastructure.
● Scalable and cost effective
● Traffic aggregation from multiple input ports across
different switches
● Traffic replication and forwarding to multiple monitoring
tools
● Support for packet truncation and time stamping
Role-based access control (RBAC): With RBAC, Cisco NX-OS enables
administrators to limit access to switch operations by assigning roles to
users. Administrators can customize access and restrict it to only the users
who require it.
● Effective access control mechanism based on user roles
● Improved network device security
● Reduction in network problems arising from human error
Cisco NX-OS Software Packages for the Cisco Nexus 3500 Platform
The software packages for the Cisco Nexus 3500 offer flexibility and a comprehensive feature set and are
consistent with Cisco Nexus access switches. The default system software has a comprehensive Layer 2 feature
set with extensive security and management features. To enable certain Layer 3 IP unicast and multicast routing
functions, NAT, warp mode, and warp SPAN, additional licenses must be installed, as described in Table 2. See
Table 8 later in this document for a complete software feature list.
Table 2.
Software Licensing for Cisco Nexus 3500
Software Package
Features Supported
System default
(no license required)
● Comprehensive Layer 2 feature set: VLAN, IEEE 802.1Q trunking, Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP),
Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD; Standard and Aggressive), Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP),
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), and Spanning Tree Protocol guard
● Security: Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA), access control lists (ACLs), storm control, and
configurable Control-Plane Policing (CoPP)
● Management features: Cisco Data Center Network Manager (DCNM) support, Secure Shell Version 2 (SSHv2)
access, Cisco Discovery Protocol, SNMP, syslog, and IEEE 1588 PTP
● Monitoring features: Advanced buffer monitoring, SPAN, and ERSPAN
Base license
● Layer 3 IP routing: Inter-VLAN routing (IVR), static routes, Routing Information Protocol Version 2 (RIPv2),
ACLs, Open Shortest Path First Version 2 (OSPFv2; limited to 256 routes), Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing
Protocol (EIGRP) stub, Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP), and Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
● Multicast: Protocol-Independent Multicast Sparse Mode (PIM-SM), Source-Specific Multicast (SSM), and
Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)
LAN Enterprise license
(N3K-LAN1K9); requires
Base license
● Advanced Layer 3 IP routing: OSPFv2, EIGRP, Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), and Virtual Routing and
Forwarding Lite (VRF-Lite)
Algo Boost license
(N3K-ALGK9)
● Algo Boost features: NAT, warp mode, and warp SPAN
Cisco Nexus Data Broker
license (NDB-FX-SWT-K9)
● License for using the tap and SPAN aggregation functions with Cisco Nexus Data Broker; only the Base license
is needed for this feature
N3548-24P-UPG=
● 24 Port Upgrade License
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 5 of 15
Cisco Data Center Network Manager
The Cisco Nexus 3500 platform is supported in Cisco DCNM. Cisco DCNM is designed for the Cisco Nexus
hardware platforms, which are enabled for Cisco NX-OS. Cisco DCNM is a Cisco management solution that
increases overall data center infrastructure uptime and reliability, improving business continuity. Focused on the
management requirements of the data center network, Cisco DCNM provides a robust framework and
comprehensive feature set that can meet the routing, switching, and storage administration needs of present and
future data centers. Cisco DCNM automates the provisioning process, proactively monitors the LAN by detecting
performance degradation, secures the network, and simplifies the diagnosis of dysfunctional network elements.
Cisco Nexus Data Broker
The Cisco Nexus 3500 platform switches with Cisco Nexus Data Broker can be used to build a scalable and costeffective traffic monitoring infrastructure using network taps and SPAN. This approach replaces the traditional
purpose-built matrix switches with one or more OpenFlow-enabled Cisco Nexus switches. You can interconnect
these switches to build a scalable tap or SPAN aggregation infrastructure. You also can combine tap and SPAN
sources to bring the copy of the production traffic to this tap or SPAN aggregation infrastructure. In addition, you
can distribute these sources and traffic monitoring and analysis tools across multiple Cisco Nexus switches. For
more details, visit http://www.cisco.com/go/nexusdatabroker.
Transceiver and Cabling Options
The Cisco Nexus 3500 platform supports a wide variety of 100 Megabit Ethernet and 1, 10, and 40 Gigabit
Ethernet connectivity options. For in-rack or adjacent-rack cabling, the Cisco Nexus 3500 platform supports SFP+
direct-attach copper cabling, an innovative solution that integrates transceivers with Twinax cables into an energyefficient and low-cost solution. For longer cable runs, multimode and single-mode optical SFP+ transceivers are
supported.
Table 3 lists the supported 40 Gigabit Ethernet transceiver options. 40 Gigabit Ethernet is achieved on the Cisco
Nexus 3500 platform by combining four sequential SFP+ interfaces into a logical 40 Gigabit Ethernet port. The
resulting interface is fully compliant with the IEEE standard for 40 Gigabit Ethernet and thus is interoperable with
any other 40 Gigabit Ethernet device, regardless of interface form factor, including Quad SFP (QSFP).
Table 3.
Cisco Nexus 3500 Platform 40 Gigabit Transceiver Support Matrix
Part Number
Description
SFP-10G-SR
10GBASE-SR SFP+ module (multimode fiber [MMF])
SFP-10G-LR
10GBASE-LR SFP+ module (single-mode fiber [SMF])
QSFP-4SFP10G-CU1M
QSFP to 4 x SFP 10-Gbps passive copper splitter cable, 1m (Twinax cable)
QSFP-4SFP10G-CU3M
QSFP to 4 x SFP 10-Gbps passive copper splitter cable, 3m (Twinax cable)
QSFP-4SFP10G-CU5M
QSFP to 4 x SFP 10-Gbps passive copper splitter cable, 5m (Twinax cable)
Table 4 lists the supported 10 Gigabit Ethernet transceiver options.
Table 4.
Cisco Nexus 3500 Platform 10 Gigabit Transceiver Support Matrix
Part Number
Description
SFP-10G-SR
10GBASE-SR SFP+ module (MMF)
SFP-10G-LR
10GBASE-LR SFP+ module (single-mode fiber [SMF])
SFP-10G-ER
Cisco 10GBASE-ER SFP+ module for SMF
DWDM-SFP10G-*
10GBASE-DWDM modules (multiple varieties)
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 6 of 15
SFP-H10GB-CU1M
10GBASE-CU SFP+ cable, 1m (Twinax cable)
SFP-H10GB-CU3M
10GBASE-CU SFP+ cable, 3m (Twinax cable)
SFP-H10GB-CU5M
10GBASE-CU SFP+ cable, 5m (Twinax cable)
SFP-H10GB-ACU7M
Active Twinax cable assembly, 7m
SFP-H10GB-ACU10M
Active Twinax cable assembly, 10m
The Cisco Nexus 3500 platform is compatible with existing Gigabit Ethernet infrastructures. Both the uplink and
downlink 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces can also operate in 100 Megabit Ethernet and 1 Gigabit Ethernet modes.
Table 5 lists the Gigabit Ethernet SFP transceivers that are supported. 100 Megabit Ethernet connectivity can be
achieved by using copper-based SFP transceivers (GLC-T).
Table 5.
Cisco Nexus 3500 Platform Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver Support Matrix
Part Number
Description
GLC-T
1000BASE-T SFP
GLC-SX-MM
GE SFP, LC connector SX transceiver (MMF)
GLC-SX-MMD
1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver module, MMF, 850 nm, DOM
GLC-LH-SM
GE SFP, LC connector LX and LH transceiver
GLC-LH-SMD
1000BASE-LX/LH SFP transceiver module, MMF and SMF, 1310 nm, DOM
For more information about the transceiver types, see
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps5455/prod_module_series_home.html.
Product Specifications
Tables 6 and 7 list the specifications for the Cisco Nexus 3548 and 3524 Switches. Table 8 lists software features,
and Table 9 lists management standards and support.
Table 6.
Specifications
Specification
Cisco Nexus 3548
● 48 fixed SFP+ ports (1 or 10 Gbps)
● Dual redundant, hot-swappable power supplies
Physical
● Four individual, redundant, hot-swappable fans
● One 1-PPS timing port, with the RF1.0/2.3 QuickConnect
connector type*
● Two 10/100/1000-Mbps management ports
● One RS-232 serial console port
● One USB port
● Locator LED
● Locator LED button
Performance
*
Cisco Nexus 3524
● 24 fixed SFP+ ports (1 or 10 Gbps); expandable to 48
ports
● Dual redundant, hot-swappable power supplies
● Four individual, redundant, hot-swappable fans
● One 1-PPS timing port, with the RF1.0/2.3 QuickConnect
connector type*
● Two 10/100/1000-Mbps management ports
● One RS-232 serial console port
● One USB port
● Locator LED
● Locator LED button
● 960-Gbps switching capacity
● Forwarding rate of 720 million packets per second (mpps)
● 480-Gbps switching capacity
● Forwarding rate of 360 mpps
● Line-rate traffic throughput (both Layer 2 and 3) on all
ports
● Configurable maximum transmission units (MTUs) of up
to 9216 bytes (jumbo frames)
● Line-rate traffic throughput (both Layer 2 and 3) on all
ports
● Configurable MTUs of up to 9216 bytes (jumbo frames)
1-PPS output will be enabled in a future software revision.
Table 7.
Hardware Specifications Common to Both Switches
Hardware tables
Mode
Normal Mode
Warp Mode
Number of MAC addresses
64,000
8000
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 7 of 15
and scalability
Mode
Normal Mode
Warp Mode
Number of IPv4 unicast routes
24,000
4000
Number of IPv4 hosts
64,000
8000
Number of IPv4 multicast routes
8000
8000
Number of VLANS
4096
Number of ACL entries
4096
Number of spanning-tree instances
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP): 512
Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) Protocol: 64
Power
Number of EtherChannels
24
Number of ports per EtherChannel
24
Buffer size
6 MB shared among 16 ports; 18 MB total
Boot flash memory
2 GB
Number of power supplies
2 (redundant)
Power supply types
● AC (forward and reversed airflow)
● DC (forward and reversed airflow)
Typical operating power
● 152 watts (W): 48p with Twinax at 100% load; 2 power
supply units (PSUs) at 25C
● 180W: 48p with SR optics at 100% load; 2 PSUs at 25C
Maximum power
265W
Input voltage
100 to 240 VAC
Frequency
50 to 60 Hz
Power supply efficiency
89 to 91% at 220V
Typical heat dissipation
519 BTUs per hr: 48p with Twinax at 100% load; 2 PSUs
at 25C
614 BTUs per hr: 48p with SR optics at 100% load; 2 PSUs
at 25C
Maximum heat dissipation
Cooling
904 BTUs per hr
Forward and reversed airflow schemes
● Forward airflow: Port-side exhaust (air enters through fan tray and power supplies and exits through ports)
● Reversed airflow: Port-side intake (air enters through ports and exits through fan tray and power supplies)
Four individual, hot-swappable fans (3+1 redundant)
Environment
Dimensions (height x width x depth)
1.72 x 17.3 x 18.38 in. (4.36 x 43.9 x 46.7 cm)
Weight
17.4 lb (7.9 kg)
Operating temperature
32 to 104° F (0 to 40°C)
Storage temperature
-40 to 158° F (-40 to 70°C)
Relative humidity (operating)
● 10 to 85% noncondensing
● Up to 5 days at maximum (85%) humidity
● Recommend ASHRAE data center environment
Table 8.
Description
Layer 2
Relative humidity (nonoperating)
5 to 95% noncondensing
Altitude
0 to 10,000 ft (0 to 3000m)
Mean time between failure (MTBF)
317,030 hours
Software Features
Specifications
● Layer 2 switch ports and VLAN trunks
● IEEE 802.1Q VLAN encapsulation
● Support for up to 4096 VLANs
● Rapid Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVRST+) (IEEE 802.1w compatible)
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 8 of 15
Description
Specifications
● MSTP (IEEE 802.1s): 64 instances
● Spanning Tree PortFast
● Spanning Tree Root Guard
● Spanning Tree Bridge Assurance
● Cisco EtherChannel technology (up to 24 ports per EtherChannel)
● LACP: IEEE 802.3ad, IEEE 802.1ax
● Advanced PortChannel hashing based on Layer 2, 3, and 4 information
● Jumbo frames on all ports (up to 9216 bytes)
● Storm control (multicast and broadcast)
● Link-level flow control (IEEE 802.3x)
Layer 3
● Layer 3 interfaces: Routed ports on interfaces, switch virtual interfaces (SVIs), PortChannels, and subinterfaces
(total: 1024)
● 24-way Equal-Cost Multipath (ECMP)
● 4096 ACL entries
● Routing protocols: Static, RIPv2, EIGRP, OSPF, and BGP
● HSRP and VRRP
● ACL: Routed ACL with Layer 3 and 4 options to match ingress and egress ACLs
● VRF: VRF-Lite (IP VPN), VRF-aware unicast (BGP, OSPF, and RIP), and VRF-aware multicast
● VRF route leaking
● Jumbo frame support (up to 9216 bytes)
Multicast
● Multicast: PIMv2, PIM Sparse Mode (PIM-SM), SSM, and BiDir
● Bootstrap router (BSR), Auto-RP, and Static RP
● MSDP and Anycast RP
● Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Versions 2 and 3
Security
● Ingress ACLs (standard and extended) on Ethernet
● Standard and extended Layer 3 to 4 ACLs include IPv4, Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), TCP, and User
Datagram Protocol (UDP)
● VLAN-based ACLs (VACLs)
● Port-based ACLs (PACLs)
● Named ACLs
● ACLs on virtual terminals (VTYs)
● Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) relay
● Control Plane Policing (CoPP)
Cisco Nexus Data
Broker
● Topology support for tap and SPAN aggregation
● Support for QinQ to tag input source tap and SPAN ports
● Traffic load balancing to multiple monitoring tools
● Time stamping using PTP
● Packet truncation
● Traffic filtering based on Layer 1 through Layer 4 header information
● Traffic replication and forwarding to multiple monitoring tools
● Robust RBAC
● Northbound Representational State Transfer (REST) API for all programmability support
Management
● Power On Auto Provisioning (POAP)
● Python scripting
● Switch management using 10/100/1000-Mbps management or console ports
● CLI-based console to provide detailed out-of-band management
● In-band switch management
● Locator and beacon LEDs
● Configuration rollback
● SSHv2
● Telnet
● AAA
● AAA with RBAC
● RADIUS
● TACACS+
● Syslog
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 9 of 15
Description
Specifications
● Embedded packet analyzer
● SNMP v1, v2, and v3
● Enhanced SNMP MIB support
● XML (NETCONF) support
● Remote monitoring (RMON)
● Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) for management traffic
● Unified username and passwords across CLI and SNMP
● Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (MS-CHAP)
● Digital certificates for management between switch and RADIUS server
● Cisco Discovery Protocol Versions 1 and 2
● RBAC
● SPAN on physical, PortChannel, and VLAN
● ERSPAN Versions 2 and 3
● Ingress and egress packet counters per interface
● Network Time Protocol (NTP)
● Cisco OHMS
● Comprehensive bootup diagnostic tests
● Cisco Call Home
● Cisco DCNM
● Active buffer monitoring
● PTP (IEEE 1588) boundary clock
Table 9.
Management and Standards Support
Description
Specification
MIB support
Generic MIBs
● SNMPv2-SMI
Monitoring MIBs
● NOTIFICATION-LOG-MIB
● CISCO-SMI
● SNMPv2-TM
● CISCO-SYSLOG-EXT-MIB
● CISCO-PROCESS-MIB
● SNMPv2-TC
● IANA-ADDRESS-FAMILY-NUMBERS-MIB
● RMON-MIB
● CISCO-RMON-CONFIG-MIB
● IANAifType-MIB
● IANAiprouteprotocol-MIB
● HCNUM-TC
● CISCO-TC
● SNMPv2-MIB
● SNMP-COMMUNITY-MIB
● SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
● SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB
● SNMP-TARGET-MIB
● SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB
● SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB
● CISCO-SNMP-VACM-EXT-MIB
Ethernet MIBs
● CISCO-VLAN-MEMBERSHIP-MIB
Configuration MIBs
● ENTITY-MIB
● CISCO-HC-ALARM-MIB
Security MIBs
● CISCO-AAA-SERVER-MIB
● CISCO-AAA-SERVER-EXT-MIB
● CISCO-COMMON-ROLES-MIB
● CISCO-COMMON-MGMT-MIB
● CISCO-SECURE-SHELL-MIB
Miscellaneous MIBs
● CISCO-LICENSE-MGR-MIB
● CISCO-FEATURE-CONTROL-MIB
● CISCO-CDP-MIB
● CISCO-RF-MIB
Layer 3 and Routing MIBs
● UDP-MIB
● TCP-MIB
● OSPF-MIB
● IF-MIB
● CISCO-ENTITY-EXT-MIB
● OSPF-TRAP-MIB
● BGP4-MIB
● CISCO-ENTITY-FRU-CONTROL-MIB
● CISCO-ENTITY-SENSOR-MIB
● CISCO-HSRP-MIB
● PIM-MIB
● CISCO-SYSTEM-MIB
● CISCO-SYSTEM-EXT-MIB
● CISCO-IP-IF-MIB
● CISCO-IF-EXTENSION-MIB
● CISCO-NTP-MIB
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 10 of 15
Description
Specification
● CISCO-IMAGE-MIB
● CISCO-IMAGE-UPGRADE-MIB
Standards
● IEEE 802.1D: Spanning Tree Protocol
● IEEE 802.1p: CoS Prioritization
● IEEE 802.1Q: VLAN Tagging
● IEEE 802.1s: Multiple VLAN Instances of Spanning Tree Protocol
● IEEE 802.1w: Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree Protocol
● IEEE 802.3z: Gigabit Ethernet
● IEEE 802.3ad: Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
● IEEE 802.1ax: Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
● IEEE 802.3ae: 10 Gigabit Ethernet
● IEEE 802.3ba: 40 Gigabit Ethernet
● IEEE 802.1ab: LLDP
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 11 of 15
Description
Specification
RFC
BGP
● RFC 1997: BGP Communities Attribute
● RFC 2385: Protection of BGP Sessions with the TCP MD5 Signature Option
● RFC 2439: BGP Route Flap Damping
● RFC 2519: A Framework for Inter-Domain Route Aggregation
● RFC 2545: Use of BGPv4 Multiprotocol Extensions
● RFC 2858: Multiprotocol Extensions for BGPv4
● RFC 3065: Autonomous System Confederations for BGP
● RFC 3392: Capabilities Advertisement with BGPv4
● RFC 4271: BGPv4
● RFC 4273: BGPv4 MIB: Definitions of Managed Objects for BGPv4
● RFC 4456: BGP Route Reflection
● RFC 4486: Subcodes for BGP Cease Notification Message
● RFC 4724: Graceful Restart Mechanism for BGP
● RFC 4893: BGP Support for Four-Octet AS Number Space
OSPF
● RFC 2328: OSPF Version 2
● 8431RFC 3101: OSPF Not-So-Stubby-Area (NSSA) Option
● RFC 3137: OSPF Stub Router Advertisement
● RFC 3509: Alternative Implementations of OSPF Area Border Routers
● RFC 3623: Graceful OSPF Restart
● RFC 4750: OSPF Version 2 MIB
RIP
● RFC 1724: RIPv2 MIB Extension
● RFC 2082: RIPv2 MD5 Authentication
● RFC 2453: RIP Version 2
● IP Services
● RFC 768: User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
● RFC 783: Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
● RFC 791: IP
● RFC 792: Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
● RFC 793: TCP
● RFC 826: ARP
● RFC 854: Telnet
● RFC 959: FTP
● RFC 1027: Proxy ARP
● RFC 1305: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Version 3
● RFC 1519: Classless Interdomain Routing (CIDR)
● RFC 1542: BootP Relay
● RFC 1591: Domain Name System (DNS) Client
● RFC 1812: IPv4 Routers
● RFC 2131: DHCP Helper
● RFC 2338: VRRP
IP Multicast
● RFC 2236: Internet Group Management Protocol, version 2
● RFC 3376: Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 3
● RFC 3446: Anycast Rendezvous Point Mechanism Using PIM and MSDP
● RFC 3569: An Overview of SSM
● RFC 3618: Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)
● RFC 4601: Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode (PIM-SM): Protocol Specification (Revised)
● RFC 4607: Source-Specific Multicast for IP
● RFC 4610: Anycast-RP using PIM
● RFC 5015: PIM BiDir
● RFC 5132: IP Multicast MIB
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 12 of 15
Software Requirements
Cisco Nexus 3000 Series Switches are supported by Cisco NX-OS Software Release 5.0 and later. Cisco NX-OS
interoperates with any networking OS, including Cisco IOS Software, that conforms to the networking standards
mentioned in this data sheet.
Regulatory Standards Compliance
Table 10 summarizes regulatory standards compliance for the Cisco Nexus 3000 Series.
Table 10.
Regulatory Standards Compliance: Safety and EMC
Specification
Description
Regulatory compliance
● Products should comply with CE Markings per directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC
Safety
● UL 60950-1 Second Edition
● CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1 Second Edition
● EN 60950-1 Second Edition
● IEC 60950-1 Second Edition
● AS/NZS 60950-1
● GB4943
EMC: Emissions
● 47CFR Part 15 (CFR 47) Class A
● AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A
● CISPR22 Class A
● EN55022 Class A
● ICES003 Class A
● VCCI Class A
● EN61000-3-2
● EN61000-3-3
● KN22 Class A
● CNS13438 Class A
EMC: Immunity
● EN55024
● CISPR24
● EN300386
● KN24
RoHS
RoHS 5 compliant except for lead press-fit connectors
Ordering Information
Table 11 provides ordering information for the Cisco Nexus 3548 and 3524. We can also mention 3500.
Table 11.
Ordering Information
Part Number
Description
Chassis
N3K-C3548P-10G
Nexus 3548 Switch, 48 SFP+
N3K-C3524P-10G
Nexus 3524 Switch, 24 SFP+
NXA-FAN-30CFM-F
N2K/3K Individual Fan, Forward airflow (port side exhaust)
NXA-FAN-30CFM-B
N2K/3K Individual Fan, Reversed airflow (port side intake)
N2200-PAC-400W
N2K/3K 400W AC Power Supply, Forward airflow (port side exhaust)
N2200-PAC-400W-B
N2K/3K 400W AC Power Supply, Reversed airflow (port side intake)
N2200-PDC-400W
N2K/3K 400W DC Power Supply, Forward airflow (port side exhaust)
N3K-PDC-350W-B
N2K/3K 350W DC Power Supply, Reversed airflow (port side intake)
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 13 of 15
Part Number
Description
Software Licenses
N3548-BAS1K9
Nexus 3000 Layer 3 Base License
N3524-LAN1K9
Nexus 3524 Layer 3 LAN Enterprise License (Requires N3K-BAS1K9 License)
N3548-LAN1K9
Nexus 3548 Layer 3 LAN Enterprise License (Requires N3K-BAS1K9 License)
N3548-ALGK9
Nexus 3500 Algo Boost License
NDB-FX-SWT-K9
License for Tap/SPAN aggregation using Cisco Nexus Data Broker
N3548-24P-UPG=
Nexus 3524 additional 24 port license
Spares
NXA-FAN-30CFM-F=
N2K/3K Individual Fan, Forward airflow (port side exhaust), Spare
NXA-FAN-30CFM-B=
N2K/3K Individual Fan, Reversed airflow (port side intake), Spare
N2000-PAC-400W=
N2K/3K 400W AC Power Supply, Forward airflow (port side exhaust), Spare
N2000-PAC-400W-B=
N2K/3K 400W AC Power Supply, Reversed airflow (port side intake), Spare
N2200-PDC-400W=
N2K/3K 400W DC Power Supply, Forward airflow (port side exhaust), Spare
N3K-PDC-350W-B=
N3K Series 350W DC Power Supply, Reversed airflow (port side intake), Spare
N3K-C3064-ACC-KIT=
Nexus 3548 Accessory Kit (same as Nexus 3064)
Cables and Optics
SFP-10G-SR(=)
10GBASE-SR SFP+ Module
SFP-10G-LR(=)
10GBASE-LR SFP+ Module
SFP-10G-ER(=)
Cisco 10GBASE-ER SFP+ Module for SMF
SFP-H10GB-CU1M(=)
10GBASE-CU SFP+ Cable 1 Meter, passive (twinax)
SFP-H10GB-CU3M(=)
10GBASE-CU SFP+ Cable 3 Meter, passive (twinax)
SFP-H10GB-CU5M(=)
10GBASE-CU SFP+ Cable 5 Meter, passive (twinax)
SFP-H10GB-ACU7M(=)
Active Twinax Cable Assembly, 7m
SFP-H10GB-ACU10M(=)
Active Twinax Cable Assembly, 10m
GLC-T(=)
1000BASE-T SFP
GLC-SX-MM(=)
GE SFP, LC Connector SX Transceiver
GLC-SX-MMD(=)
1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver module, MMF, 850nm, DOM
GLC-LH-SM(=)
GE SFP, LC Connector LX/LH Transceiver
GLC-LH-SMD(=)
1000BASE-LX/LH SFP transceiver module, MMF/SMF, 1310nm, DOM
Warranty
The Cisco Nexus 3000 Series Switches have a 1-year limited hardware warranty. The warranty includes hardware
replacement with a 10-day turnaround from receipt of a return materials authorization (RMA).
Service and Support
Cisco offers a wide range of services to help accelerate your success in deploying and optimizing the Cisco Nexus
3000 Series in your data center. The innovative Cisco Services offerings are delivered through a unique
combination of people, processes, tools, and partners and are focused on helping you increase operation efficiency
and improve your data center network. Cisco Advanced Services uses an architecture-led approach to help you
align your data center infrastructure with your business goals and achieve long-term value. Cisco SMARTnet®
Service helps you resolve mission-critical problems with direct access at any time to Cisco network experts and
award-winning resources. With this service, you can take advantage of the Cisco Smart Call Home service
capability, which offers proactive diagnostics and real-time alerts on your Cisco Nexus 3000 Series Switches.
Spanning the entire network lifecycle, Cisco Services helps increase investment protection, optimize network
operations, support migration operations, and strengthen your IT expertise.
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 14 of 15
For More Information
For more information, please visit http://www.cisco.com/go/nexus3000. For information about Cisco Nexus Data
Broker, please visit http://www.cisco.com/go/nexusdatabroker.
Printed in USA
© 2014 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
C78-707001-09
10/14
Page 15 of 15
Data Sheet
Cisco 7200 VXR Series Routers Overview
The Cisco 7200 VXR Series Router delivers exceptional performance/price, modularity,
and scalability in a compact form factor with a wide range of deployment options.
Cisco 7200 VXR Series Router
With processing speeds up to 2 million packets per second, port- and service adapters ranging
from NxDS0 to Gigabit Ethernet, and OC-3 as well as an unparalleled number of high-touch IP
services, the Cisco 7200 VXR series is the ideal Services Aggregation WAN/MAN edge device for
enterprises and service providers deploying any of the following solutions:
●
WAN edge—Award-winning quality-of-service (QoS) feature performance
●
Broadband aggregation—Up to 16,000 Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) sessions per
chassis
●
Multiprotocol Label Switching provider edge (MPLS PE)—Number one choice for
provider edge deployment today
●
Voice/video/data integration—Time-division multiplexer (TDM)-enabled VXR chassis and
voice port adapters
●
IP-to-IP Gateway Support—Direct IP-interconnections
●
IP Security virtual private networking (IPSec VPN)—Scalable to 5,000 tunnels per
chassis
●
High-End Customer Premises Equipment (CPE)—For managed WAN services saving
equipment, transport and administrative cost
The Cisco 7200 VXR addresses these solution requirements by integrating functions previously
performed by separate devices into a single platform. Through this integration, the Cisco 7200
VXR provides a single, cost-effective platform that supports:
●
High-density LAN and WAN interfaces
●
Broadband subscriber services aggregation, including PPP, RFC 1483 termination, and
Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) tunneling
●
Digital T1/E1 TDM trunk termination for voice, video, and data
●
High-density multichannel T3/E3 and T1/E1 with integrated channel service unit/data
service unit (CSU/DSU)
●
ATM, Packet over SONET (POS), and Dynamic Packet Transport (DPT) connectivity
●
ATM IMA (Inverse Multiplexing over ATM) for voice, video, and data
●
Direct IBM mainframe channel connectivity
●
Light-density Layer 2 Ethernet switching
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 1 of 12
Data Sheet
Figure 1.
The Cisco 7200 VXR Router Series with Network Processing Engine NPE-G2
The Cisco 7200 VXR Series offers a rich set of capabilities that address requirements for
performance, density, high reliability, availability, serviceability, and manageability (Table 1).
Table 1.
Cisco 7200 VXR Features and Benefit
Features
Benefits
Up to 2 Mpps Processing
Capability
Provides high-performance routing and processing performance
Maximum Connectivity Options
Meets a variety of topology requirements with the widest range of port densities and
interface options
Breadth of Services
Supports QoS, security, MPLS, broadband, multiservice, voice, IP-to-IP Gateway
and management features for next-generation networks
Investment Protection
Low initial investment with upgrade and redeployment capability
Applications
VPN Gateways-With the new VPN Service Acceleration Module (VSA), the Cisco 7200 VXR
provides high-performance, hardware-assisted encryption, key generation, and compression
services suitable for site-to-site VPN applications.
●
Broadband subscriber aggregation services—For small- and medium-density
aggregation for network operators, competitive local exchange carriers (CLECs), Internet
service providers (ISPs), post, telephone, and telegraph networks (PTTs), and enterprises
worldwide. Key features include:
◦
Flexible, modular interfaces for traffic aggregation: OC-3, Gigabit Ethernet, DS3, Fast
Ethernet, Ethernet, POS
●
◦
IP and ATM QoS/class of service (CoS)
◦
MPLS VPN and full L2TP support
◦
Feature-rich IP services and PPP termination support
Multiservice capabilities—The Cisco 7200 VXR Series provides a scalable voice gateway
solution, ranging from 2 to 20 T1s and E1s. The advanced QoS and multiservice features of
the Cisco 7200 VXR Series makes it an ideal platform in a large number of enterprise and
service provider deployments as managed multiservice CPE or as a voice gateway.
●
Managed network services CPE—The Cisco 7200 VXR is a cost-effective CPE solution
with a field upgradable modular platform. Key features for revenue-generating services
include QoS, MPLS (MPLS VPN, MPLS QoS, MPLS TE), WAN edge services (VLAN
support, NetFlow, NBAR), Security services (NAT, ACL, hardware encryption for VPNs),
and voice/video/data integration.
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 2 of 12
Data Sheet
●
Enterprise WAN aggregation—The Cisco 7200 VXR provides a flexible aggregation
solution that accommodates a wide range of connectivity and service options, offers high
quality and reliability, and can scale to meet future requirements. The Cisco 7200 VXR's
performance per price ratio in the DS0 to OC-3/STM1 range makes it the ideal platform for
aggregating multiple branch offices or remote locations.
●
IP-to-IP Gateway Support—Direct IP-interconnections between VoIP networks lower
costs, lower latency, improve voice quality, and offer greater flexibility to support emerging
services when compared with public-switched telephone network (PSTN) or time-division
multiplexing (TDM) interconnections.
The Cisco Multiservice IP-to-IP Gateway provides a network-to-network interface point for:
◦
Signaling interworking (H.323, SIP)
◦
Media interworking (DTMF, fax, and modem)
◦
Address and port translations (privacy and topology hiding)
◦
Billing and CDR normalization
◦
QoS and bandwidth management (QoS marking using TOS)
Product Specifications
Table 2.
Cards, Ports, Slots
Cisco 7204 VXR
Cisco 7206 VXR
Configurable Slots without Port Adapter Jacket Card
4
6
Configurable Slots with Port Adapter Jacket Card
5
7
Ethernet (10BASE-T) Ports
32
48
Ethernet (10BASE-FL) Ports
20
30
Fast Ethernet (TX) Ports
4
Up to 6
Fast Ethernet (FX) Ports
4
Up to 6
EtherSwitch Port Adapters
2
2
100VG-AnyLAN Ports
4
Up to 6
FDDI (FDX, HDX) Ports
0
0
ATM Ports (T3, OC-3)
4, 4
Up to 6, 4
Packet over SONET
4
6
ATM-CES Port Adapters (Data, Voice, Video), Dual-Wide
1
1
Token Ring (FDX, HDX) Ports
16
24
Synchronous Serial Ports
32
48
ISDN BRI Ports (U, S/T)
16, 32
24, 48
ISDN PRI, Multichannel T1/E1 Ports
32
48
Multichannel T3 Ports
Up to 4
Up to 6
HSSI Ports
Up to 8
Up to 12
Packet over T3/E3 Ports (Integrated DSU)
Up to 10
Up to 14
IBM Channel Interface Ports (ESCON and Parallel)
6
6
VPN Acceleration Module
1
1
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 3 of 12
Data Sheet
Components
Table 3.
Chassis
Feature
Cisco 7204 VXR
Cisco 7206 VXR
● 16 with side-to-side air flow
● 9 with RDS mounting system for front-to-back airflow
Chassis/Rack
Same as Cisco 7204
VXR
I/O Card Slots
1
Same as Cisco 7204
VXR
Port Adapter Slots
4
6
Midplane
2 independent 32-bit, 50-MHz PCI buses with an aggregate
bandwidth of 1.2 Gbps when used with NPE-400. 3
independent 32-bit, 50-MHz PCI buses with an aggregate
bandwidth of 1.8 Gbps when used with NPE-G1 or NPE-G2
Same as Cisco 7204
VXR
Online Insertion and
Removal (OIR)
Yes
Same as Cisco 7204
VXR
Field-Replaceable
Components
Processor, memory, power supply, I/O card, and port
adapters
Same as Cisco 7204
VXR
Additional Standard
Components
AC power supply, AC power cord
Same as Cisco 7204
VXR
Table 4.
Environmental Conditions
Cisco 7204 VXR
Cisco 7206 VXR
Operating Temperature
32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C)
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
Storage Temperature
-4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C)
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
Operating Humidity
10 to 90% (noncondensing)
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
The Cisco 7200 VXR Series chassis also include a Multiservice Interchange (MIX), which supports
switching of DS0 time slots via MIX interconnects across the midplane to each port adapter slot.
The midplane and the MIX also support distribution of clocking between channelized interfaces on
the Cisco 7200 VXR to support voice and other constant-bit-rate applications. The VXR midplane
provides two full-duplex 8.192-Mbps TDM streams between each port adapter slot and the MIX,
which is capable of switching DS0s on all 12 8.192-Mbps streams. Each stream can support up to
128 DS0 channels.
The MIX in the Cisco 7200 VXR provides the ability to switch DS0 time slots between multichannel
T1 and E1 interfaces, much like TDM capabilities. This enables the Cisco 7200 VXR to switch DS0
voice channels on a T1/E1 interface on one port adapter to and from separate voice-processing
port adapters. It also enables DS0s to be switched through the Cisco 7200 VXR without any
processing, which is a requirement in certain voice configurations.
Processors
The Cisco 7200 VXR Series sets new standards in meeting requirements for high-performance
Layer 3 services at an affordable price for both service providers and enterprises.
The following processors are currently available for the Cisco 7200 VXR Series:
●
NPE-G2
●
NPE-G1
●
NPE-400
●
NPE-225
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 4 of 12
Data Sheet
The NPE processors offer exceptional price/performance for most applications, including
enterprise WAN aggregation, CPE, multiservice, and VPN. These processors provide the greatest
flexibility when deploying new features.
Key features supported by the Cisco 7200 VXR Series processors include security, QoS, traffic
management, and network management.
More information on the Cisco 7200 VXR processors is available at:
●
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/routers/ps341/products_data_sheets_list.html
●
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps3931/products_data_sheet09186a008
00c6bd6.html
●
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/routers/ps341/products_data_sheet09186a00800
ae715.html
●
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/routers/ps341/products_data_sheet09186a00800
92132.html
Input/Output Controllers
Each Cisco 7200 VXR Series chassis has a dedicated slot for an I/O controller. The following
types of I/O controllers are currently supported, including some with LAN ports for increased
density without using a port adapter slot:
●
C7200 VXR-I/O, Cisco 7200 VXR I/O Controller
●
C7200 VXR-I/O-2FE/E, Cisco 7200 VXR I/O Controller with dual autosensing 10/100
Ethernet ports
●
C7200 VXR-I/O-GE+E, Cisco 7200 VXR I/O Controller with 1 Gigabit Ethernet Interface
Converter (GBIC) port and one Ethernet port
More information on I/O controllers is available at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/routers/ps341/products_data_sheet09186a0080088724.
html
Port Adapter Jacket Card
Cisco 7204 VXR and 7206 VXR chassis has a dedicated slot for an I/O controller slot that can be
used to install a Port Adapter Jacket Card. The Port Adapter Jacket Card can hold single
(selected) Port or Service Adapter for easy port and slot expansion.
The Cisco 7200 VXR Series Port Adapter Jacket Card supports the following port adapters:
●
Cisco VPN Acceleration Module 2 (SA-VAM2)—Supported only in combination with NPEG1
●
AES wide key crypto card (SA-VAM2+)
●
2-Port Packet/SONET OC3c/STM1 Port Adapter (PA-POS-2OC3)
●
2 Port T3 Serial Port Adapter Enhanced (PA-MC-2T3+)
●
1 port multichannel STM-1multi- and single mode port adapter (PA-MC-STM-1MM, PA-MCSTM-1SMI)
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 5 of 12
Data Sheet
●
1-port Enhanced Port Adapter Series (PA-A3-T3, PA-A3-E3, PA-A3-OC3MM, PA-A3OC3SMI, PA-A3-OC3SML, PA-A6-T3, PA-A6-E3, PA-A6-OC3MM, PA-A6-OC3SMI, PA-A6OC3SML)
The Cisco Mix-Enabled T1/E1 Port Adapters for the Cisco 7200 VXR Series router are not
Note:
compatible with the Port Adapter Jacket Card.
Software
®
The Cisco 7200 VXR Series Port Adapter Jacket Card is supported in the following Cisco IOS
Software versions at the time of first customer shipment:
●
●
●
For NPE-G1
◦
12.4(7)
◦
12.4(6)T1-
For NPE-G2
◦
12.4(4)XD
◦
12.2SB8
For ATM port adapter on both NPE-G1 and NPE-G2
◦
12.4(15)T1
◦
12.2(31)SB8
Interfaces
The Cisco 7200 VXR Series offers scalable density with the widest range of connectivity options
including:
●
Ethernet 10BASE-T and 10BASE-FL
●
Fast Ethernet 100BASE-T (RJ-45 and MII)
●
Gigabit Ethernet
●
Token Ring (half and full duplex)
●
Synchronous serial ISDN BRI, PRI, HSSI, T3, E3
●
Multichannel T1, ISDN PRI
●
Multichannel E1, ISDN PRI
●
Multichannel T3, E3
●
Multichannel STM-1
●
Packet Over SONET (POS)
●
Dynamic Packet Transport (DPT)
●
ATM (single-mode and multimode)
●
ATM-CES
●
Digital Voice Port Adapter, Enhanced
●
Mix-enabled T1/E1
●
Integrated Service Adapter (ISA)
●
VPN Acceleration Module (VAM)
●
VPN Service Adapter (VSA)
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 6 of 12
Data Sheet
The Cisco 7200 VXR shares the same port adapters with the Cisco 7400, 7500, and 7600
FlexWAN module, protecting customer investment in interfaces, providing a clear migration path,
and simplifying sparing.
More detailed information on specific port adapters is available at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2033/prod_module_series_home.html
Options—Features
Key features supported by the Cisco 7200 VXR include:
●
Cisco Express Forwarding
●
QoS
●
●
●
◦
Low-Latency Queuing (LLQ)
◦
Class-Based Weighted Fair Queuing (CBWFQ)
◦
Class-Based Weighted Random Early Detection (CBWRED)
◦
Policing
◦
Marking
◦
Shaping
◦
Committed Access Rate (CAR)
◦
Generic Traffic Shaping (GTS)
◦
Frame Relay Traffic Shaping (FRTS)
◦
Modular QoS command-line interface (MQC) support
◦
Network-Based Application Recognition
MPLS
◦
MPLS VPN
◦
MPLS QoS
◦
MPLS traffic engineering
◦
Any Transport over MPLS
Broadband aggregation
◦
PPPoX
◦
RBE
◦
PPP over X (PPPoX) with L2TP
◦
MLPPP
◦
Multiservice/voice
◦
cRTP
◦
LFI
◦
FRF11/12
◦
MLPPP
◦
MLFR
◦
IP-to-IP Voice Gateway
◦
SRST
Tunneling
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 7 of 12
Data Sheet
◦
GRE
◦
L2TP
◦
UTI
◦
L2TPv3
◦
6to4
◦
Other
◦
ACLs
◦
NAT
◦
NetFlow
◦
Firewall
◦
Multicast
◦
Flexible Packet Matching
◦
IPSec VPN
◦
Secure Multicast
◦
IPv6
Performance
●
Up to 2 Mpps with NPE-G2 processor
●
Up to 1 Mpps with NPE-G1 processor
●
Up to 400 kpps with NPE-400 processor
●
Up to 225 kpps with NPE-225 processor
Table 5.
Memory
Cisco 7204 VXR
Processor Memory
● 128 MB (default for NPE-225)
● 256 MB (default for NPE-400 and NPE-G1, max for
NPE-225)
● 512 MB (max for NPE-400)
Cisco 7206 VXR
Same as Cisco 7204
VXR
● 1 GB (max for NPE-G1 and default for NPE-G2); In
future: optional upgrade to 2 GB for NPE-G2)
PCMCIA Flash Disk Memory
Card (optional, up to 2 slots
available)
● 48 MB, expandable to 128 MB for I/O controllers
● 64 MB, expandable to 256 MB for NPE-G1 and
NPE-G2
Same as Cisco 7204
VXR
Compact Flash Disk Memory
Card (optional for NPE-G1
and NPE-G2)
● 64 MB, expandable to 256 MB for NPE-G1
● 256 MB for NPE-G2
Same as Cisco 7204
VXR
Network Management
Network Management Applications
●
Element Manager Software (EMS) for the Cisco 7200 VXR Series
●
Cisco Secure Policy Manager
●
Cisco VPN Device Manager (VDM)
●
Cisco QoS Device Manager (QDM)
●
Cisco Info Center
●
CiscoWorks
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 8 of 12
Data Sheet
●
Security Device Manager
●
MPLS Diagnostics Expert
●
Secure command-line interface using Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol
●
HTML-based management tool
Table 6.
Physical Specifications
Cisco 7204 VXR
Cisco 7206 VXR
Height
5.25 in. (13.34 cm)
5.25 in. (13.34 cm)
Width
16.8 in. (42.67 cm)
16.8 in. (42.67 cm)
Depth
17 in. (43.18 cm)
17 in. (43.18 cm)
Weight
Chassis is fully configured with a network
processing engine, I/O controller, four port adapters,
two power supplies, and a fan tray: ~50 lb (22.7 kg)
Chassis is fully configured with a network
processing engine, I/O controller, six port adapters,
two power supplies, and a fan tray: ~50 lb (22.7 kg)
Table 7.
Power (The Cisco 7200 VXR is available with single and dual power supply options for both AC
and DC.)
Cisco 7204 VXR
Cisco 7206 VXR
AC-Input Power
370W max. (single or dual power supply configuration)
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
AC-Input Voltage Rating
100-240 VAC wide input with power factor correction
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
AC-Input Current Rating
Not to exceed 5A max. at 100 VAC and 2.5A max. at 240
VAC with the chassis fully configured
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
AC-Input Frequency
Rating
50/60 Hz
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
AC-Input Cable
18 AWG 3-wire cable, with 3-lead IEC-320 receptacle on
the power supply end, and a country-dependent plug on
the power source end
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
DC-Output Power
280W max. (single or dual power supply configuration)
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
DC-Input Power
370W max. (single or dual power supply configuration)
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
DC-Input Voltage Rating
-24 to -60 VDC for global DC power requirements
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
DC-Input Current Rating
● Not to exceed 13A max. at -48 VDC (370W/-48 VDC
= 7.7A typical draw)
● Not to exceed 8A max. at -60 VDC (370W/-60 VDC =
6.2A typical draw)
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
DC Voltages Supplied
and Maximum SteadyState Current Ratings
● +5.2V at 360A
● +12.2V at 9A
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
● -12.0V at 1.5A
● +3.5V at 13A
DC-Input Cable
14 AWG recommended minimum, with at least 3
conductors rated for at least 140°F (60°C)
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
Airflow
~80 cfm
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
Power Dissipation
~370W max. configuration
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
Heat Dissipation
370W (1262 BTUs)
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
Noise Level
● Front (I/O Controller and PA side): 44.2 db
● Back (Power supply side): 43.7 db
Same as Cisco 7204 VXR
● Left (Fan side): 47.2 db
● Right: 44.8 db
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 9 of 12
Data Sheet
Protocols
The Cisco 7200 VXR Series Router supports the following standard Internet protocols:
●
Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocols—Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), IPCP, IP forwarding,
IP host, IP Multicast, PPP-over-ATM, TCP, Telnet, Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP),
User Datagram Protocol (UDP), transparent bridging, virtual LAN (VLAN), MPLS, and IPv6
●
●
Layer 3 routing protocols—EIGRP, IGRP, IS-IS, OSPF, BGP, PIM, and RIP
Network management and security—AAA, CHAP, FTP, RADIUS, SNMP, PAP, and
TACACS
●
RFC 1483—Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM AAL 5
●
RFC 1577—Classical IP and ARP over ATM AAL 5
●
ARP—Determines the destination MAC address of a host using its known IP address
●
BOOTP—Uses connectionless transport layer (UDP); allows the switch (BOOTP client) to
get its IP address from a BOOTP server
●
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)—Allows hosts to send error or control
messages to other hosts; is a required part of IP; for example, the ping command uses
ICMP echo requests to test if a destination is alive and reachable
●
IP or IP over ATM—Suite used to send IP datagram packets between nodes on the
Internet
●
TCP—A reliable, full-duplex, connection-oriented end-to-end transport protocol running on
top of IP; for example, the Telnet protocol uses the TCP/IP protocol suite
●
Packet Internet groper (ping)—Tests the accessibility of a remote site by sending it an
ICMP echo request and waiting for a reply
●
TFTP—Downloads network software updates and configuration files (Flashcode) to
workgroup switch products
●
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP)—Determines an IP address knowing only
a MAC address; for example, BOOTP and RARP broadcast requests are used to get IP
addresses from a BOOTP or RARPD server
●
Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP)—A version of IP that runs over serial links, allowing
IP communications over the administrative interface
●
PPP—Provides host-to-network and switch-to-switch connections over synchronous and
asynchronous circuits
●
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)—Agents that process requests for
network management stations and report exception conditions when they occur; requires
access to information stored in a MIB
●
Telnet—A terminal emulation protocol that allows remote access to the administrative
interface of a switch over the network (in-band)
●
UDP—Enables an application (such as an SNMP agent) on one system to send a
datagram to an application (a network management station using SNMP) on another
system; uses IP to deliver datagrams; TFTP uses UDP/IP protocol suites
●
Dynamic Host Connection Protocol (DHCP)—Lets a host automatically obtain their IP
address, subnet mask, and default route from a pre-configured DHCP server on the
network
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 10 of 12
Data Sheet
●
Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)—Provides fast cut-over to a backup router in the
event of a system or link failure
Product Regulatory Approvals and Compliance
The following table lists regulatory compliance standards for the Cisco 7204 VXR and 7206 VXR
chassis.
Table 8.
Product Regulatory Compliance
Compliance Standard
Product Safety
UL 1950, CSA 22.2 No. 950, EN60950, EN41003, AUSTEL TS001, AS/NZ 3260, IEC 950
Emissions
FCC Class A, CSA Class A, EN55022 Class B, VCCI Class 2, AS/NRZ 3548 Class A
Immunity
IEC-1000-4-2, IEC-1000-4-3, IEC-1000-4-4, IEC-1000-4-5, IEC-1000-4-6, IEC-1000-4-11, IEC-10003-2
NEBS
Level 3
Product System Requirements
Hardware Requirements
Hardware for Cisco 7200 VXR Series Router includes:
●
7204 VXR or Cisco 7206 VXR chassis
●
Network Processing Engine
●
Input/Output controller
●
Processor memory
●
Input/Output controller memory
●
Power supply
●
Console and auxiliary cables
●
Second power supply, accessories
●
Port adapters
●
Service adapters
Note:
You must order a network processing engine for the Cisco 7206 VXR and Cisco 7204
VXR. With the NPE-225 and NPE-400, you must also order an input/output controller. With the
NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 processor, the input/output controller is optional.
Software Requirements
To locate the minimum supported Cisco IOS Software Release by Cisco IOS release for all Cisco
7200 VXR Series products, use the Software Advisor Tool at
http://tools.cisco.com/Support/Fusion/FusionHome.do.
In general, the minimum support Cisco IOS Software releases for the Cisco 7204 VXR and Cisco
7206 VXR chassis are 11.1(16)CA or later; 11.2(11)P or later; or 11.3(1) or later. Consult the
Software Advisor Tool above for more detailed information since the minimum Cisco IOS release
support varies, for example, depending on the Network Processing Engine, the IO Controller Cards
and the Port/Service Adapters The Cisco 7200 VXR chassis is configured with.
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 11 of 12
Data Sheet
Product Ordering Details
Ordering Instructions
Please visit http://www.cisco.com/public/ordering_info.shtml to place an order.
Product Part Number
To find part descriptions and part numbers for Cisco products, use the online Cisco Pricing Tool at
http://www.cisco.com/cgi-bin/front.x/pricing.
The base chassis product IDs are shown below. In addition, various bundles, spares, and options
are available. To access part descriptions and part numbers use the online Cisco Pricing Tool at
http://www.cisco.com/cgi-bin/front.x/pricing.
Table 9.
Product Part Number
Part Number
Description
CISCO7204VXR
Cisco 7204 VXR, 4-slot chassis, 1 AC supply with IP software
CISCO7206VXR
Cisco 7206 VXR, 6-slot chassis, 1 AC supply with IP software
Migration Program
A Cisco Technology Migration Program (CTMP) is in place for the Cisco 7200 VXR series routers.
The Cisco Technology Migration Program is an innovative, industry-first sales program that allows
customers to trade in Cisco as well as competitors’ products to receive a trade-in credit toward the
purchase of any new Cisco product. The program underscores Cisco’s commitment to its
customers to provide end-to-end product solutions and effective migration options in the face of
ever-changing network requirements.
For details about technology migration, go to
http://www.cisco.com/web/partners/pr11/incentive/tmp/.
Service and Support
Cisco Systems offers a wide range of service and support options for its customers. More
information on Cisco service and support programs and benefits are available at
http://www.cisco.com/public/Support_root.shtml.
Printed in USA
All contents are Copyright © 1992–2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
C78-339749-02 11/07
Page 12 of 12
Data Sheet
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches
Product Overview
The Cisco® Catalyst® 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches are an enterprise-class lines of stackable and
standalone switches, respectively. These switches provide high availability, scalability, security, energy efficiency,
and ease of operation with innovative features such as Cisco StackPower (available only on the Catalyst 3750-X),
IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus (PoE+) configurations, optional network modules, redundant power
supplies, and Media Access Control Security (MACsec) features. The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series with
®
StackWise Plus technology provides scalability, ease of management and investment protection for the evolving
business needs. The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X enhance productivity by enabling applications such as IP
telephony, wireless, and video for borderless network experience.
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series primary features:
●
24 and 48 10/100/1000 PoE+, non-PoE models, and 12 and 24 GE SFP port models
●
24 and 48 10/100/1000 UPOE-capable models with Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) support
●
Four optional uplink network modules with GE or 10GE ports
●
Industry first PoE+ with 30W power on all ports in 1 rack unit (RU) form factor
●
Dual redundant, modular power supplies and fans
●
Media Access Control Security (MACsec) hardware-based encryption
●
Flexible NetFlow and switch-to-switch hardware encryption with the Service Module uplink
●
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) for routed access in IP Base image
●
IPv4 and IPv6 routing, Multicast routing, advanced quality of service (QoS), and security features in
hardware
●
Enhanced limited lifetime warranty (LLW) with next business day (NBD) advance hardware replacement
and 90 day access to Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) support
●
Enhanced Cisco EnergyWise for operational cost optimization by measuring actual power consumption of
the PoE devices, reporting, and reducing energy consumption across the network
●
USB Type-A and Type-B ports for storage and console respectively and an out-of-band Ethernet
management port
In addition to the above features, the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X switches also offer:
●
Cisco StackPower™ technology: An innovative feature and industry first for sharing power among stack
members
●
Cisco StackWise Plus technology for ease of use and resiliency with 64 Gbps of throughput
●
Investment protection with backward compatibility with all other models of Cisco Catalyst 3750 Series
Switches
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 1 of 37
Switch Configurations
All switch models can be configured with four optional network modules. The UPOE, PoE+, and non-PoE switch
models are available with either the LAN Base or IP Base feature set. IP Services feature set is available as an
upgrade option at the time of ordering or through a license at a later time. The GE SFP switch models are available
with either IP Base or IP Services feature set.
Stackable Switches
Figure 1 shows the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series Switches (front and back).
Figure 1.
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series Switches (Front and Back)
Table 1 shows the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series configurations.
Table 1.
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series Configurations
Feature Set
Models
Total 10/100/1000
Ethernet Ports
Default AC Power
Supply
Available PoE Power
Stackpower
LAN Base
WS-C3750X-24T-L
24
350W
-
WS-C3750X-48T-L
48
WS-C3750X-24P-L
24 PoE+
715W
435W
Yes- starting
15.0(2)SE software
release (cables
purchased separately)
WS-C3750X-48P-L
48 PoE+
WS-C3750X-48PF-L
48 PoE+
1100W
800W
WS-C3750X-24U-L
24 UPOE
1100W
800W
WS-C3750X-48U-L
48 UPOE
1100W
800W
WS-C3750X-24T-S
24
350W
-
WS-C3750X-48T-S
48
WS-C3750X-24P-S
24 PoE+
715W
435W
WS-C3750X-48P-S
48 PoE+
WS-C3750X-48PF-S
48 PoE+
1100W
800W
WS-C3750X-24U-S
24 UPOE
1100W
800W
WS-C3750X-48U-S
48 UPOE
1100W
800W
WS-C3750X-12S-S
12 GE SFP
350W
-
WS-C3750X-24S-S
24 GE SFP
350W
-
IP Base
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 2 of 37
Feature Set
Models
Total 10/100/1000
Ethernet Ports
Default AC Power
Supply
Available PoE Power
IP Services
WS-C3750X-24T-E
24
350W
-
WS-C3750X-48T-E
48
WS-C3750X-24P-E
24 PoE+
715W
435W
WS-C3750X-48P-E
48 PoE+
WS-C3750X-48PF-E
48 PoE+
1100W
800W
WS-C3750X-24U-E
24 UPOE
1100W
800W
WS-C3750X-48U-E
48 UPOE
1100W
800W
WS-C3750X-12S-E
12 GE SFP
350W
-
WS-C3750X-24S-E
24 GE SFP
350W
-
Stackpower
Standalone Switches
Figure 2 shows Cisco Catalyst 3560-X Series Switches.
Figure 2.
Cisco Catalyst 3560-X Series Switches
Table 2 shows the Cisco Catalyst 3560-X Series configurations.
Table 2.
Cisco Catalyst 3560-X Series Configurations
Feature Set
Models
Total 10/100/1000
Ethernet Ports
Default AC Power Supply
Available PoE Power
LAN Base
WS-C3560X-24T-L
24
350W
-
WS-C3560X-48T-L
48
WS-C3560X-24P-L
24 PoE+
715W
435W
WS-C3560X-48P-L
48 PoE+
WS-C3560X-48PF-L
48 PoE+
1100W
800W
WS-C3560X-24U-L
24 UPOE
1100W
800W
WS-C3560X-48U-L
48 UPOE
1100W
800W
WS-C3560X-24T-S
24
350W
-
WS-C3560X-48T-S
48
WS-C3560X-24P-S
24 PoE+
715W
435W
WS-C3560X-48P-S
48 PoE+
WS-C3560X-48PF-S
48 PoE+
1100W
800W
WS-C3560X-24U-S
24 UPOE
1100W
800W
WS-C3560X-48U-S
48 UPOE
1100W
800W
IP Base
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 3 of 37
Feature Set
Models
Total 10/100/1000
Ethernet Ports
Default AC Power Supply
Available PoE Power
IP Services
WS-C3560X-24T-E
24
350W
-
WS-C3560X-48T-E
48
WS-C3560X-24P-E
24 PoE+
715W
435W
WS-C3560X-48P-E
48 PoE+
WS-C3560X-48PF-E
48 PoE+
1100W
800W
WS-C3560X-24U-E
24 UPOE
1100W
800W
WS-C3560X-48U-E
48 UPOE
1100W
800W
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Software
In addition to IP Base and IP Services feature sets, the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series come with a new
LAN Base feature set. The three feature sets available with all Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches
are:
●
LAN Base: enterprise access Layer 2 switching features
●
IP Base: baseline enterprise access Layer 3 switching features
●
IP Services: advanced Layer 3 switching (IPv4 and IPv6) features
The LAN Base feature set includes comprehensive Layer 2 features, with up-to 255 VLANs. The IP Base feature
set provides baseline enterprise services in addition to all LAN Base features, with 1K VLANs. IP Base also
includes the support for routed access, StackPower (available only on the Catalyst 3750-X), MACsec, and the new
Cisco Service Module. The IP Services feature set provides full enterprise services that includes advanced Layer 3
features such as Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Border
Gateway Protocol (BGP), Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM), and IPv6 routing such as OSPFv3 and EIGRPv6.
All software feature sets support advanced security, QoS, and management features.
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series Switches with LAN Base feature set can only stack with other Cisco Catalyst
3750-X Series LAN Base switches. A mixed stack of LAN Base switch with IP Base or IP Services features set is
not supported.
Customers can transparently upgrade the software feature set in the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
Switches through Cisco IOS® Software activation. Software activation authorizes and enables the Cisco IOS
Software feature sets. A special file contained in the switch, called a license file, is examined by Cisco IOS
Software when the switch is powered on. Based on the license’s type, Cisco IOS Software activates the
appropriate feature set. License types can be changed, or upgraded, to activate a different feature set. For detailed
information about Software Activation, visit http://www.cisco.com/go/sa.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 4 of 37
Cisco StackWise Plus Technology
Cisco StackWise Plus technology is built on the highly successful industry leading StackWise technology, which is
a premium stacking architecture optimized for GbE. StackWise technology was designed to respond to additions,
deletions, and redeployment while maintaining constant performance. The stack behaves as a single switching unit
that is managed by a master switch elected from one of the member switches. The master switch automatically
creates and updates all the switching and optional routing tables. A working stack can accept new members or
delete old ones without service interruption. StackWise creates a highly resilient single unified system of up to nine
switches, providing simplified management using a single IP address, single telnet session, single command-line
interface (CLI), auto-version checking, autoconfiguration, and more. StackWise Plus supports all the features of
StackWise and provides backward compatibility with the existing Cisco Catalyst 3750 Series Switches while
enhancing the throughput of the system up to 64 Gbps. StackWise Plus also enables local switching in Cisco
Catalyst 3750-X Series Switches. Local switching packets coming into a port in the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series
or 3750-E Series Switch destined for another port in the same switch do not have to traverse through the stack
ring, thus increasing the forwarding capacity of the switch. The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series stacks up to nine
switches as a single logical unit for a total of 432 Ethernet 10/100/1000 ports with 18 10GbE ports. Individual
10/100/1000 units can be joined in any combination to evolve with network needs.
Cisco StackPower Technology
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series introduces Cisco StackPower technology, innovative power interconnect system
that allows the power supplies in a stack to be shared as a common resource among all the switches. Cisco
StackPower unifies the individual power supplies installed in the switches and creates a pool of power, directing
*
that power where it is needed. This feature is available in all Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series Switches feature sets .
Up to four switches can be configured in a StackPower stack with the special connector at the back of the switch
using the StackPower cable**, which is different than the StackWise cables. (See Figure 3.)
Figure 3.
StackPower Connector
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 5 of 37
StackPower can be deployed in either power sharing mode or redundancy mode. In power sharing mode, the
power of all the power supplies in the stack is aggregated and distributed among the switches in the stack. In
redundant mode, when the total power budget of the stack is calculated, the wattage of the largest power supply is
not included. That power is held in reserve and used to maintain power to switches and attached devices when one
power supply fails, enabling the network to operate without interruption. Following the failure of one power supply,
the StackPower mode becomes power sharing.
StackPower allows customers to simply add one extra power supply in any switch of the stack and provide either
power redundancy for any of the stack members or simply add more power to the shared pool. StackPower
eliminates the need for an external redundant power system or installation of dual power supplies in all the stack
members.
*
**
Available in LAN Base in the 15.0(2)SE software release
For LAN Base, cables need to be purchased separately
Network Module
Figure 4 shows various Network Modules with Four GbE, Two 10GbE SFP+ Interfaces, Two 10GB-T and Service
Module with Two 10GbE SFP+ Interfaces.
Figure 4.
Network Modules with Four GbE, Two 10GbE SFP+ Interfaces, Two 10GB-T and Service Module with Two 10GbE
SFP+ Interfaces
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series and 3560-X Series Switches support four optional network modules for uplink
ports. The default switch configuration doesn’t include the uplink module; at the time of switch purchase the
customer has the flexibility to choose from the network modules described in Table 3.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 6 of 37
Table 3.
Network Module Numbers and Descriptions
Product Number
Product Description
C3KX-NM-1G
Four GbE port network module
C3KX-NM-10G
Two 10GbE SFP+ ports network module with four physical ports with two SFP+ and two regular SFP ports
C3KX-NM-10GT
Two 10GB-T ports network module
C3KX-SM-10G
Service Module with two 10GbE SFP+ ports network module for Netflow and MACsec encryption
The SFP+ interface supports both 10GbE and GbE port, allowing customers to use their investment in GbE SFP
and upgrade to 10GbE when business demands change, without having to do a comprehensive upgrade of the
access switch. The four uplink modules are hot swappable. The four network modules can be used in any of the
combinations shown in Table 4.
Table 4.
10GbE Network Module Configuration
Interface Options
Network Module
10GbE SFP+ Ports
GbE SFP Ports
1GbE
0
4
10GbE Network Module
2
0
0
4
1
2
10GB-T
2 (RJ-45)
0
Service Module
2
0
1
1
0
2
Service Module
The new Cisco Service Module offers enhanced security and Flexible Netflow (FNF) features on the uplink ports of
the Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X. The service module is supported with IP Base or IP Services feature set. It can
be used with SFP or SFP+ at 1G or 10G speeds. The new Cisco Service Module has custom dedicated hardware
for FNF monitoring, separate from the dedicated hardware for MACSec. Therefore there is no impact on packet
forwarding performance & latency. It offers flexibility with the user being able to define flows. The new Cisco
Service Module enables the following services:
●
Line rate (40G) Flexible NetFlow for Network Monitoring and Security Anomaly Detection
◦ Supported version 9
◦ 32,000 simultaneous flows
◦ 128 of simultaneous active monitors
●
Line rate (40G) MACsec encryption (please refer to MACsec section below)
FNF is a networking monitoring technology. A NetFlow table can be used to collect flow statistics. The flow
information can be used by customers for a variety of use cases like understanding:
1.
Applications running on the network, and identify undesired applications, P2P etc
2.
Granular Local and aggregated Campus view (Top N applications, drill down etc).
3.
Top talkers (ports, users, applications) for application usage, productivity and asset utilization etc.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 7 of 37
4.
Security Anomaly Detection by examining flows that do not traverse trust boundaries for inside the perimeter
attacks
5.
Impacts of network and application changes
6.
Compliance conformation
7.
Traffic patterns for capacity planning
Enabling FNF at the access switch ensures you get all flows. The access switch is the most logical place in the
network for collecting statistics and monitoring all flows. With Netflow, you can obtain MAC-address and access
port information associated with the flow, to get directly to the source of the flow. Most collectors are able to
leverage the location based on MAC-address and interface port number provided by the access switch to the
collector. Thus by enabling FNF at the access switch you are able to get the location information of the flow. The
access switch has a variety of identity mechanism for user authentication and adding user awareness is the natural
progression that can be developed. Access switches are an order of magnitude greater than distribution and core
which makes them scale well for FNF and ensure there are no performance impacts of oversubscription at
aggregation and core.
10GB-T Module
The new Cisco 10G Base-T module is hot-swapable and can operate at either 10GE or GE speed (with manual
configuration).
Table 5 shows the cable types and supported lengths of the new Cisco 10G Base-T module.
Table 5.
*
10GB-T Cable Types and Supported Lengths
Cable Type
Supported Length
Category 7a
100 meters
Category 7
100 meters
Category 6
55 meters
Category 6a*
100 meters
Category 6a requires 3db Insertion Loss margin at 250MHz.
MACsec
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches offer exceptional security with integrated hardware support
for MACsec defined in IEEE 802.1AE. MACsec provides MAC layer encryption over wired networks using out-ofband methods for encryption keying. The MACsec Key Agreement (MKA) protocol provides the required session
keys and manages the keys required for encryption when configured. MKA and MACsec are implemented following
successful authentication using 802.1x Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) framework. In Cisco Catalyst
3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches both the user/down-link ports (links between the switch and endpoint devices
such as a PC or IP phone) and, using the service module, the network/up-link ports can be secured using MACsec.
With the service module you can encrypt switch to switch links such as access to distribution, or encrypt dark fiber
links within a building or between buildings.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 8 of 37
Dual Redundant Modular Power Supplies
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series and 3560-X Series Switches support dual redundant power supplies. The switch
ships with one power supply by default, and the second power supply can be purchased at the time of ordering the
switch or at a later time. If only one power supply is installed, it should always be in the power supply bay 1. (See
Figure 5).
Figure 5.
Dual Redundant Power Supplies
Table 6 shows the different power supplies available in these switches and available PoE power.
Table 6.
Power Supply Models
Models
Default Power Supply
Available PoE Power
24 Port Data Switch
C3KX-PWR-350WAC
-
C3KX-PWR-715WAC
435W
48 Port Full PoE Switch
C3KX-PWR-1100WAC
800W
24 Port UPOE Switch
C3KX-PWR-1100WAC
800W
48 Port Data Switch
24 Port PoE Switch
48 Port PoE Switch
48 Port UPOE Switch
In addition to the above power supplies a 440W DC power supply is available as a spare (should be ordered
separately) on all switch models. The DC power supply also delivers PoE capabilities for maximum flexibility,
(please refer to table 7 for available PoE for different configurations) and customers can mix and match the AC and
DC power supplies in the two available power supply slots. Any of these power supplies can be installed in any of
the switches.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 9 of 37
Table 7.
Available PoE with DC power supply
Model
# of 440W
Total Available PoE Budget
DC PS
24-Port PoE Switch
48-Port PoE Switch
1
220W
2
660W
1
185W
2
625W
Power over Ethernet Plus (PoE+)/Universal Power Over Ethernet (UPOE)
In addition to PoE 802.3af, the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches support PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at
standard), which provides up to 30W of power per port and UPOE, which provides 60W of power per port (only on
UPOE-capable models). The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches can provide a lower total cost of
ownership for deployments that incorporate Cisco IP phones, Cisco Aironet® wireless LAN (WLAN) access points,
or any IEEE 802.3af-compliant end device. PoE removes the need for wall power to each PoE-enabled device and
eliminates the cost for additional electrical cabling and circuits that would otherwise be necessary in IP phone and
WLAN deployments. Table 8 shows the power supply combinations required for different PoE needs. Cisco UPOE
switches extend the IEEE 802.3 PoE+ standard to double the power per port to 60 watts. UPOE-enabled ports can
be used to deliver power for all current PoE/PoE+ solutions in addition to UPOE devices, including VDI clients, IP
turrets for financial trading, personal Cisco TelePresence® systems, and more. The maximum UPOE budget
available on the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X/3560-X switch is 1800W per switch. This requires the 1100W AC power
supply in both the power supply slots. 1800W in POE budget makes sure that the 24-port models support full
UPOE on all ports (24 x 60W/port = 1440W) and the 48-port models support up to 30 UPOE connections (30 x
60W/port = 1800W) per switch.
Table 8.
Power Supply Requirements for PoE/PoE+ and UPOE models
POE/POE+
24 Port PoE Switch
48 Port PoE Switch
PoE (15.4W per port)
One C3KX-PWR-715WAC
One C3KX-PWR-1100WAC
or
Two C3KX-PWR-715WAC
PoE+ (30W per port)
UPOE (60W per port)
One C3KX-PWR-1100WAC
Two C3KX-PWR-1100WAC
or
or
Two C3KX-PWR-715WAC
One C3KX-PWR-1100WAC and one C3KXPWR-715WAC
One C3KX-PWR-715WAC and one C3KXPWR-1100WAC
One C3KX-PWR-715WAC and one C3KXPWR-1100WAC
or
or
Two C3KX-PWR-1100WAC
Two C3KX-PWR-1100WAC
eXpandable Power System (XPS) 2200
The XPS 2200 is the next-generation redundant power system (RPS). It not only provides the functionalities
offered by the RPS but also provides enhanced services with the support for Cisco StackPower technology. When
used with the Cisco Catalyst 3560-X, it provides RPS functionality, but when used with the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X,
it provides StackPower functionality to all the stack members, including power supply redundancy.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 10 of 37
The XPS supports dual redundant power supplies and fans. Up to nine switches can be connected to the XPS
2200, and it can provide power backup to two of the failed switches concurrently (when appropriately sized power
supplies are used). The power supplies used by the XPS 2200 are the same as the ones supported in the Cisco
Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches. The XPS 2200 is fully configurable for setting switch priorities in
case of multiple failures.
Please refer to the XPS 2200 Performance Specifications section at the end of this document.
Figure 6.
The XPS 2200
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches Enable Cisco Borderless Network
Experience
Borderless Networks, a Cisco architecture, deliver the new workspace experience, connecting anyone, anywhere,
using any device, to any resource securely, reliably, and transparently. Cisco’s Borderless Networks architecture
addresses primary IT and business challenges to help create a truly borderless experience by bringing interactions
closer to the employee and customer.
Borderless experience is only possible with intelligent network elements designed and architected to meet the
needs of a global workspace. Cisco Network Access is a primary component of this architecture, enabling various
borderless network services such as mobility, security, MediaNet, EnergyWise, and ease of operations for
increased productivity and operational efficiency. When network access is intelligent, it knows the identity of the
user, as well as where the user is on the network. It knows what is connecting to the network, to automatically
provision the network for QoS and delivery. It becomes services-aware to optimize user experience. Only with
intelligent access network, your enterprise can go borderless securely and transparently. Your business can save
energy, simplify operations with better business efficiency, and have an optimized total cost of ownership.
Cisco Network Access for Borderless solution focuses on the following primary areas:
●
Sustainability
●
Ease of operations
●
Borderless security
●
Borderless experience
Sustainability
Cisco Catalyst switching solutions enable greener practices through measurable power efficiency, integrated
services, and continuous innovations such as Cisco EnergyWise, an enterprisewide solution that monitors and
conserves energy with customized policies. Together, Cisco EnergyWise technology and Cisco Catalyst switches
reduce greenhouse gas (GhG) emissions and increase energy cost savings and sustainable business behavior.
Sustainability features in the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches include the following features
sets:
●
Cisco EnergyWise technology
●
Efficient switch operation
●
Intelligent power management
●
Energy Efficient Ethernet
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 11 of 37
Cisco EnergyWise Technology
Cisco EnergyWise is an innovative architecture, added to fixed configuration switches, promoting companywide
sustainability by reducing energy consumption across an entire corporate infrastructure and affecting more than 50
percent of global greenhouse gas emissions created by worldwide building infrastructure, a much greater effect
than the 2 percent generated by the IT industry. Cisco EnergyWise enables companies to measure the power
consumption of network infrastructure and network-attached devices and manage power consumption with specific
policies, reducing power consumption to realize increased cost savings, potentially affecting any powered device.
EnergyWise encompasses a highly intelligent network-based approach to communicate messages that measure
and control energy between network devices and endpoints. The network discovers Cisco EnergyWise
manageable devices, monitors their power consumption, and takes action based on business rules to reduce
power consumption. EnergyWise uses a unique domain-naming system to query and summarize information from
large sets of devices, making it simpler than traditional network management capabilities. Cisco EnergyWise’s
management interfaces allow facilities and network management applications to communicate with endpoints and
each other using the network as a unifying fabric. The management interface uses standard SNMP or TCP to
integrate Cisco and third-party management systems.
Efficient Switch Operation
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches, designed and engineered by Cisco, provide optimum power
saving, low power operations for industry best-in-class power management, and power consumption capabilities.
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X ports are capable of reduced power modes so that ports not in use can
move into a lower power utilization state.
StackPower lets customers to simply add one extra power supply in any switch of the stack and provide either
power redundancy for any of the stack members or simply add more power to the shared pool.
Intelligent Power over Ethernet Management
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series PoE models support Cisco IP phones and Cisco Aironet WLAN
access points providing up to 30W of power per port, as well as any IEEE 802.3af-compliant end device.
●
Cisco Discovery Protocol Version 2 allows the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches to
negotiate a more granular power setting when connecting to a Cisco powered device such as IP phones or
access points than what is provided by IEEE classification.
●
Per port power consumption command allows customers to specify maximum power setting on an
individual port.
●
Per port PoE power sensing measures actual power being drawn, enabling more intelligent control of
powered devices.
●
The PoE MIB provides proactive visibility into power usage and allows customers to set different powerlevel thresholds.
Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
EEE (IEEE 802.3az) provides a mechanism and a standard for reducing the energy usage of an Ethernet port
without affecting the vital function of forwarding traffic. During peak work hours, most wired client devices use their
network connections with infrequent bursts. The normal EEE operation is well suited to this behavior. During offpeak times the client devices may use sleep or hibernate modes. At this time the network interface can be
completely inactive and able to be woken on demand by remote request.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 12 of 37
Prior to the EEE standard, it was a common practice for client devices such as personal computers and servers to
save power during sleep states by renegotiating the Ethernet link to a lower speed. With EEE capability, PCs and
other “sleep oriented” devices can achieve power savings similar to the speed downshift while allowing a much
faster transition back to the active state. Faster link wake time improves the user’s experience by allowing a faster
transition for the client device from the sleep to active and connected state.
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X/3560-X series switches support EEE on the UPOE models.
Ease of Operations
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X help reduce the operating costs through:
●
Cisco Catalyst Smart Operations
●
Easy to use deployment and control features
●
Advanced, intelligent network management tools
Cisco Catalyst Smart Operations
Cisco Catalyst Smart Operations is a comprehensive set of capabilities that simplify LAN deployment,
configuration, and troubleshooting. In addition to adaptive, always on technologies such as StackWise and
StackPower, Cisco Catalyst Smart Operations enable zero touch installation and replacement of switches, fast
upgrade, as well as ease of troubleshooting with reduced operational cost. Cisco Catalyst Smart Operations is a
set of features that includes Smart Install, auto Smartports, Smart Configuration. and Smart Troubleshooting to
enhance operational excellence:
●
Cisco Smart Install is a transparent plug and play technology to configure the Cisco IOS Software image
and switch configuration without user intervention. Smart Install utilizes dynamic IP address allocation and
the assistance of other switches to facilitate installation providing transparent network plug and play.
●
Cisco Auto Smartports provide automatic configuration as devices connect to the switch port, allowing
auto detection and plug and play of the device onto the network.
●
Cisco Smart Configuration provides a single point of management for a group of switches and in addition
adds the ability to archive and backup configuration files to a file server or switch allowing seamless zero
touch switch replacement.
●
Cisco Smart Troubleshooting is an extensive array of debug diagnostic commands and system health
checks within the switch, including Generic Online Diagnostics (GOLD) and Onboard Failure Logging
(OBFL).
Easy to Use Deployment and Control Features
●
Embedded Event Manager (EEM) is a powerful and flexible feature that provides real-time network event
detection and onboard automation. Using EEM, customers can adapt the behavior of their network devices
to align with their business needs. This feature requires IP Base feature set.
●
IP service-level agreements (SLAs) enable customers to assure new business-critical IP applications, as
well as IP services that utilize data, voice, and video, in an IP network. This feature requires IP Services
feature set.
●
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) autoconfiguration of multiple switches through a boot
server eases switch deployment.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 13 of 37
●
Automatic QoS (AutoQoS) simplifies QoS configuration in voice over IP (VoIP) networks by issuing
interface and global switch commands to detect Cisco IP phones, classify traffic, and help enable egress
queue configuration.
●
Stacking master configuration management and Cisco StackWise technology helps ensure that all
switches are automatically upgraded when the master switch receives a new software version. Automatic
software version checking and updating help ensure that all stack members have the same software
version.
●
Autonegotiation on all ports automatically selects half- or full-duplex transmission mode to optimize
bandwidth.
●
Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) facilitates dynamic trunk configuration across all switch ports.
●
Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) automates the creation of Cisco Fast EtherChannel® groups or Gigabit
EtherChannel groups to link to another switch, router, or server.
●
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) allows the creation of Ethernet channeling with devices that
conform to IEEE 802.3ad. This feature is similar to Cisco EtherChannel technology and PAgP.
●
Automatic media-dependent interface crossover (MDIX) automatically adjusts transmit and receive pairs
if an incorrect cable type (crossover or straight-through) is installed.
●
Unidirectional Link Detection Protocol (UDLD) and Aggressive UDLD allow unidirectional links caused
by incorrect fiber-optic wiring or port faults to be detected and disabled on fiber-optic interfaces.
●
Switching Database Manager (SDM) templates for access, routing, and VLAN deployment allow the
administrator to easily maximize memory allocation to the desired features based on deployment-specific
requirements.
●
Local Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) works in conjunction with Private VLAN Edge to
minimize broadcasts and maximize available bandwidth.
●
VLAN1 minimization allows VLAN1 to be disabled on any individual VLAN trunk.
●
Smart Multicast, with Cisco StackWise Plus technology, allows the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series to
offer greater efficiency and support for more multicast data streams such as video by putting each data
packet onto the backplane only once.
●
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping for IPv4 and IPv6 MLD v1 and v2 Snooping
provide fast client joins and leaves of multicast streams and limit bandwidth-intensive video traffic to only
the requestors.
●
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) continuously sends multicast streams in a multicast VLAN while
isolating the streams from subscriber VLANs for bandwidth and security reasons.
●
Per-port broadcast, multicast, and unicast storm control prevents faulty end stations from degrading
overall systems performance.
●
Voice VLAN simplifies telephony installations by keeping voice traffic on a separate VLAN for easier
administration and troubleshooting.
●
Cisco VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) supports dynamic VLANs and dynamic trunk configuration across
all switches.
●
Remote Switch Port Analyzer (RSPAN) allows administrators to remotely monitor ports in a Layer 2
switch network from any other switch in the same network.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 14 of 37
●
For enhanced traffic management, monitoring, and analysis, the Embedded Remote Monitoring (RMON)
software agent supports four RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events).
●
Layer 2 traceroute eases troubleshooting by identifying the physical path that a packet takes from source
to destination.
●
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) reduces the cost of administering software upgrades by downloading
from a centralized location.
●
Network Timing Protocol (NTP) provides an accurate and consistent timestamp to all intranet switches.
Advanced, Intelligent Network Management Tools
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches offer both a superior CLI for detailed configuration and
Cisco Network Assistant software, a PC-based tool for quick configuration based on preset templates. In addition,
CiscoWorks LAN Management Solution (LMS) supports the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches for
networkwide management.
Cisco Network Assistant
A PC-based network management application designed for small and medium-sized business (SMB) networks with
up to 250 users, Cisco Network Assistant offers centralized network management and configuration capabilities.
Cisco Network Assistant uses Cisco Smartports technology to simplify both initial deployment and ongoing
maintenance. This application also features an intuitive GUI where users can easily apply common services across
Cisco switches, routers, and access points, such as:
●
Configuration management
●
Troubleshooting advice
●
Inventory reports
●
Event notification
●
Network security settings
●
Password synchronization
●
Drag-and-drop Cisco IOS Software upgrades
●
Secure wireless
For detailed information about Cisco Network Assistant, visit http://www.cisco.com/go/cna.
CiscoWorks LAN Management Solution
CiscoWorks LAN Management Solution (LMS) is a comprehensive network lifecycle management solution. It
provides an extensive library of easy-to-use features to automate the initial and day-to-day management of your
Cisco network infrastructure. CiscoWorks LMS uniquely uses Cisco hardware and software platform knowledge
and operational experience into a powerful set of work-flow driven configuration, monitoring, troubleshooting,
reporting, and administrative tools. Including:
●
Support for new Cisco hardware platforms the day they ship
●
Support for new technologies and services from initial deployment to day-to-day administration and
management, such as EnergyWise, Identity, Cisco Auto Smartports, Cisco Smart Install, and much more
●
Configuration management tools built from Cisco experience and Cisco Validated Design recommendations
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 15 of 37
●
Monitoring and troubleshooting capabilities that incorporates Cisco hardware best practices and diagnostics
features
●
Automation in managing hardware inventories, security vulnerabilities (PSIRTS) and platform end-of-life and
support cycles
For detailed information about CiscoWorks LMS, go to
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/cscowork/ps2425/index.html.
Borderless Security
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches provide superior Layer 2 threat defense capabilities for
mitigating man-in-the-middle attacks (such as MAC, IP, and ARP spoofing). TrustSec, a primary element of
Borderless Security Architecture, helps enterprise customers secure their networks, data and resources with
policy-based access control, identity and role-aware networking, pervasive integrity, and confidentiality. The
borderless security is enabled by the following feature sets in the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
Switches:
●
Threat defense
●
Cisco TrustSec
●
Other advanced security features
Threat Defense
Cisco Integrated Security Features is an industry-leading solution available on Cisco Catalyst Switches that
proactively protects your critical network infrastructure. Delivering powerful, easy-to-use tools to effectively prevent
the most common and potentially damaging Layer 2 security threats, Cisco Integrated Security Features provides
robust security throughout the network. Cisco Integrated Security Features include Port Security, DHCP Snooping,
Dynamic ARP Inspection, and IP Source guard.
●
Port Security secures the access to an access or trunk port based on MAC address. It limits the number of
learned MAC addresses to deny MAC address-flooding.
●
DHCP Snooping prevents malicious users from spoofing a DHCP server and sending out bogus
addresses. This feature is used by other primary security features to prevent a number of other attacks such
as ARP poisoning.
●
Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) helps ensure user integrity by preventing malicious users from exploiting
the insecure nature of the ARP protocol.
●
IP source guard prevents a malicious user from spoofing or taking over another user’s IP address by
creating a binding table between the client’s IP and MAC address, port, and VLAN.
Cisco TrustSec
TrustSec secures access to the network, enforces security policies, and delivers standard based security solutions
such as 802.1X enabling secure collaboration and policy compliance. TrustSec capabilities reflect Cisco thought
leadership, innovations, and commitment to customer success. These new capabilities include:
●
IEEE 802.1AE MACsec with prestandard 802.1X-REV Key management: industry’s first fixed switches with
prestandard 802.1X-Rev key management. Available on Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
Switches, MACsec provides Layer 2, line rate Ethernet data confidentiality and integrity on host facing ports,
protecting against man-in-the-middle attacks (snooping, tampering, and replay).
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 16 of 37
●
FIPS 140-2 validated for devices used in government and sensitive environments for extremely high levels
of data security.
●
Flexible authentication that supports multiple authentication mechanisms including 802.1X, MAC
Authentication Bypass and web authentication using a single, consistent configuration.
●
Open mode that creates a user friendly environment for 802.1X operations.
●
Integration of device profiling technology and guest access handling with Cisco switching to
significantly improve security while reducing deployment and operational challenges.
●
RADIUS Change of Authorization and downloadable Calls for Comprehensive policy management
capabilities.
●
802.1X Supplicant with Network Edge Access Transport (NEAT) enables extended secure access
where compact switches in the conference rooms have the same level of security as switches inside the
locked wiring closet.
Other Advanced Security Features
Other Advanced Security features include but are not limited to:
●
Private VLANs restrict traffic between hosts in a common segment by segregating traffic at Layer 2, turning
a broadcast segment into a nonbroadcast multiaccesslike segment.
●
Private VLAN Edge provides security and isolation between switch ports, which helps ensure that users
cannot snoop on other users’ traffic.
●
Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) feature helps mitigate problems caused by the introduction of
malformed or forged (spoofed) IP source addresses into a network by discarding IP packets that lack a
verifiable IP source address.
●
Multidomain Authentication allows an IP phone and a PC to authenticate on the same switch port while
placing them on appropriate voice and data VLAN.
●
Cisco security VLAN ACLs on all VLANs prevent unauthorized data flows from being bridged within
VLANs.
●
Cisco standard and extended IP security router ACLs define security policies on routed interfaces for
control-plane and data-plane traffic. IPv6 ACLs can be applied to filter IPv6 traffic.
●
Port-based ACLs for Layer 2 interfaces allow security policies to be applied on individual switch ports.
●
Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol, Kerberos, and Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3
(SNMPv3) provide network security by encrypting administrator traffic during Telnet and SNMP sessions.
SSH Protocol, Kerberos, and the cryptographic version of SNMPv3 require a special cryptographic software
image because of U.S. export restrictions.
●
Bidirectional data support on the Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) port allows Cisco Intrusion Detection
System (IDS) to take action when an intruder is detected.
●
TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication facilitates centralized control of the switch and restricts
unauthorized users from altering the configuration.
●
MAC Address Notification allows administrators to be notified of users added to or removed from the
network.
●
Multilevel security on console access prevents unauthorized users from altering the switch configuration.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 17 of 37
●
Bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) Guard shuts down Spanning Tree PortFast-enabled interfaces when
BPDUs are received to avoid accidental topology loops.
●
Spanning Tree Root Guard (STRG) prevents edge devices not in the network administrator’s control from
becoming Spanning Tree Protocol root nodes.
●
IGMP filtering provides multicast authentication by filtering out nonsubscribers and limits the number of
concurrent multicast streams available per port.
●
Dynamic VLAN assignment is supported through implementation of VLAN Membership Policy Server
client capability to provide flexibility in assigning ports to VLANs. Dynamic VLAN facilitates the fast
assignment of IP addresses.
Borderless Experience
Borderless network enables enterprise mobility and business-grade video services. Industry’s first unified network
(wired and wireless) location services enable tracking of mobile assets and the users of those assets for both wired
and wireless devices. The true borderless experience is enabled by the following feature sets in the Cisco Catalyst
3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches:
●
High availability
●
High-performance IP routing
●
Superior QoS
●
Location awareness and mobility
High Availability
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series increases availability for stackable switches. Each switch can operate both as
master controller and as forwarding processor. Each switch in the stack can serve as a master, creating a 1:N
availability scheme for network control. In the unlikely event of a single unit failure, all other units continue to
forward traffic and maintain operation.
Other high-availability features include but are not limited to:
●
Cross-Stack EtherChannel provides the ability to configure Cisco EtherChannel technology across different
members of the stack for high resiliency.
●
Flexlink provides link redundancy with convergence time less than 100 ms.
●
IEEE 802.1s/w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) provide
rapid spanning-tree convergence independent of spanning-tree timers and also offers the benefit of Layer 2
load balancing and distributed processing. Stacked units behave as a single spanning-tree node.
●
Per-VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree (PVRST+) allows rapid spanning-tree reconvergence on a per-VLAN
spanning-tree basis, without requiring the implementation of spanning-tree instances.
●
Cisco Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is supported to create redundant, failsafe routing topologies.
●
Switch-port autorecovery (Errdisable) automatically attempts to reactivate a link that is disabled because of
a network error.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 18 of 37
High-Performance IP Routing
Cisco Express Forwarding hardware routing architecture delivers extremely high-performance IP routing in the
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches.
●
Static routing (16 routes) with LAN Base feature set.
●
IP unicast routing protocols (Static, Routing Information Protocol Version 1 [RIPv1], and RIPv2, RIPng,
EIGRP stub) are supported for small-network routing applications with IP Base feature set.
●
Advanced IP unicast routing protocols (OSPF, EIGRP, BGPv4, and IS-ISv4) are supported for load
balancing and constructing scalable LANs. IPv6 routing (OSPFv3, EIGRPv6) is supported in hardware for
maximum performance. OSPF for routed access is included in the IP Base image. The IP Services feature
set is required for full OSPF, EIGRP, BGPv4, and IS-ISv4.
●
Equal-cost routing facilitates Layer 3 load balancing and redundancy across the stack.
●
Policy-based routing (PBR) allows superior control by facilitating flow redirection regardless of the routing
protocol configured. The IP Services feature set is required.
●
Hot Standby Routing Protocol (HSRP) provides dynamic load balancing and failover for routed links, up to
32 HSRP links supported per unit or stack.
●
Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) for IP multicast routing is supported, including PIM sparse mode (PIMSM), PIM dense mode (PIM-DM), PIM sparse-dense mode and Source Specific Multicast (SSM). The IP
Services feature set is required.
●
Virtual routing and forwarding (VRF)-Lite enables a service provider to support two or more VPNs, with
overlapping IP addresses. IP Services feature set is required.
Superior Quality of Service
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series offers GbE speed with intelligent services that keep everything
flowing smoothly, even at 10 times the normal network speed. Industry-leading mechanisms for marking,
classification, and scheduling deliver superior performance for data, voice, and video traffic, all at wire speed.
Following are some of the QoS features supported in the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches:
●
Cross-stack QoS allows QoS to be configured across the entire stack (available only on the
Catalyst 3750-X).
●
802.1p class of service (CoS) and differentiated services code point (DSCP) field classification are
provided, using marking and reclassification on a per-packet basis by source and destination IP address,
MAC address, or Layer 4 TCP/UDP port number.
●
Cisco control-plane and data-plane QoS ACLs on all ports help ensure proper marking on a per-packet
basis.
●
Eight egress queues per port help enable differentiated management of different traffic types across the
stack. Four queues are user configurable and four are reserved for system use.
●
Shaped Round Robin (SRR) scheduling helps ensure differential prioritization of packet flows by intelligently
servicing the ingress queues and egress queues.
●
Weighted Tail Drop (WTD) provides congestion avoidance at the ingress and egress queues before a
disruption occurs.
●
Strict priority queuing helps ensure that the highest-priority packets are serviced ahead of all other traffic.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 19 of 37
●
The Cisco committed information rate (CIR) function provides bandwidth in increments as low as 8 Kbps.
●
Rate limiting is provided based on source and destination IP address, source and destination MAC address,
Layer 4 TCP/UDP information, or any combination of these fields, using QoS ACLs (IP ACLs or MAC
ACLs), class maps, and policy maps.
●
Up to 64 aggregate or individual policers are available per Fast Ethernet or GbE port.
Location Awareness and Mobility
In order to provide delivery of a best-in-class network experience to end users, it’s critical for network access to be
location aware. A wide variety of devices can appear on the network, both wired (switches, routers, IP phones,
PCs, access points, controllers, video digital media players, and so on) and wireless (mobile devices, wireless
tags, rogues, and so on). In many industries, locating assets is primarily a manual process and is time consuming
and error prone. The inability to locate assets in real time and to help ensure their availability when and where they
are needed limits reaction time and efficiency.
Location services answer business-critical questions about both mobile assets and the users of those assets
regardless of whether those assets are connecting using wired or wireless, and hence directly improve their
organization's profitability. Network Location Services also improve security and accelerate client troubleshooting
by locating an asset, user, or device on the network.
●
Network visibility and control provide centralized visibility into wired and wireless devices on the network
and their location.
●
Location-assisted client troubleshooting enables tracking of wired or wireless clients for quick problem
resolution.
●
Asset tracking and improved security provide centralized inventory of wired and wireless devices and asset
management for improved business processes.
●
Cisco Mobility Service Engine (MSE) Open API provides an open API (based on Simple Object Access
Protocol [SOAP] and XML protocol) for any business application that needs the location data.
●
Location based policy allows greater control and visibility. With EnergyWise, power policies can be set up
(to reduce the power or shut down the power from a port) based on the location.
●
Cisco Emergency Responder (CER) enhances emergency calling from Cisco Unified CallManager. It helps
assure that Cisco Unified CallManager sends emergency calls to the appropriate Public Safety Answering
Point (PSAP) for the caller's location.
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Specifications
Switch Performance
Table 9 shows Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches performance specifications.
Table 9.
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Performance Specifications
Performance Numbers for All Switch Models
Switching Fabric
160 Gbps
DRAM
256 MB (512 MB for 3750X-12S and 3750X-24S)
Flash
64 MB (128 MB for 3750X-12S and 3750X-24S)
Total VLANs
1005
VLAN IDs
4K
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 20 of 37
Performance Numbers for All Switch Models
Total Switched Virtual Interfaces (SVIs)
1K
Jumbo Frame
9216 Byte
Total Routed Ports per 3750-X Stack
468
Forwarding Rate of the Switch Models (with Two 10GbE Uplinks)
Forwarding Rate
3750X-24T
65.5 mpps
3750X-24P
3750X-24U
3750X-48T
101.2 mpps
3750X-48P
3750X-48PF
3750X-48U
3750X-12S
35.7 mpps
3750X-24S
65.5 mpps
3560X-24T
65.5 mpps
3560X-24P
3560X-24U
3560X-48T
101.2 mpps
3560X-48P
3560X-48U
3560X-48PF
Scalability Numbers
MAC, routing, security, and QoS scalability numbers depend on the type template used in the switch. Routing
template is not supported in the LAN Base feature set. Table 10 shows Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
Switch scalability numbers.
Table 10.
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switch Scalability Numbers
Access
Default
Routing
VLAN
Unicast MAC addresses
4K
6K
3K
12K
IGMP groups and multicast routes
1K
1K
1K
1K
Unicast routes
6K
8K
11K
0
Directly connected hosts
4K
6K
3K
0
Indirect routes
2K
2K
8K
0
Policy-based routing ACEs
0.5K
0
0.5K
0
QoS classification ACEs
0.5K
0.5K
0.5K
0.5K
Security ACEs
2K
1K
1K
1K
VLANs
1K
1K
1K
1K
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 21 of 37
Dimensions, Weight, Acoustic, MTBF, and Environmental Range Specifications for Cisco
Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches
Table 11 shows dimensions, weight, acoustic, MTBF, and environmental range.
Table 11.
Dimensions, Weight, Acoustic, MTBF, and Environmental Range
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Inches
Centimeters
3750X-24T
1.75 x 17.5 x 18.0
4.45 x 44.5 x 46.0
1.75 x 17.5 x 19.5
4.45 x 44.5 x 49.5
3750X-12S
1.75 x 17.5 x 18.0
4.45 x 44.5 x 46.0
3750X-24S
1.75 x 17.5 x 18.0
4.45 x 44.5 x 46.0
3560X-24T
1.75 x 17.5 x 18.0
4.45 x 44.5 x 46.0
1.75 x 17.5 x 19.5
4.45 x 44.5 x 49.5
Weight
Pounds
Kilograms
3750X-24T
15.6
7.1
3750X-24P
15.8
7.2
3750X-24U
16.0
7.3
3750X-48T
16.3
7.4
3750X-48P
16.5
7.5
3750X-48PF
16.7
7.6
3750X-48U
16.7
7.6
3750X-12S
15.0
6.8
3750X-24S
15.4
7.0
3560X-24T
15.4
7.0
3560X-24P
15.7
7.1
3560X-24U
15.9
7.2
3560X-48T
16.1
7.3
3560X-48P
16.4
7.4
3560X-48PF
16.6
7.5
3560X-48U
16.7
7.6
3750X-24P
3750X-48T
3750X-48P
3750X-48PF
3750X-24U
3750X-48U
3560X-24P
3560X-48T
3560X-48P
3560X-48PF
3560X-24U
3560X-48U
Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) Hours
3750X-24T
189,704
3750X-24P
167,198
3750X-24U
238,070
3750X-48T
171,846
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 22 of 37
3750X-48P
139,913
3750X-48PF
139,913
3750X-48U
184,120
3750X-12S
194,224
3750X-24S
163,707
3560X-24T
208,218
3560X-24P
181,370
3560X-24U
247,580
3560X-48T
186,778
3560X-48P
149,594
3560X-48PF
149,594
3560X-48U
189,710
C3KX-PWR-350WAC
580,710
C3KX-PWR-715WAC
664,055
C3KX-PWR-1100WAC
392,174
C3KX-PWR-440WDC
469,350
C3KX-NM-1G
5,083,574
C3KX-NM-10G
2,468,553
C3KX-NM-10GT
1,411,719
C3KX-SM-10G
396,940
Environmental Ranges
With AC Power Supply
Normal Operating Temperature and Altitudes:
-5ºC to +45ºC, up to 5,000 feet (1500 m)
Operating Environment and Altitude
-5ºC to +40ºC, up to 10,000 feet (3000 m)
Short-Term* Exceptional Conditions:
-5ºC to +50ºC, up to 5,000 feet (1500 m)
-5ºC to +45ºC, up to 10,000 feet (3000 m)
-5ºC to +45ºC, at sea level with single fan failure
*
Not more than following in one year period: 96 consecutive hours, or 360 hours total, or 15
occurrences
With DC Power Supply
Normal Operating Temperature and Altitudes:
-5ºC to +45ºC, up to 6,000 feet (1800 m)
Operating Environment and Altitude (NEBS) -5ºC to +40ºC, up to 10,000 feet (3000 m)
-5ºC to +35ºC, up to 13,000 feet (4000 m)
Short-Term* Exceptional Conditions:
-5ºC to +55ºC, up to 6,000 feet (1800 m)
-5ºC to +50ºC, up to 10,000 feet (3000 m)
-5ºC to +45ºC, up to 10,000 feet (4000 m)
-5ºC to +45ºC, at sea level with single fan failure
*
Not more than following in one year period: 96 consecutive hours, or 360 hours total, or 15
occurrences
Acoustic Noise
With AC Power Supply (with 16PoE+ ports loaded):
Measured per ISO 7779 & Declared per ISO
9296
LpA: 43 dbA Typical, 46 dbA Maximum
Bystander positions operating to an
ambient temperature of 25°C
LwA: 5.2 Bel Typical, 5.5 Bel Maximum
For GE SFP port models:
LpA: 31 dbA Typical, 34 dbA Maximum
LwA: 4.2 Bel Typical, 4.5 Bel Maximum
Typical: Noise emission for a typical configuration
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 23 of 37
Maximum: Statistical maximum to account for variation in production
Relative Humidity
5% to 95%, noncondensing
Storage Environment
Temperature: -40 C' to 70 C'
Altitude: 15,000 ft
Vibration
Operating: 0.41Grms from 3 to 500Hz with spectral break points of 0.0005 G2/Hz at 10Hz and
200Hz 5dB/octave roll off at each end.
Nonoperating: 1.12Grms from 3 to 500Hz with spectral break points of 0.0065 G2/Hz at 10Hz
and 100Hz 5dB/octave roll off at each end.
Shock
Operating: 30G, 2ms Half sine
Nonoperating: 55G, 10ms Trapezoid
Note:
GLC-GE-100FX and GLC-T SFPs are not supported for NEBS short-term operation.
Connectors and LED Indicators for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560X Series
Table 12 shows connectors and LED indicators.
Table 12.
Connectors and LED Indicators
Connectors and
Cabling
● 1000BASE-T ports: RJ-45 connectors, 2-pair Cat-5E UTP cabling
● 1000BASE-T SFP-based ports: RJ-45 connectors, 2-pair Cat-5E UTP cabling
● 100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-SX, -LX/LH, -ZX, -BX10, DWDM and CWDM SFP Transceivers: LC fiber connectors (singlemode or multimode fiber)
● 10GBASE-SR, LR, LRM, CX1 (v02 or higher) SFP+ Transceivers: LC fiber connectors (single-mode or multimode
fiber)
● Cisco StackWise stacking ports: copper-based Cisco StackWise cabling
● Cisco StackPower: Cisco Proprietary Power Stacking cables
● Ethernet Management port: RJ-45 connectors, 2-pair Cat-5 UTP cabling
● Management console port: RJ-45-to-DB9 cable for PC connections
Power Connectors
● Customers can provide power to a switch by using either the internal power supply or the Cisco XPS 2200.
The connectors are located at the back of the switch
● Internal power supply connector: The internal power supply is an autoranging unit. The internal power supply supports
input voltages between 100 and 240VAC. Use the supplied AC power cord to connect the AC power connector to an
AC power outlet
Management and Standards Support for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches
Table 13 shows management and standards support for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series.
Table 13.
Management and Standards Support for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
Description
Specification
Management
BRIDGE-MIB
CISCO-VTP-MIB
CISCO-CDP-MIB
ENTITY-MIB
CISCO-CLUSTER-MIB
ETHERLIKE-MIB
CISCO-CONFIG-MAN-MIB
IF-MIB
CISCO-ENTITY-FRU-CONTROL-MIB
IGMP-MIB
CISCO-ENVMON-MIB
IPMROUTE-MIB
CISCO-FLASH-MIB
OLD-CISCO-CHASSIS-MIB
CISCO-FTP-CLIENT-MIB
OLD-CISCO-FLASH-MIB
CISCO-HSRP-MIB
OLD-CISCO-INTERFACES-MIB
CISCO-HSRP-EXT-MIB
OLD-CISCO-IP-MIB
CISCO-IGMP-FILTER-MIB
OLD-CISCO-SYS-MIB
CISCO-IMAGE-MIB
OLD-CISCO-TCP-MIB
CISCO-IP-STAT-MIB
OLD-CISCO-TS-MIB
CISCO-L2L3-INTERFACE-CONFIG-MIB
OSPF-MIB (RFC 1253)
CISCO-POE-EXTENSIONS-MIB
PIM-MIB
CISCO-MAC-NOTIFICATION-MIB
RFC1213-MIB
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 24 of 37
Description
Specification
Standards
CISCO-MEMORY-POOL-MIB
RFC1253-MIB
CISCO-PAGP-MIB
RMON-MIB
CISCO-PING-MIB
RMON2-MIB
CISCO-PROCESS-MIB
SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
CISCO-RTTMON-MIB
SNMP-MPD-MIB
CISCO-STP-EXTENSIONS-MIB
SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB
CISCO-SYSLOG-MIB
SNMP-TARGET-MIB
CISCO-TCP-MIB
SNMPv2-MIB
CISCO-VLAN-IFTABLE-RELATIONSHIP-MIB
TCP-MIB
CISCO-VLAN-MEMBERSHIP-MIB
UDP-MIB
IEEE 802.1s
RMON I and II standards
IEEE 802.1w
SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3
IEEE 802.1x
IEEE 802.1x-Rev
IEEE 802.3ad
IEEE 802.1ae
IEEE 802.3af
IEEE 802.3at
IEEE 802.3x full duplex on 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and
1000BASE-T ports
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1p CoS Prioritization
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T specification
IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX specification
IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T specification
IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-X specification
Power Supply Specifications
Table 14 lists the power specifications for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series based on the kind of
power supply used.
Table 14.
Power Specifications for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
Description
Specification
C3KX-PWR-1100WAC
C3KX-PWR-715WAC
C3KX-PWR-350WAC
C3KX-PWR-440WDC
Power Supply Rated
Maximum
1100W
715W
350W
440W
Total Output BTU (Note:
1000 BTU/hr = 293W)
3793 BTU/hr, 1100W
2465 BTU/hr, 715W
1207 BTU/hr, 350W
1517 BTU/hr, 440W
Input-Voltage Range and
Frequency
115-240VAC,
100-240VAC,
100-240VAC,
-36VDC to -72VDC
50-60 Hz
50-60 Hz
50-60 Hz
Input Current
12-6A
10-5A
4-2A
Output Ratings
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Output Holdup Time
10 ms minimum @
102.5VAC
16.7 ms minimum @
100VAC
16.7 ms minimum @
100VAC
> [email protected]
Power-Supply Input
Receptacles
IEC 320-C16
IEC 320-C16
IEC 320-C16
Terminal Strip
(IEC60320-C16)
(IEC60320-C16)
(IEC60320-C16)
Power Cord Rating
13A
13A
10A
20A @ 100VDC
Physical Specifications
(H x W x D): 1.58 X 3.25 X
13.25 in
(H x W x D): 1.58 X 3.25 X
11.75 in
(H x W x D): 1.58 X 3.25 X
11.75 in
(H x W x D): 1.58 X 3.25 X
11.75 in
Weight: 3.5 lb
(1.6 kg)
Weight: 2.78 lb
(1.26 kg)
Weight: 2.76 lb
(1.25 kg)
Weight: 2.65 lb
(1.2 kg)
<[email protected]
<[email protected]
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 25 of 37
Description
Specification
Operating Temperature
23 to 113°F (-5 to 45°C)
Storage Temperature
-40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)
Relative Humidity
Operating, and
Nonoperating
Noncondensing
5 to 90% noncondensing
Altitude
10,000 ft. (3000 meters), up to 45°C
MTBF
Calculated MTBF must be greater than 300,000 using Telcordia SR-332, Method 1, Case 3. Demonstrated MTBF is
500,000 hr (with 90% confidence level).
EMI and EMC
Compliance
FCC Part 15 (CFR 47) Class A
ICES-003 Class A
EN 55022 Class A
CISPR 22 Class A
AS/NZS 3548 Class A
BSMI Class A (AC input models only)
VCCI Class A
EN 55024, EN300386, EN 50082-1, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3
EN61000-4-2, EN61000-4-3, EN61000-4-4, EN61000-4-5, EN61000-4-6, EN 61000-6-1
Safety Compliance
UL 60950-1, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1, EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1, CCC
LED Indicators
“AC OK”: Input power to the power supply is OK.
“PS OK”: Output power from the power supply is OK.
Power Consumptions of Standalone Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches
Table 15 shows power consumptions of standalone Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches based on
Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (ATIS) testing using IMIX distribution stream traffic, with input
voltage of 115V AC @ 60 Hz and no PoE loading.
Table 15.
Power Consumptions of Standalone Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
Models
3750X-24T & 3560X-24T
Uplink Module
0% Traffic
10% Traffic
100% Traffic
Weighted Average
93.6
92.8
93.5
93.0
3750X-24P & 3560X-24P
99.4
98.7
99.3
98.9
3750X-48T & 3560X-48T
121.3
119.7
120.4
120.0
3750X-48P & 3560X-48P
134.9
133.3
133.9
133.6
3750X-48PF & 3560X-48PF
137.4
135.8
137.2
136.2
3750X-12S
86.1
86.1
87.1
86.4
3750X-24S
107.5
107.5
108.9
107.9
3560X-24U
97.82
97.27
98.01
97.43
3560X-48U
122.55
121.33
122.06
121.59
3750X-24U
95.59
95.17
96.10
95.33
3750X-48U
126.39
125.29
125.87
125.51
3750X-24T & 3560X-24T
C3KX-NM-1G
Power Consumption, W
95.8
95.4
98.7
95.8
3750X-24P & 3560X-24P
C3KX-NM-10G
101.7
101.5
104.6
101.8
3750X-48T & 3560X-48T
124.2
122.7
126.0
123.3
3750X-48P & 3560X-48P
137.2
136.0
139.3
136.5
3750X-48PF & 3560X-48PF
140.9
139.6
142.9
140.1
3750X-12S
87.6
87.9
91.9
88.6
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 26 of 37
Models
Uplink Module
Power Consumption, W
0% Traffic
10% Traffic
100% Traffic
Weighted Average
3750X-24S
109.7
110.1
114.1
110.7
3560X-24U
99.23
99.10
102.63
99.48
3560X-48U
123.54
122.73
125.99
123.17
3750X-24U
99.34
99.16
102.69
99.54
3750X-48U
127.17
126.33
129.48
126.77
111.7
110.6
114.1
111.1
3750X-24P & 3560X-24P
119
116.9
122.4
117.7
3750X-48T & 3560X-48T
142.8
141.9
145.4
142.4
3750X-48P & 3560X-48P
151.6
150.7
154.2
151.2
3750X-48PF & 3560X-48PF
156.3
155.1
158.5
155.6
3750X-12S
109.3
109.1
111.2
109.3
3750X-24S
139.4
139
142.7
139.5
3560X-24U
116.16
115.92
119.27
116.29
3560X-48U
139.25
138.42
141.83
138.88
3750X-24U
114.92
114.64
118.09
115.03
3750X-48U
141.22
140.37
143.78
140.84
125.80
125.63
130.45
126.14
3750X-24P & 3560X-24P
132.15
132.31
137.00
132.75
3750X-48T & 3560X-48T
157.46
156.72
161.61
157.32
3750X-48P & 3560X-48P
166.26
165.57
170.36
166.15
3750X-48PF & 3560X-48PF
169.75
169.35
173.69
169.85
3750X-12S
127.4
127.3
130.3
127.6
3750X-24S
151.7
151.7
156.8
152.2
3560X-24U
131.14
131.05
135.41
131.50
3560X-48U
155.00
154.24
158.86
154.82
3750X-24U
132.43
132.45
137.21
132.92
3750X-48U
156.94
156.33
160.92
156.88
3750X-24T & 3560X-24T
3750X-24T & 3560X-24T
C3KX-NM-10GT
C3KX-SM-10G
Safety and Compliance
Table 16 lists the safety and compliance information for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series.
Table 16.
Safety and Compliance Information for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
Description
Specification
Safety Certifications
UL60950-1
C-UL to CAN/CSA 22.2 No.60950-1
TUV/GS to EN 60950-1
CB to IEC 60950-1 with all country deviations
AS/NZS 60950-1
CE Marking
NOM (through partners and distributors)
GOST (Russia Safety Mark)
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 27 of 37
Description
Specification
Electromagnetic Emissions
Certifications
FCC Part 15 Class A
EN 55022B Class A (CISPR22 Class A)
VCCI Class A
AS/NZS 3548 Class A or AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A
KCC
CE Marking
GOST (Russian mark - Post FCS through partners)
CCC for PS FRU Redundant
Environmental
Reduction of Hazardous Substances (ROHS) 5
Noise Specifications
Office Product Spec: 48dBA at 30°C (refer to ISO 7779)
Telco
CLEI code
NEBS
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches are NEBS Level 3 compliant according to NEBS Criteria
Levels SR-3580.
Cisco Enhanced Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches come with an enhanced limited lifetime hardware warranty
(E-LLW) that includes next business day delivery of replacement hardware where available and 90 days of 8x5
Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) support.
Your formal warranty statement, including the warranty applicable to Cisco software, appears in the Cisco
information packet that accompanies your Cisco product. We encourage you to review carefully the warranty
statement shipped with your specific product before use.
Cisco reserves the right to refund the purchase price as its exclusive warranty remedy.
For further information on warranty terms, visit http://www.cisco.com/go/warranty. Table 17 provides information
about the enhanced limited lifetime hardware warranty.
Table 17.
Enhanced Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty
Cisco Enhanced Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty
Device Covered
Applies to Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches.
Warranty Duration
Lifetime. As long as the original customer owns the product.
EoL Policy
In the event of discontinuance of product manufacture, Cisco warranty support is limited to 5 years from the
announcement of discontinuance.
Hardware Replacement
Cisco or its service center will use commercially reasonable efforts to ship a replacement for next business day
delivery, where available. Otherwise, a replacement will be shipped within ten (10) working days after receipt of the
RMA request. Actual delivery times might vary depending on customer location.
Effective Date
Hardware warranty commences from the date of shipment to customer (and in case of resale by a Cisco reseller, not
more than 90 days after original shipment by Cisco).
TAC Support
Cisco will provide during business hours, 8 hours per day, 5 days per week basic configuration, diagnosis, and
troubleshooting of device-level problems for up to a 90-day period from the date of shipment of the originally
purchased Cisco Catalyst 3750-X or 3560-X product. This support does not include solution or network-level support
beyond the specific device under consideration.
Cisco.com Access
Warranty allows guest access only to Cisco.com
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 28 of 37
Software Policy for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches
Customers with Cisco Catalyst LAN Base and IP Base software feature sets will be provided with maintenance
updates and bug fixes designed to maintain the compliance of the software with published specifications, release
notes, and industry standards compliance as long as the original end user continues to own or use the product or
up to one year from the end-of-sale date for this product, whichever occurs earlier. Customers with licenses for our
premium software images require a service support contract such as Cisco SMARTnet® Service to download
updates.
This policy supersedes any previous warranty or software statement and is subject to change without notice.
Cisco and Partner Services for Next-Generation Cisco Catalyst Fixed Switches
Enable the innovative, secure, intelligent edge in the Borderless Network Architecture using personalized services
from Cisco and our partners. Through a discovery process that begins with understanding your business
objectives, we help you integrate the next-generation Cisco Catalyst fixed switches into your architecture and
incorporate network services onto that platform. Sharing knowledge and leading practices, we support your
success every step of the way as you deploy, absorb, manage, and scale new technology. Choose from a flexible
suite of support services designed to meet your business needs and help you maintain high-quality network
performance while controlling operational costs. (See Table 18.)
Table 18.
Technical Services Available for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Switches
Technical Services
Cisco SMARTnet Service
● Around-the-clock, global access to the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC)
● Unrestricted access to the extensive Cisco.com knowledge base and tools
● Next-business-day, 8x5x4, 24x7x4, and 24x7x2 advance hardware replacement and onsite parts replacement and installation available
● Ongoing operating system software updates within the licensed feature set
● Proactive diagnostics and real-time alerts on Smart Call Home enabled devices
Cisco Smart Foundation Service
● Next business day advance hardware replacement as available
● Business hours access to SMB TAC (access levels vary by region)
● Access to Cisco.com SMB knowledge base
● Online technical resources through Smart Foundation Portal
● Operating system software bug fixes and patches
Cisco SP Base Service
● Around-the-clock, global access to the Cisco TAC
● Registered access to Cisco.com
● Next business day, 8x5x4, 24x7x4, and 24x7x2 advance hardware replacement. Return to factory option available 2
● Ongoing operating system software updates1
Cisco Focused Technical Support Services
● 3 levels of premium, high-touch services are available:
● Cisco High-Touch Operations Management Service
● Cisco High-Touch Technical Support Service
● Cisco High-Touch Engineering Service
● Valid Cisco SMARTnet or SP Base contracts on all network equipment are required
Notes:
1
. Cisco operating system updates include the following: maintenance releases, minor updates, and major updates within the licensed feature set.
2
. Advance hardware replacement is available in various service-level combinations. For example, 8x5xNBD indicates that shipment will be
initiated during the standard 8-hour business day, 5 days a week (the generally accepted business days within the relevant region), with next
business day (NBD) delivery. Where NBD is not available, same day ship is provided. Restrictions apply; for details, review the appropriate
service descriptions.
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 29 of 37
Ordering Information
Table 19 lists ordering information for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series. To place an order, visit the
Cisco Ordering homepage at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/ordering/or13/or8/order_customer_help_how_to_order_listing.html.
Table 19.
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Ordering Information
Product Number
Product Description
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series
WS-C3750X-24T-L
Stackable 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply
1 RU, LAN Base feature set (Stackpower cables need to be purchased separately)
WS-C3750X-48T-L
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply
1 RU, LAN Base feature set (Stackpower cables need to be purchased separately)
WS-C3750X-24P-L
Stackable 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC power supply
1 RU, LAN Base feature set (Stackpower cables need to be purchased separately)
WS-C3750X-24U-L
Stackable 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply
1 RU, LAN Base feature set (Stackpower cables need to be purchased separately)
WS-C3750X-48P-L
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC power supply
1 RU, LAN Base feature set (Stackpower cables need to be purchased separately)
WS-C3750X-48PF-L
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 1100W AC power supply
1 RU, LAN Base feature set (Stackpower cables need to be purchased separately)
WS-C3750X-48U-L
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply
1 RU, LAN Base feature set (Stackpower cables need to be purchased separately)
WS-C3750X-24T-S
Stackable 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3750X-48T-S
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3750X-24P-S
Stackable 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC Power Supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3750X-24U-S
Stackable 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3750X-48P-S
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC Power Supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3750X-48PF-S
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3750X-48U-S
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3750X-12S-S
Stackable 12 GE SFP Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3750X-24S-S
Stackable 24 GE SFP Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3750X-24T-E
Stackable 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3750X-48T-E
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3750X-24P-E
Stackable 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC Power Supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3750X-24U-E
Stackable 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3750X-48P-E
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC Power Supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3750X-48PF-E
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3750X-48U-E
Stackable 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3750X-12S-E
Stackable 12 GE SFP Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3750X-24S-E
Stackable 24 GE SFP Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
Cisco Catalyst 3560-X Series
WS-C3560X-24T-L
Standalone 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, LAN Base feature set
WS-C3560X-48T-L
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, LAN Base feature set
WS-C3560X-24P-L
Standalone 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC power supply 1 RU, LAN Base feature set
WS-C3560X-24U-L
Standalone 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, LAN Base feature set
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 30 of 37
Product Number
Product Description
WS-C3560X-48P-L
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC power supply 1 RU, LAN Base feature set
WS-C3560X-48P-L
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC power supply 1 RU, LAN Base feature set
WS-C3560X-48PF-L
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, LAN Base feature set
WS-C3560X-48U-L
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, LAN Base feature set
WS-C3560X-24T-S
Standalone 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3560X-48T-S
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3560X-24P-S
Standalone 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3560X-24U-S
Standalone 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3560X-48P-S
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3560X-48PF-S
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3560X-48U-S
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Base feature set
WS-C3560X-24T-E
Standalone 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3560X-48T-E
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, with 350W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3560X-24P-E
Standalone 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3560X-24U-E
Standalone 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3560X-48P-E
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 715W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3560X-48PF-E
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet PoE+ ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
WS-C3560X-48U-E
Standalone 48 10/100/1000 Ethernet UPOE ports, with 1100W AC power supply 1 RU, IP Services feature set
Network Modules for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
C3KX-NM-1G=
1G network module spare
C3KX-NM-10G=
10G network module spare
C3KX-NM-10GT=
10G-T network module spare
C3KX-NM-BLANK=
Network module blank spare
C3KX-SM-10G=
10G Service Module Spare
Power Supplies and Fan for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
C3KX-PWR-350WAC=
350W AC power supply
C3KX-PWR-715WAC=
715W AC power supply
C3KX-PWR-1100WAC=
1100W AC power supply
C3KX-PWR-440WDC=
440W DC power supply
C3KX-PS-BLANK=
Power supply blank spare
C3KX-FAN-23CFM=
Fan module spare
eXpandable Power System (XPS) for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
XPS-2200
eXpandable Power System 2200
CAB-XPS-58CM=
XPS cable 58 cm spare
CAB-XPS-150CM=
XPS cable 150 cm spare
XPS-2200-FAN=
XPS 2200 fan module spare
StackWise and StackPower Cables for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X Series
CAB-STACK-50CM=
Cisco StackWise 50 cm stacking cable
CAB-STACK-1M=
Cisco StackWise 1 m stacking cable
CAB-STACK-3M=
Cisco StackWise 3 m stacking cable
CAB-STACK-50CM-NH=
Cisco StackWise 50 cm nonhalogen lead-free stacking cable
CAB-STACK-1M-NH=
Cisco StackWise 1 m nonhalogen lead-free stacking cable
CAB-STACK-3M-NH=
Cisco StackWise 3 m nonhalogen lead-free stacking cable
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 31 of 37
Product Number
Product Description
CAB-SPWR-30CM=
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X StackPower cable 30 cm spare
CAB-SPWR-150CM=
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X StackPower cable 150 cm spare
Spare Power Cords for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
CAB-3KX-AC=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (North America)
CAB-3KX-AC-AP=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (Australia)
CAB-3KX-AC-AR=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (Argentina)
CAB-3KX-AC-SW=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (Switzerland)
CAB-3KX-AC-UK=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (United Kingdom)
CAB-3KX-AC-JP=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (Japan)
CAB-3KX-250VAC-JP=
Japan 250V AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (Japan)
CAB-3KX-AC-EU=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (Europe)
CAB-3KX-AC-IT=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (Italy)
CAB-3KX-AC-IN=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (India)
CAB-3KX-AC-CN=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (China)
CAB-3KX-AC-DN=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (Denmark)
CAB-3KX-AC-IS=
AC Power Cord for Cisco Catalyst 3K-X (Israel)
CAB-C15-CBN
Cabinet Jumper Power Cord, 250 VAC 13A, C14-C15 Connectors
Spare Accessory and Rack Mount Kits for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
C3KX-ACC-KIT=
Accessory kit for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
C3KX-RACK-KIT=
Rack mount kit for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
C3KX-4PT-KIT=
Extension rails and brackets for four-point mounting for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
FIPS Accessory Kit for the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
C3KX-FIPS-KIT
FIPS Opacity Shield for Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
1
Not supported for NEBS
DOM = digital optical monitoring
3
These SFPs will not operate in the SFP+ module slots for the C3KX-NM-10G and C3KX-SM-10G Network Modules
2
Optics compatibility information
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series support a wide range of optics. Since the list of supported optics is
updated on a regular basis, please consult the tables available here for the latest SFP compatibility information:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps5455/products_device_support_tables_list.html
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Product Activation Process
The Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series product activation process has two steps, described in Table 20.
The first step shows the product activation key, and the second step shows the various upgrade licenses.
Table 20.
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Product Activation Process
Step One: Product Activation Keys
Step Two: Upgrade License
Product Number and Description
Product Number
C3750X-LIC=
3750-X LAN Base to IP Base Upgrade License
(Product activation keys for 3750-X
Series)
C3750X-24-L-S
C3750X-24 LAN Base to IP Base Paper License
C3750X-48-L-S
C3750X-48 LAN Base to IP Base Paper License
L-C3750X-24-L-S
C3750X-24 LAN Base to IP Base E-License
L-C3750X-48-L-S
C3750X-48 LAN Base to IP Base E-License
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Product Description
Page 32 of 37
Step One: Product Activation Keys
Step Two: Upgrade License
Product Number and Description
Product Number
Product Description
3750-X IP Base to IP Services Upgrade
C3750X-24-IOS-S-E
C3750X-24 IP Base to IP Services factory IOS Upgrade
C3750X-48-IOS-S-E
C3750X-48 IP Base to IP Services factory IOS Upgrade
C3750X-24-S-E
C3750X-24 IP Base to IP Services Paper License
C3750X-48-S-E
C3750X-48 IP Base to IP Services Paper License
C3750X-12S-S-E
C3750X-12S IP Base to IP Services Paper License
C3750X-24S-S-E
C3750X-24S IP Base to IP Services Paper License
L-C3750X-24-S-E
C3750X-24 IP Base to IP Services E-License
L-C3750X-48-S-E
C3750X-48 IP Base to IP Services E-License
L-C3750X-12S-S-E
C3750X-12S IP Base to IP Services E-License
L-C3750X-24S-S-E
C3750X-24S IP Base to IP Services E-License
3750-X LAN Base to IP Services Upgrade
C3750X-24-L-E
C3750X-24 LAN Base to IP Services Paper License
C3750X-48-L-E
C3750X-48 LAN Base to IP Services Paper License
L-C3750X-24-L-E
C3750X-24 LAN Base to IP Services E-License
L-C3750X-48-L-E
C3750X-48 LAN Base to IP Services E-License
C3560X-LIC=
3560-X LAN Base to IP Base Upgrade License
(Product activation keys for 3560-X
Series)
C3560X-24-L-S
C3560X-24 LAN Base to IP Base Paper License
C3560X-48-L-S
C3560X-48 LAN Base to IP Base Paper License
L-C3560X-24-L-S
C3560X-24 LAN Base to IP Base E-License
L-C3560X-48-L-S
C3560X-48 LAN Base to IP Base E-License
3560-X IP Base to IP Services Upgrade
C3560X-24-IOS-S-E
C3560X-24 IP Base to IP Services factory IOS Upgrade
C3560X-48-IOS-S-E
C3560X-48 IP Base to IP Services factory IOS Upgrade
C3560X-24-S-E
C3560X-24 IP Base to IP Services Paper License
C3560X-48-S-E
C3560X-48 IP Base to IP Services Paper License
L-C3560X-24-S-E
C3560X-24 IP Base to IP Services E-License
L-C3560X-48-S-E
C3560X-48 IP Base to IP Services E-License
3560-X LAN Base to IP Services Upgrade
C3560X-24-L-E
C3560X-24 LAN Base to IP Services Paper License
C3560X-48-L-E
C3560X-48 LAN Base to IP Services Paper License
L-C3560X-24-L-E
C3560X-24 LAN Base to IP Services E-License
L-C3560X-48-L-E
C3560X-48 LAN Base to IP Services E-License
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 33 of 37
XPS 2200 Performance Specifications
Table 21 lists the performance specifications for the power supplies.
Please note that the same power supplies used in the 3750-X and 3560-X are all usable in the XPS-2200 (please
refer to Table 12).
Table 21.
XPS 2200 Performance Specifications
Performance Numbers for XPS 2200
Total Power Sharing Capability (Stack Power Mode, 9 Switches and 20 total 1100W power supplies)
22kW
Maximum Power Back-up Capability (RPS Mode, 2x1100W power supplies in XPS 2200)
2200W
Nominal Voltage
56V
Nominal Maximum Current per Port (input or output)
40A
Flash
8MB
Heat Dissipation
Table 22 provides heat dissipation information for the Cisco XPS 2200.
Table 22.
Heat Dissipation
Cisco XPS 2200 Power Supply
Configuration
Heat Dissipation
No Load (BTU/hr)
Full Load (BTU/hr)
1 x 350WAC
120
480
2 x 350WAC
160
665
1 x 715WAC
155
610
2 x 715WAC
205
920
1 x 1100WAC
155
825
2 x 1100WAC
205
1350
1 x 440WDC
115
645
2 x 440WDC
155
990
Physical and Environmental Specifications
Table 23 lists the physical and environmental specifications for XPS-2200.
Table 23.
Physical and Environmental Specifications
Description
Specification
Physical specifications
H x W x D:
1.73 x 17.5 x 20.5 in.
(4.4 x 44.5 x 52.1 cm)
Weight:
19.8 lb (9.0 kg)
Total input BTU (1000 BTU/Hr = 290W)
8525 BTU/Hr
Operating temperature
-5 to 45°C up to 5000ft elevation, -5 to 40°C up to 10000ft elevation
Storage temperature
-40 to 70°C
Relative humidity operating,
non-condensing
5 to 95% non-condensing
Relative humidity non-operating,
non-condensing
5 to 95% non-condensing
Operating altitude
10,000 ft. (3000m)
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 34 of 37
Description
Specification
Storage altitude
15,000 ft. (4750 m)
Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF)
222,000 hours
Electromagnetic compatibility
certifications
FCC Class A for North America: 47 CFR Part 15
VCCI Class A for Japan: V-3/2007.04
CCC EMC for China on Spare Power Supplies: EN61000-3-2 (GB17625.1-1998)
BSMI Class A for Taiwan: CNS13438
KCC (formerly MIC) GB17625.1-1998 Class A for Korea: KN24/KN22
AS/NZS Class A for Australia: CISPR22:2004 or EN55022
Brazil, ANATEL In-Country approval
CE Class A for European Union: EN55022, EN300386, EN55024 (CISPR24)
Safety certifications
UL 60950-1
CAN/CSA 22.2 No.60950-1
EN 60950-1CB to IEC 60950-1
GB 4943
Acoustic Specifications
Table 24 lists the acoustic specifications of the Cisco XPS 2200.
The following numbers represent the range of values for Idle, 50% and 100%:
Table 24.
Cisco XPS 2200 Acoustic Specifications
Cisco XPS 2200 Power
Supply Configuration
Sound Pressure
LpA (Typical)
LpAD (Maximum)
Sound Power
LwA (Typical)
LwAD (Maximum)
2 x 1100WAC
43 dB
63 dB
5.3 B
7.3 B
2 x 715WAC
42 dB
61 dB
5.3 B
6.6 B
Dimensions and Weight Options
Table 25 describes various XPS2200 dimensions and weight options (All have a 1 RU height).
Table 25.
Cisco XPS 2200 Dimensions and Weight Options
XPS2200 dimensions and Dimensions (H x W x D)
weight options
Inches
Weight
Centimeters
Pounds
Kilograms
XPS2200 including 3 fan
FRUs
1.73 x 17.5 x 17.46
4.4 x 44.5 x 44.4
12.8
5.8
With two C3K-PWR1100WAC power
supplies
1.73 x 17.5 x 20.5
4.4 x 44.5 x 52.1
19.0
8.6
With two C3K-PWR715WAC power supplies
1.73 x 17.5 x 19.0
4.4 x 44.5 x 48.3
18.5
8.4
With two C3K-PWR350WAC power supplies
1.73 x 17.5 x 19.0
4.4 x 44.5 x 48.3
18.5
8.4
With two C3K-PWR440WDC power supplies
1.73 x 17.5 x 19.0
4.4 x 44.5 x 48.3
18.4
8.3
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 35 of 37
Connectors and Cabling
Table 26 describes the connectors and cabling for the XPS2200.
Table 26.
Cisco XPS 2200 Connectors and Cabling
Connectors and Cabling
● Cisco StackPower: Cisco Proprietary Power Stacking cables
● Service port: RJ-45-to-DB9 cable for PC connections
Power Connectors
● Customers can provide power to a XPS-2200 by using either the internal power supply or via one or more 3750X/3560-X Switches. The connectors are located at the back of the switch. (9 StackPower/XPS ports and up to two
AC Power Inlet Connections).
● Internal power supply connector: The internal power supply is an autoranging unit. The internal power supply
supports input voltages between 100 and 240VAC. Use the supplied AC power cord to connect the AC power
connector to an AC power outlet.
Fans
The Cisco XPS 2200 has 3 field-replaceable fan modules (XPS-2200-FAN).
Table 27 describes the fan module for the XPS2200.
Table 27.
Cisco XPS 2200 Fan Module Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (H x W x D)
XPS2200 Fan Module
●
Weight
Inches
Centimeters
Pounds
Kilograms
1.59 x 1.59 x 4.24
4.04 x 4.04 x 10.77
.13
.06
System fan modules offer up to 24 cubic feet per minute (CFM) under full load at ambient temperature of
45°C and altitude of 3000 meters.
Indicators
Table 28 describes the indicator options for the XPS2200.
Table 28.
Cisco XPS 2200 Indicators
RPS Mode- 9 port
associated LEDs
● Solid Green when in RPS mode and able to backup this Port
● Blinking Green when actively backing up Port
● Solid Amber indicates backup not available for this Port
● Blinking Amber for any port faults
SP Mode- 9 port
associated LEDs
● Solid Green when in SP mode and there are no issues
● Blinking Green not defined
● Solid Amber indicates that SP port off-line (No Power Output)
● Blinking Amber for any port faults
Combined function (SP
and RPS) LEDs
● Blinking Amber on both RPS and SP LEDs indicates cable fault (short, etc.)
● Both RPS and SP ports alternate Green/Amber when selected via push button
● 18 Port LEDs for new features with more comprehensive single look status assessment
System LEDs - Front of
System
● System
◦
◦
◦
◦
Solid Green - Normal operation with no faults
Blinking Green during boot
Solid Amber - Temperature faults, cable faults, port faults, power supply faults, fan faults
Blinking Amber during software updates
● Fan
◦ Use one Fan LED, amber when any one fan fails, green when all OK
◦ Each FRU Fan (3) will have an associated Status LED (green=working, amber=failed), but no silkscreen on
front panel
● Temp
◦ Green - No Problems. Amber - Over Temperature
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 36 of 37
● FEP (PS1 & PS2)
◦ Solid Green - Stack Power Mode OK
◦ Blinking Green - RPS Mode OK
◦ Solid Amber - Stack Power Mode Faulty
Power Supply Specifications
The XPS 2200 uses the same power supplies as the Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches. Refer to
Table 12 for the power specifications for each type of power supply that is usable in the XPS 2200 as well as the
Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series Switches.
Cisco XPS2200 Ordering information
Table 29 shows Cisco XPS2200 ordering information.
Table 29.
Ordering Information
Product Number
Product Description
XPS-2200
eXpandable Power System 2200
CAB-XPS-58CM=
XPS cable 58 cm spare
Cable to connect XPS-2200 StackPower/XPS ports to 3750-X or 3560-X Switch SKUs
CAB-XPS-150CM=
XPS cable 150 cm spare
Cable to connect XPS-2200 StackPower/XPS ports to 3750-X or 3560-X Switch SKUs
XPS-2200-FAN=
XPS 2200 fan module spare
C3KX-RACK-KIT=
Rack mount kit for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
C3KX-ACC-KIT=
Accessory kit for Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
C3KX-4PT-KIT=
Extension rails and brackets for four-point mounting for Cisco Catalyst 3750-X and 3560-X Series
Printed in USA
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
C78-584733-10
05/13
Page 37 of 37
Dell UltraSharp 22 Multimedia Monitor | UZ2215H | Dell
How to Buy
Premier Login | Manage Cookies
Browse
For Work
Page 1 of 3
Dell recommends Windows.
Support
Dell Monitors
UltraSharp Monitors
Dell UltraSharp 22 Multimedia Monitor | UZ2215H
Dell UltraSharp 22 Multimedia Monitor | UZ2215H
Flexible. Connected.
Ready to work.
Video conference from your desk with a
54.6 cm (21.5-inch) multimedia monitor
that features a Full HD webcam and
speakers optimized for Microsoft® Lync® .
Display
Diagonally Viewable Size:
54.6 cm
21.5" (21.5-inch wide viewable image size)
Aspect Ratio:
Widescreen (16:9)
Panel Type, Surface:
In-plane switching, anti glare with hard coat 3H
Optimal resolution:
1920 x 1080 at 60 Hz
Contrast Ratio:
1000: 1 (typical)
Dynamic Contrast Ratio : Mega5
Brightness:
250 cd/m2 (typical)
Response Time:
8 ms (gray to gray) with Overdrive
Viewing Angle:
(178° vertical / 178° horizontal)
Color Support:
16.77 Million colors
Pixel Pitch:
0.248 mm
Backlight Technology:
LED
Display Type:
Widescreen Flat Panel Display
Display Screen Coating:
Antiglare with hard-coating 3H
Stand
Tilt only, built in cable-management
http://www.dell.com/ed/business/p/dell-uz2215h/pd
1/6/2015
Dell UltraSharp 22 Multimedia Monitor | UZ2215H | Dell
Page 2 of 3
Flat Panel Mount Interface
VESA (100 mm)
Connectivity
1 VGA connector
2 HDMI(MHL) connector
1 DisplayPort (version 1.2a)
2 USB 3.0 ports - Downstream
1 USB 3.0 port - Upstream
1 Headphone out/ Microphone-in combo jack
Built-in Devices
Full HD Webcam (2.0 mega-pixel)
Dual digital microphone (Omni-directional)
Speakers (2 x 5.0W)
USB 3.0 Hi-Speed Hub (with 1 USB upstream port and 2 USB downstream ports)
Security
Security lock slot (cable lock sold separately)
Anti-theft stand lock slot (to panel)
Dimensions
Size and Weight
Dimensions with stand (H x W x D):
407.5 mm (16.04") x 530.7 mm (20.89") x 180.0 mm (7.09")
Dimensions without stand (H x W x D):
342.4 mm (13.48") x 530.7 mm (20.89") x 44.6 mm (1.76")
Preset Display Area(H X V):
476.1mm x 267.8mm (18.7" x 10.5")
Weight (panel only - for VESA mount):
6.86 lb (3.12 kg)
Weight (with packaging):
14.26 lb (6.48 kg)
Warranty
Specifications - Service / Support Details
3-Year Advanced Exchange Service and Premium Panel Guarantee
Power
Voltage Required
90 to 264 VAC / 50 or 60 Hz/ 1.5 A RMS @ 90 VAC & 0.8 A RMs @180 VAC
Power Consumption (Operational)
23 W (typical) / 60W (maximum)6
Power Consumption Stand by / Sleep
Less than 1.2W
Environmental
Temperature Range Operating:
32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Temperature Range Non-operating:
Storage : -4° to 140° F (-20° to 60°)
Shipping : -4° to 140° F (-20° to 60°)
Humidity Range Operating:
10% to 80% (non-condensing)
Humidity Range Non-operating:
Storage : 5% to 90% (non-condensing)
Shipping : 5% to 90% (non-condensing)
Altitude Operating:
16,404 ft (5,000 m) max
http://www.dell.com/ed/business/p/dell-uz2215h/pd
1/6/2015
Dell UltraSharp 22 Multimedia Monitor | UZ2215H | Dell
Page 3 of 3
Altitude Non-operating:
40,000 ft (12,192 m) max
Regulatory
Compliant Standards
ENERGY STAR 6
EPEAT Gold
TCO Certified Displays
RoHS Compliant
Product Safety, EMC and Environmental Datasheets
Dell Regulatory Compliance
Dell and the Environment
What's in the box
Monitor with stand
Power adapter and cable
HDMI cable
DP cable (DP to Mini-DP)
USB 3.0 upstream cable (enables the USB port on the monitor)
Drivers and documentation media
Quick setup guide
Product and safety information guide
Do more with Dell
Company
Legal
Community
PartnerDirect
About Dell
Privacy Practices
The Dell Community
The power to do more
Corporate Responsibility
Manage Cookies
Read our Blog
TechCenter
Customer Engagement
Legal Information
Discussion Forums
Careers
Terms and Conditions
Events
Emerging Countries – EMEA
Newsroom
Copyright 1999-2014 Dell Inc.
Terms and Conditions
Privacy Practices
Manage Cookies
Dell Recycling
Contact a Reseller
Site Map
CS04
http://www.dell.com/ed/business/p/dell-uz2215h/pd
1/6/2015
Dell Wireless Keyboard and Mouse Combo - KM714 : Computer Accessories | Dell
Contact Us: Click to Chat or Call 1-877-717-3355
Shop
Support
Shop for Home
Dell recommends Windows.
Community
Free Shipping & Extended Returns
Coupons
Accessories
Page 1 of 2
My Account
Financing
Computer Accessories
Keyboards & Mice
Search
Live Chat or Call
Dell Price
Gift Cards
Keyboards & Combos
The KM714 Wireless Keyboard and Mouse Combo from
Dell™ delivers high-quality, wireless performance in a
modern design that allows for a clutter-free desktop
experience. It is designed with both form and function, ...
Full Description
Market Value1
Total Savings
10% Back in Rewards*
$79.99
$20.00
$59.99
Email to a Friend
People Who Viewed This Item
Also Viewed
Add to Wish List
Print-Friendly Version
Compatibility
As low as $20.00/mo^
Apply | Learn More
Click to Call
Dell Wireless Keyboard
and Mouse Combo -...
$49.99
Click to Chat
Usually Ships: Within 1-2 business days
Manufacturer Part# : JRYGD | Dell Part# : 332-1396
Read 24 Reviews
Tech Specs
Overview
Logitech Wireless Combo
MK520
Write a Review
Customer Ratings
73 Reviews
Glossary And Resource
$40.99
Tech Specs
Quick Specs
Device Type
Interface
Wireless Receiver
Input Device
Pointing Device
Buttons Qty
Features
Keyboard and mouse set - wireless
2.4 GHz
USB wireless receiver
Keyboard
Mouse
Dell SuperSpeed Dual
Video Docking Station...
6
$139.99
Scrolling wheel
General
Device Type
Interface
Wireless Receiver
Keyboard and mouse set - wireless
2.4 GHz
USB wireless receiver
• Keyboard : 15 in x 4.8 in x 0.8 in / 19 oz
• Mouse : 2.3 in x 4.3 in x 1.3 in / 2.9 oz
Dimensions (WxDxH) /
Weight
Logitech Wireless Combo
MK320
Input Device
56 Reviews
Type
Keyboard
Type
Mouse
$36.99
Pointing Device
Similar Products
Buttons Qty
Pointing Device Features
6
You might also consider...
Scrolling wheel
Customer
Rating
4.0 out of 5
Dell
Dell Wireless Keyboard and
Mouse Combo - KM714
http://accessories.dell.com/sna/productdetail.aspx?c=us&cs=19&l=en&sku=332-1396
1/6/2015
Dell Wireless Keyboard and Mouse Combo - KM714 : Computer Accessories | Dell
Page 2 of 2
Market Value1
Total Savings
$79.99
$20.00
Dell Price
$59.99
Add to Cart
You might also consider...
Customer
Rating
4.3 out of 5
Logitech
Logitech Wireless Desktop MK710
Market Value1
Total Savings
$95.99
$25.00
Dell Price
$70.99
Customize It
Do more with Dell
Company
Legal
Community
Employee and Student Discounts
Investors
Ads & Emails
The Dell Community
PartnerDirect
About Dell
Privacy Statement
Read our Blog
The power to do more
Corporate Responsibility
Legal & Regulatory
Support Forums
Dell Outlet
Customer Engagement
Terms of Sale
Events
Sign Up for Email Deals
Careers
Trademarks
Make a Payment
Dell Newsroom
© 2015 Dell
Regulatory Compliance
Terms of Sale
Unresolved Issues
Electronics and Accessories Sitemap
Privacy
Visit ID
Ads & Emails
Dell Recycling
United States
Contact
Site Map
Feedback
Products
*Same day shipment subject to order size limitations and payment confirmation. Electronics and accessories and other systems including tablets will ship separately and are not
eligible to ship the same day. Not available for APO/FPO orders.
^DELL PREFERRED ACCOUNT (DPA): Offered to U.S. residents by WebBank, who determines qualifications for and terms of credit. Promotion eligibility varies and is determined by
WebBank. Taxes, shipping, and other charges are extra and vary.
Offers subject to change, not combinable with all other offers. Taxes, shipping, handling and other fees apply. U.S. Dell Home new purchases only. LIMIT 5 DISCOUNTED OR
PROMOTIONAL ITEMS PER CUSTOMER. Free shipping and handling offer available in Continental (except Alaska) U.S. only. Availability of electronics and accessories varies and
quantities may be limited. Dell reserves the right to cancel orders arising from pricing or other errors.
*Promotional eGift Card: Arrives separately from purchase, typically in 10-20 days from ship date via email; expires in 90 days (except where prohibited by law). Terms and
conditions apply. See www.dell.com/giftcard/promoterms.
*Rewards are provided in the form of a promotional code. 10% back in rewards valid only on purchases using Dell Preferred Account and Dell Advantage Loyalty Program. 5% back
in rewards valid on all other Dell Advantage purchases. Bose products only eligible for 5% rewards with Dell Advantage. Rewards arrive separately from purchase, typically in 1020 days from ship date via email; expires in 90 days (except where prohibited by law). Terms and conditions apply. See Dell.com/rewardterms.
http://accessories.dell.com/sna/productdetail.aspx?c=us&cs=19&l=en&sku=332-1396
1/6/2015
Dell PowerEdge R720
www.dell.com/QRL/Server/PER720
Setting the standard for feature flexibility in a 2-socket, 2U rack server, the
Dell™ PowerEdge™ R720 is built to run complex workloads using its highly scalable
memory, I/O capacity and flexible network options.
Designed to excel at running a wide range of
applications and virtualization environments for both
mid-size and large enterprises, the Dell PowerEdge
R720 rack server is a general purpose platform
with highly expandable memory (up to 768GB) and
impressive I/O capabilities to match. With Intel®
Xeon® E5-2600 processors, and the ability to support
dual RAID controllers, the R720 can readily handle
very demanding workloads, such as data warehouses,
e-commerce, virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI),
databases and high performance computing (HPC)
as a data node.
Manage data overload
Keep pace with the explosion of data in the virtual
age with the flexible, powerful I/O and storage
capabilities of the R720. Up to 16 internal hard drives
and integrated PCI Express® 3.0-capable expansion
slots greatly increase your capacity, while optional
hot-plug, front-access PCIe SSDs (up to 4) enable
performance-enhancing, in-box storage tiering.
Moreover, Dell Select Network Adapters, our flexible
NIC technology, let you choose the right network
fabric to match your needs without using up a
valuable PCIe slot.
Accelerate the solution
Boost the performance of your HPC or VDI
environment by combining the PowerEdge R720’s
memory density with an optional GPU accelerator
(some with over 500 cores). Choose from a range of
GPU options for greater assisted performance.
Virtualize more with the R720
Maximize your data center’s application capacity
by expanding your virtual environment using the
PowerEdge R720’s large memory footprint. Choose
an industry-leading hypervisor and take advantage
of our system management capability to manage
both physical and virtual assets. The R720 can
help maximize your virtual machines’ uptime with
redundant failsafe hypervisors. Finally, Dell’s Virtual
December 2012
Integrated System™ (VIS) solution lets you enable
complex virtualization environments in just a few
mouse clicks.
The PowerEdge server line
The PowerEdge family is engineered with the right
combination of features and performance scalability
to handle tough workloads for both large and small
data center environments.
The Dell OpenManage™ systems management
portfolio includes the Integrated Dell Remote Access
Controller (iDRAC) with Lifecycle Controller. This
embedded feature helps IT Administrators manage
Dell servers in physical, virtual, local and remote
environments, operating in-band or out-of-band, with
or without a systems management software agent.
OpenManage integrates and connects to third-party
systems management solutions so you can maintain
your single point of control and capitalize on your
existing investment. OpenManage simplifies the
lifecycle of deploying, updating, monitoring and
maintaining your Dell PowerEdge servers.
PowerEdge R720
• Up to 24 DIMMs
• PCIe 3.0-enabled expansion
slots
• Choice of NIC technologies
• Optional hot-plug, front-access
PCIe SSDs
• Optional internal GPU
accelerators
Feature
PowerEdge R720 technical specification
Form factor
2U rack
Processors
Intel® Xeon® processor E5-2600 product family
Processor sockets
2
Internal interconnect
2 x Intel QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) links; 6.4 GT/s; 7.2 GT/s; 8.0 GT/s
Cache
2.5MB per core; core options: 2, 4, 6, 8
Chipset
Intel C600
Memory1
Up to 768GB (24 DIMM Slots): 2GB/4GB/8GB/16GB/32GB DDR3 up to 1600MT/s
I/O slots
7 PCIe slots:
• One x16 full-length, full-height
• Three x8 full-length, full-height
• Three x8 half-length, half-height
RAID controller
Internal controllers:
PERC S110 (SW RAID)
PERC H310
PERC H710
PERC H710P
Drive bays
Up to eight 3.5” drives or up to sixteen 2.5” drives
Maximum internal storage1
32TB
Hard drives
Hot-plug hard drive options:
2.5” PCIe SSD, SAS SSD, SATA SSD, SAS (15K, 10K), nearline SAS (7.2K), SATA (7.2K)
3.5” SAS (15K), nearline SAS (7.2K), SATA (7.2K)
Self-encrypting drives available
Embedded NIC
Broadcom® 5720 Quad Port 1GbE BASE-T (no TOE or iSCSI offload)
Intel I350 Quad Port 1GbE BASE-T (no TOE or iSCSI offload)
Intel X540 Dual Port 10GbE BASE-T with 2 x 1GbE (FCoE capability enabled on the 10GbE ports)
Broadcom 57800S Dual Port 10GbE Base-T with 2 x 1GbE (TOE and iSCSI offload available on 10GbE ports
Broadcom 57800S Dual Port 10GbE SFP+ with 2 x 1GbE (TOE and iSCSI offload available on 10GbE ports
Power supply
Auto-ranging Titanium efficiency, hot-plug redundant 750W AC power supply; Auto-ranging Platinum efficiency, hot-plug
redundant 495W, 750W or 1100W AC power supply; 1100W DC power supply
Availability
High-efficiency, hot-plug, redundant power supplies; hot-plug drive bays; TPM; dual internal SD support; hot-plug,
redundant fan; optional bezel; information tag; ECC memory, interactive LCD screen; extended thermal support;
ENERGY STAR® compliant; switch independent partitioning
Remote management
iDRAC7 with Lifecycle Controller
iDRAC7 Express (default), iDRAC7 Enterprise (upgrade option)
8GB vFlash media (upgrade option), 16GB vFlash media (upgrade optional)
Systems management
IPMI 2.0 compliant
Dell OpenManage™ Essentials and Dell Management Console
Dell OpenManage Power Center
Dell OpenManage Connections:
• Dell OpenManage Integration Suite for Microsoft® System Center
• Dell plug-in for VMware® vCenter™
• HP Operations Manager, IBM Tivoli® Netcool®, and CA Network and Systems Management
Rack support
Operating
systems
1
External HBAs (RAID):
PERC H810
External HBAs (non-RAID):
6Gbps SAS HBA
• ReadyRails™ II sliding rails for tool-less mounting in 4-post racks with square or unthreaded round holes or tooled
mounting in 4-post threaded hole racks, with support for optional tool-less cable management arm
• ReadyRails static rails for tool-less mounting in 4-post racks with square or unthreaded round holes or tooled
mounting in 4-post threaded and 2-post (Telco) racks
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, x64 (includes
Hyper-V® v2)
Microsoft Windows® Small Business Server 2011
Novell® SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server
Red Hat® Enterprise Linux®
Virtualization options:
Citrix® XenServer®
VMware vSphere® including ESX™ and ESXi™
Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization®
For more information on the specific versions and
additions, visit Dell.com/OSsupport.
GB means 1 billion bytes and TB equals 1 trillion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
Global services and support
Dell Services can help reduce IT complexity, lower costs, and eliminate inefficiencies by making IT and
business solutions work harder for you. The Dell Services team takes a holistic view of your needs and designs
solutions for your environment and business objectives while leveraging proven delivery methods, local talent,
and in-depth domain knowledge for the lowest total cost of ownership.
OEM-Ready version available
From bezel to BIOS to packaging, your servers can look and feel as if they were designed and
built by you. For more information, visit Dell.com/OEM.
Learn more at Dell.com/PowerEdge
© 2012 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Dell, the DELL logo, the DELL badge, PowerEdge, ReadyRails, and OpenManage are trademarks of Dell Inc. Other
trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell disclaims
proprietary interest in the marks and names of others. This document is for informational purposes only. Dell reserves the right to make changes without
further notice to any products herein. The content provided is as is and without express or implied warranties of any kind.
Wyse P class
zero clients for VMware
The new Wyse P class
zero clients
For WJrtual desktop environments based
on VMware Horizon View, matching
the optimal end point per varying user
needs throughout an organization can
be challenging. With the Wyse 5000 and
7000 series P class family of VMware
Horizon View zero clients from Dell,
that’s no longer the case.
Dell offers multiple Wyse PCoIP zero
clients for VMware Horizon View,
all of which feature PCoIP protocol
processing in hardware to help ensure
an outstanding user experience
regardless of application mix, location,
or role. And as true zero clients, these
devices require zero configuration and
management, and offer zero attack
surface for viruses and malware.
VMware Horizon View
desktop performance
when and where it’s
needed most.
Outstanding performance is the
hallmark of the Wyse P class zero client
family. Using the latest Tera 2 PCoIP
processor from Teradici coupled with
client-side caching to optimize available
network bandwidth, these zero clients
can offer serious power to the serious
power user. For HD multimedia, CAD/
CAM, 3D solids modeling, and multidimensional simulation, the Wyse 5020P25 and 7020-P45 are more than up to
the task.
For the end user, the proof is in what
they see on their displays, and with the
5020-P25 that means up to two HD
TM
displays to showcase brilliant graphics.
The even more powerful 7020-P45 can
fill up to 4 displays with full HD content
for those users running high-end
graphics and multimedia applications.
In either case, your end users get all
the performance they need while life
becomes much easier for your IT staff.
Dell Wyse EarthSmart
computing
Through our EarthSmart Computing
initiative we are committed to helping
organizations implement an energy
efficient computing strategy – one
that delivers an efficient and productive
computing experience for your users
with a positive effect on energy wastage,
heat and carbon emissions.
Green power
With the 5020-P25 and 7020-P45
drawing less than 9 and 15 watts
respectively helping ensure you meet
your environmental commitments on
heat emissions, carbon consumption is
now achievable.
At a glance
Wyse 5020-P25
Compact, strong, and flexible.
Uses the latest Teradici PCoIP processor
and client-side caching for outstanding
performance.
Choose Wyse 5020-P25 when you need
a zero client for:
• A wide variety of applications that require
excellent performance and brilliant graphics
• Extremely efficient operation and very low
energy usage (under 9 watts)
• Placement flexibility given its very small size.
Wyse 7020-P45
Serious power for the serious power
user. Also uses the latest Teradici PCoIP
processor and client-side caching for
outstanding performance.
Choose Wyse 7020-P45 when you need
a zero client for:
• Users running demanding multimedia
or graphics applications like multiple
simultaneous HD content feeds, 3D solids
modelling, or geophysical simulation
• Users requiring up to four HD displays
(e.g. securities trading, surveillance, video
production) with high energy efficiency
(under 15 watts).
While your work place environments are
transformed into quiet, more secure and
quite literally - cool places - to help your
people perform at their best.
Meet the family
Wyse 5020-P25
High performance, compact
design, dual HD displays, and
flexible networking options.
Wyse 7020-P45
A true powerhouse with high
performance. Quad HD displays
and flexible networking options.
Wyse 7020-P45
Wyse 5020-P25
Specification
Wyse 5020-P25 zero client
Processor
Teradici TERA2321 PCoIP™
Memory
32MB Flash / 512MB RAM DDR3
Power
Worldwide auto-sensing 100–240 VAC, 50/60Hz power supply, Multifunction
power button LED
Power consumption
Less than 9 watts
Security
Built-in Kensington security slot (cable sold separately)
Certifications
(Based on US ratings)
VMware Ready, PCoIP Connected
I/O peripheral support
DisplayPort DVI-I port (1 VGA adapter included) Four External USB 2.0 ports
(2 front, 2 back) Optional DisplayPort to DVI (adapter sold separately)
Networking
10/100/1000 Base-T Gigabit Ethernet
Optional Fiber SFP Module Ready (Mutually Exclusive with RJ45)
Display
VESA monitor support with Display Data Control (DDC) for automatic
setting of resolution and refresh rate
One display 2560 x [email protected], Color Depth: 8, 15, 16 or 24bpp
Two displays 1920 x [email protected], Color Depth: 8, 15, 16 or 24bpp
Audio
Composite Audio 1/8-inch mini jack
Output: 1/8-inch mini jack, full 16-bit stereo, 48KHz sample rate
Dimensions
Height x Width x Depth
29 mm x 177 mm x 116 mm (1.14 in x 6.97 in x 4.57 in)
Weight 0.48kg (1.06lb)
Mountings
Horizontal feet
Optional mount - Vertical feet
Temperature Range
Horizontal position 10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
Vertical position, power button up 10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
Storage -10° to 60° C (14° to 140° F)
Humidity
Condensing 20% to 80%
Non-condensing 10% to 95%
Keyboard and mouse
Enhanced USB keyboard with Windows Keys (104 keys) and PS/2 mouse port
included in the U.S. and sold separately outside the U.S.
PS/2 or USB optical mouse are also available and sold separately
(availability varies by region).
Warranty
3-year limited hardware warranty
Learn more: Contact Dell Wyse at [email protected] or call 1-800-438-9973
Dell.com
Dell cloud client-computing
One Dell Way
Round Rock, TX 78664
Visit our website at:
http://www.dell.com
Or send email to: [email protected]
Dell Sales
1-800-438-9973
Specification
Wyse 7020-P45 zero client
Processor
Teradici TERA2140 PCoIP™
Memory
32MB Flash / 512MB RAM DDR3
Power
Worldwide auto-sensing 100–240 VAC, 50/60Hz. power supply, Multifunction
power button LED
Power consumption
Less than 15 watts
Security
Built-in Kensington security slot (cable sold separately)
Certifications
(Based on US ratings)
VMware Ready, PCoIP Connected
I/O peripheral support
Four DisplayPort ports Four External USB 2.0 ports (2 front, 2 back)
Optional four DVI-I ports mutually exclusive with four DisplayPorts
Networking
10/100/1000 Base-T Gigabit Ethernet
Optional Fiber SFP Module Ready (Mutually Exclusive with RJ45)
Display
VESA monitor support with Display Data Control (DDC) for automatic setting of
resolution and refresh rate
One display 2560 x [email protected], Color Depth: 8, 15, 16 or 24bpp
Two displays 2560 x [email protected], Color Depth: 8, 15, 16 or 24bpp
Four displays 1920 x [email protected], Color Depth: 8, 15, 16 or 24bpp
Audio
Audio In 1/8-inch mini jack, 8-bit microphone
Output: 1/8-inch mini jack, full 16-bit stereo, 48KHz sample rate
One Line out / speaker 1/8-inch mini jack
Dimensions
Height x Width x Depth
177 mm x 46 mm x 130 mm (6.97 in x 1.81 in x 5.12 in)
Weight 0.765kg (1.67lb)
Mountings
Vertical feet
Temperature Range
Vertical position, power button up 10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
Storage -10° to 60° C (14° to 140° F)
Humidity
Condensing 20% to 80%
Non-condensing 10% to 95%
Keyboard and mouse
Enhanced USB keyboard with Windows Keys (104 keys) and PS/2 mouse port
included in the U.S. and sold separately outside the U.S.
PS/2 or USB optical mouse are also available and sold separately
(availability varies by region).
Warranty
3-year limited hardware warranty
Learn more: Contact Dell Wyse at [email protected] or call 1-800-438-9973
Dell.com
Dell cloud client-computing
One Dell Way
Round Rock, TX 78664
Visit our website at:
http://www.dell.com
Or send email to: [email protected]
Dell Sales
1-800-438-9973
EqualLogic PS6210 Series
The Dell™ EqualLogic™ PS6210 arrays bring a new level of performance for your most demanding
applications, while delivering the simplicity of the EqualLogic management experience.
Performance and efficiency simplified for the
real world
The Dell EqualLogic PS6210 is an intelligent storage
array, designed to provide simple management
and seamless expansion using innovative Dell
technology. EqualLogic PS Series storage arrays
include SAN configuration features and capabilities
that sense network connections, automatically build
RAID sets, and conduct system health checks to
help ensure that all components are fully functional.
Based on a virtualized modular storage architecture
that enables you to purchase only the storage you
need — when you need it — the PS Series arrays
help prevent both underutilization and overprovisioning in your data center. All PS Series arrays
in a SAN work together to automatically manage
data, load balance across all resources, and expand
to meet your growing storage needs. With the
addition of EqualLogic FS Series appliances, you can
effectively store both block and file data in a unified
storage solution.
EqualLogic products are designed to meet and
exceed the rugged requirements of the data center
including fault-tolerant capabilities through fully
redundant and hot-swappable components: dual
controllers, dual fan trays, dual power supplies, and
disk drives with hot spares.
Build and scale the storage system you need
With choices in performance, capacity and
networking, the EqualLogic PS6210 Series arrays
offer enterprise-class storage features that are
easy to operate and manage, and optimized for
virtualization platforms and a variety of applications
such as deployments of faster networking
technology, server virtualization, VDI, OLTP (online
transactional processing) database workloads, large
block sequential workloads, and other high-IOPS
workloads that are latency sensitive.
The SSD-enabled PS6210 arrays give customers
flash at the price of disk with a new level of
performance in the EqualLogic family: Twice the
maximum IOPS as prior models for their most
critical applications.1 All-flash PS6210S arrays provide
load-balanced performance and dense SSD capacity
that can be scaled out predictably. PS6210XS hybridflash arrays are ideal for VDI deployments, important
databases and other mixed workloads, by providing
auto-tiering for hot data.
Feature-rich software portfolio
The EqualLogic PS Series arrays include innovative
firmware and host software with no additional
cost or software licensing fees. EqualLogic’s latest
firmware release offers new features so your
hardware can meet your current needs and can
grow with you as the demands of the virtual era
increase.
EqualLogic host software extends the functionality
of the array-based software enabling cooperation
with the host. Host Integration Tools for
Microsoft, VMware, and Linux environments as
well as EqualLogic SAN Headquarters (SAN HQ)
management software are included with your
EqualLogic array purchase. SAN HQ provides an
interface for monitoring your groups of EqualLogic
arrays, and offers a proactive and automated
support process with SupportAssist to help improve
productivity and accuracy while helping you gain
insight and control.
A flash-enabled
EqualLogic SAN can
provide over 267K
IOPS for an OLTP
database workload
with less than five
milliseconds of
latency.2
Features
PS6210E/PS6210XV 3.5”
PS6210XV/PS6210X
PS6210S/PS6210XS
Product configurations
Capacity for your data-hungry applications
High performance for your demanding
enterprise applications
High-performance storage optimized for your
most critical applications
Storage controllers
Dual controllers with 16GB3 non-volatile memory per controller
Network interfaces
10GbE connectivity
Management network: One (1) 100BASE-TX per controller
Interface ports: Two (2) 10GBASE-T with RJ45 or two (2) 10GbE SFP+ for fibre or twin-ax copper cabling
Hard disk drives
PS6210E: Twenty-four (24) 7.2K RPM NL-SAS
hot-pluggable hard disk drives
PS6210XV 3.5”: Twenty-four (24) 15K RPM SAS
hot-pluggable drives
PS6210XV: Twenty-four (24) 15K RPM SAS hotpluggable drives
PS6210X: Twenty-four (24) 10K RPM SAS hotpluggable hard disk drives
PS6210S: Twenty-four (24) hot-pluggable
SSDs
PS6210XS: Seven (7) hot-pluggable SSDs and
seventeen (17) hot-pluggable 10K RPM SAS
Drive capacities
PS6210E: 3.5” 7.2K RPM 2TB3, 3 TB, and 4TB
NL-SAS drives
PS6210XV 3.5”: 3.5” 15K RPM SAS 600GB
drives
PS6210XV: 2.5” 15K RPM 300GB SAS drives
PS6210X: 2.5” 10K RPM 600GB, 900GB, and
1.2TB SAS drives
PS6210S: 2.5” 400GB and 800GB SSDs
PS6210XS: Combines 2.5” 800GB SSDs and
2.5” 1.2TB 10K RPM SAS drives (400GB SSD
and 600GB SAS drives available early 2014)
System capacities
PS6210E: Up to 96TB
PS6210XV 3.5”: Up to 14.4TB
PS6210XV: Up to 7.2TB
PS6210X: Up to 28.8TB
PS6210S: Up to 19.2TB
PS6210XS: Up to 26TB
Self-encrypting drives
(SED)
PS6210E: 96TB using twenty-four (24) 4TB
7.2K RPM NL-SAS SED drives
PS6210XV 3.5”: 14.4TB using twenty-four (24)
600GB 15K RPM 3.5” SAS SED drives
PS6210XV: 7.2TB using twenty-four (24)
300GB 15K RPM SAS SED drives
PS6210X: 21.6TB using twenty-four (24)
900GB 10K RPM SAS SED drives
NA
Technical highlights
Host protocol
Any standards-compliant iSCSI initiator
Operating systems and
hypervisors
Microsoft® Windows Server® including Hyper-V®
VMware® ESX Server
Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® (RHEL)
SUSE® Enterprise Linux® (SLES)
Oracle® Linux
Oracle® Solaris™
IBM® AIX®
RAID
PS6210E: RAID 6, RAID 10 and RAID 50 (for
2TB drives)4
PS6210XV 3.5”: RAID 6, RAID 10 and RAID 504
TCP network support
IPv4, IPv6 core support
Expansion option
Can be combined with other EqualLogic PS Series arrays in the same SAN group, online; maximum of 16 total members per group.
Reliability
Vertical port sharing; redundant hot-swappable controllers, power supplies/cooling fans and hot-swappable disks;
individual disk drive slot power control
Enclosure
monitoring system
Automatic spare configuration and utilization; SMART; Automatic bad block replacement; Auto-Stat Disk Monitoring System (ADMS) to monitor
health of data on disk drives
Management interfaces
Group Manager (GUI and CLI)
SAN Headquarters multi-group performance and event monitoring tool
Virtual Storage Manager vCenter plugin
Serial console
Security
CHAP authentication; Access control lists for iSCSI as well as new Access Control Policies; Access control for management interfaces including
Active Directory, LDAP, or RADIUS support
Notification methods
SAN Headquarters alerting, including Dell SupportAssist, SNMP traps, email and syslog
Physical
PS6210E and PS6210XV 3.5”:
Height: 4U / 175 mm (6.87 inches)
Width: 446 mm (17.57 inches)
Depth: 580 mm (22.83 inches)
Weight: 47.1 kg (103.8 lb)5
Power
PS6210E and PS6210XV 3.5” power supplies: dual 1080W, optional dual 1080W DC-DC
PS6210X, PS6210S, P6210XS and PS6210XV power supplies: dual 700W, optional dual 700W DC-DC
Rack support
ReadyRails™ II static rails for tool-less mounting in 4-post racks with square or unthreaded round holes or tooled mounting in 4-post
threaded-hole racks
Dell support and optional
storage service offerings
Dell ProSupport Plus for critical systems or Dell ProSupport for premium hardware and software support are recommended to provide you the
right support services for your EqualLogic solution.6 Contact your Dell representative today for more information.
HP-UX
Mac OS® X
Citrix® XenServer®
Novell® NetWare®
For a complete list of supported OS versions including software
initiators, NICs/CNAs, and HBAs, please see the EqualLogic
Compatibility Matrix.
RAID 6, RAID 10 and RAID 504
PS6210S: RAID 6, RAID 10 and RAID 504
PS6210XS: Accelerated RAID 6
Ability to configure a separate management network
SNMP, telnet, SSH, HTTP, Web (SSL)
Host scripting, including Windows PowerShell
Multi-administrator support
PS6210X, PS6210S, P6210XS and PS6210XV:
Height: 2U / 87 mm (3.42 inches)
Width: 446 mm (17.57 inches)
Depth: 546 mm (21.50 inches)
Weight: 26.4 kg (58.3 lb)5
Performance may vary depending on the workload and drive type. Based on September 2013 Dell performance testing comparing the PS6210XS and PS6110XS arrays with 4KB block and 70/30
read/write random.
2
Performance may vary depending on the workload and drive type. Based on September 2013 Dell performance testing using eight PS6210XS arrays with Dell PowerEdge™ R620 and R610 servers
and Dell Networking switches, using 70/30 read/write workloads.
3
GB means 1 billion bytes, TB equals 1 trillion bytes and PB equals 1 quadrillion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
4
RAID 5 is also available for non-production data, but is generally not recommended; RAID 50 is similarly not recommended for production data on drives larger than 2TB.
5
Actual unit and packaged weights will vary slightly by drive type and packaging.
6
Availability and terms of Dell Services vary by region. Dell Basic Service is included standard with EqualLogic units. For more information, visit Dell.com/ServiceDescriptions.
1
Global services and support
Reduce IT complexity, lower costs and eliminate inefficiencies by making IT and business solutions work harder for you. You can count on Dell for
end-to-end solutions to maximize your performance and uptime. A proven leader in Servers, Storage and Networking, Dell Enterprise Solutions and
Services deliver innovation at any scale. And if you’re looking to preserve cash or increase operational efficiency, Dell Financial Services has a wide
range of options to make technology acquisition easy and affordable. Contact your Dell Sales Representative for more information.
Learn more at Dell.com/EqualLogic
© 2013 Dell Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Dell_PS6210_Series_Spec_Sheet_102913
BIG-IP System
HARDWARE DATASHEET
Deliver More Applications for More Users
F5® BIG-IP® Application Delivery Controller (ADC) platforms can manage even the
heaviest traffic loads at both layer 4 and layer 7. By merging high-performance switching
fabric, specialized hardware, and advanced software, F5 provides the flexibility to make
in-depth application decisions without introducing bottlenecks.
With the high performance you get from BIG-IP platforms, you can consolidate devices—
saving management costs, electricity, space, and cooling—and still have room to grow.
Key benefits
Consolidate your infrastructure with
purpose-built hardware
Reduce your operating costs
BIG-IP hardware platforms are designed
specifically for application delivery performance
and scalability. One device can be configured
for server load balancing, global data center
load balancing, DNS services, web application
firewall, access management, web performance
optimization, and WAN optimization.
Spend less time on configuration, upgrades,
and maintenance with the simple-to-manage
BIG-IP hardware, featuring out-of-band
management, front-panel management, warm
upgrades, remote boot, and USB support.
Lower power and cooling costs in your data
center with 80 Plus Gold and Platinum certified
high-efficiency power supplies.
Offload application servers
Maximize uptime
BIG-IP platforms feature high-performance
SSL and compression hardware, as well as
advanced connection management, so that
you can remove processing-intensive tasks
from application servers, consolidate devices,
and use these resources more efficiently.
Ensure your critical infrastructure is built
on reliable hardware with hot-swappable
components, redundant power supplies,
redundant fans, compact flash, multi-boot
support, and always-on management.
Appliances can be deployed in traditional
active/standby configuration or horizontal
clusters (active/active) to achieve high
availability and application-level failover.
Secure your network
Instantly add layer 3–7 protection with ICSA
Certified BIG-IP platforms that provide default
deny security, a full packet filter engine that
limits access in a granular way, and an industryleading web application firewall.
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
Intelligent Performance Where It Matters
Performance traditionally has been measured in terms of throughput, but this doesn’t
accurately represent the complex needs of application delivery. Connection capacity and L7
transactions per second are critical for an ADC to support the increasing needs of modern
web applications and infrastructure. For instance, an ADC needs to be able to process high
levels of layer 4 and layer 7 connections and make more decisions at the application layer,
such as inspecting and removing sensitive information or transforming application-specific
payloads. BIG-IP appliances have the intelligence and performance to deliver the maximum
amount of application layer decisions while securing your data and infrastructure.
Simplify Your Network
BIG-IP ADC appliances can help you simplify your network by offloading servers and
consolidating devices, saving management costs as well as power, space, and cooling in
the data center.
With the massive performance and scalability of the BIG-IP platform, you can reduce the
number of Application Delivery Controllers you need to deliver even the most demanding
applications. By offloading computationally intense processes, you can significantly reduce
the number of application servers needed.
BIG-IP hardware includes:
• SSL hardware acceleration—Offload costly SSL processing and accelerate key exchange
and bulk encryption with best-in-market SSL performance.
• Hardware compression*—Cost-effectively offload traffic compression processing from
your servers to improve page load times and reduce bandwidth utilization.
• OneConnect™ connection pooling—Aggregate millions of TCP requests into hundreds
of server-side connections. Increase server capacity and ensure requests are handled
efficiently.
• Embedded Packet Velocity Acceleration (ePVA)*—Provide specific application delivery
optimizations, support for low latency and tunneling protocols, and denial-of-service (DoS)
protection. ePVA uses field-programmable gate array (FPGA) technology tightly integrated
with TMOS and software to deliver:
2
•
High performance interconnect between Ethernet ports and processors.
•
L4 offload, enabling leading throughput and reduced load on software.
•
Hardware-accelerated SYN flood protection.
•
More than 65 types of DoS attacks detected and mitigated in hardware.
•
Native Financial Information eXchange (FIX) support for message routing and tag
substitution while maintaining low latency requirements.
*Available on select BIG-IP platforms
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
The Advantages of F5 BIG-IP Technology
Unique architecture and patented hardware and software innovations from F5 offer
unmatched capabilities, including:
F5 ScaleN architecture
ScaleN™ enables you to scale performance on demand, virtualize, or horizontally cluster
multiple BIG-IP devices, creating an elastic Application Delivery Networking infrastructure
that can efficiently adapt as your business needs change.
• On-demand scaling—Increase capacity and performance with on-demand scaling,
where you can simply add more power to your existing infrastructure instead of adding
more devices. The latest BIG-IP appliance models can be upgraded to the higher
performance model within each series through on-demand software licensing. Ondemand licensing enables organizations to right-size application delivery services and
support growth without requiring new hardware.
• Operational scaling—F5 can virtualize ADC services with a multi-tenant architecture that
supports a variety of BIG-IP versions and product modules on a single device. Multitenant device virtualization is provided by F5’s unique Virtual Clustered Multiprocessing™
(vCMP) technology, which enables select hardware platforms to run multiple BIG-IP guest
instances. Each BIG-IP guest instance looks and acts like a physical BIG-IP device, with a
dedicated allocation of CPU, memory, and other resources.
You can further divide each vCMP guest using multi-tenant features such as partitions
and route domains, which can isolate configuration and networks on a per-virtual-domain
basis. Within each virtual domain, you can further isolate and secure configuration and
policies by using a role-based access system for greater administrative control. When
combining both route domains/partitions with vCMP guests, F5 provides the highest
density multi-tenant virtualization solution that can scale to thousands of virtual ADC
(vADC) instances.
This ability to virtualize BIG-IP ADC services means service providers and enterprise users
can isolate based on BIG-IP version, enabling departmental or project-based tenancy as
well as performance guarantees, while benefiting from managing a single, consolidated
application delivery platform and increased utilization.
• Application scaling—Increase capacity by adding BIG-IP resources through an all-active
approach. With application scaling, you can scale beyond the traditional device pair to
eliminate the need for idle and costly standby resources. Application scaling achieves
this through two forms of horizontal scale: Application Service Clustering, which focuses
on application scalability and high availability, and Device Service Clustering, designed
to efficiently and seamlessly scale BIG-IP application delivery services.
Application Service Clustering delivers sub-second failover and comprehensive
connection mirroring for a highly available cluster of up to eight devices at the application
layer, providing highly available multi-tenant deployments. Workloads can be moved
across a cluster of devices or virtual instances without interrupting other services and
can be scaled to meet the business demand.
Device Service Clustering can synchronize full device configurations in an all-active
deployment model, enabling consistent policy deployment and enforcement across
devices—up to 32 active nodes. This ensures a consistent device configuration that
simplifies operations.
3
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
F5 TMOS platform
At the heart of BIG-IP appliances is TMOS®, the F5 operating system that provides a unified
system for optimal application delivery, giving you total visibility, flexibility, and control across
all services. With TMOS, you can intelligently adapt to the diverse and evolving requirements
of applications and networks.
F5 SYN Check
F5 uses a collaborative software SYN cache and hardware SYN cookie approach to protect
against large scale SYN flood DDoS attacks. SYN flood mitigation is available on all TMOS
platforms in software. Select hardware platforms (5000, 7000, 10000, and 12000 series
appliances and VIPRION blades) utilize the embedded Packet Velocity Acceleration (ePVA)
field-programmable gate array (FPGA) to provide significantly improved performance (up
to 80 million SYN cookies per second on the BIG-IP 10200v appliance). When a SYN flood
is detected, the ePVA turns on the SYN Check™ feature to prevent invalid sessions from
getting to the servers or exhausting the BIG-IP device resources. SYN Check is unique in
that it can be applied on a per-virtual-IP/application basis, meaning if one application is under
attack, the others are not affected. F5 is the only ADC that implements hardware-based SYN
cookies in L4 and full proxy L7 mode.
Next-Generation ADC Appliances
With the introduction of the new BIG-IP 2000, 4000, 5000, 7000, 10000, and 12000 series
appliances, F5 continues to invest and innovate in hardware development to ensure that
even the most demanding web applications are available, secure, and fast. The new BIG-IP
hardware offers industry-leading performance in application decisions per second,
SSL processing, and hardware compression for each class of ADC. Enterprises and
service providers can deploy multiple application delivery services, offload SSL processing,
and efficiently consolidate on a single, unified platform. In addition, with the capability to
upgrade from a base appliance to a higher capacity model in that series through a software
license, F5 provides on-demand flexibility to match changing business needs.
4
5
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
?
Specifications
12250v
11050
Intelligent Traffic
Processing:
L7 RPS: 4M
L4 CPS: 1.5M
L4 HTTP RPS: 14M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 80M
Throughput: 84 Gbps/40 Gbps L4/L7
L7 requests per second: 2.5M
L4 connections per second: 1M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 24M
Throughput: 42 Gbps/40 Gbps L4/L7
Hardware SSL:
Included: 240K TPS (2K keys)
Maximum: 240K TPS (2K keys)
40 Gbps bulk encryption*
Included: 500 TPS
Maximum: 20,000 TPS (2K keys)
15 Gbps bulk encryption*
FIPS SSL:
N/A
FIPS 140-2 Level 2 (option)
9,000 TPS (2K keys)
15 Gbps bulk encryption*
Hardware DDoS Protection:
80 M SYN-Cookies Per Second
N/A
Hardware Compression:
Included: 40 Gbps, Maximum: 40 Gbps
N/A
Software Compression:
N/A
Included: 50 Mbps
Maximum: 12 Gbps
Software Architecture:
64-bit TMOS
64-bit TMOS
On-Demand Upgradable:
N/A
N/A
Virtualization (Maximum
Number of vCMP Guests):
24
N/A
Processor:
One twelve core Intel Xeon processor
(total 24 hyperthreaded logical processor cores)
Dual CPU, hex core (12 processing cores)
Memory:
128 GB
32 GB
Hard Drive:
800 GB SSD
Two 600 GB drives, 10,000 RPM (RAID 1)
Gigabit Ethernet CU Ports:
Optional SFP
Optional SFP
Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP):
Optional SFP (SX or LX)
Optional SFP (SX or LX)
10 Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP+):
16 SR or LR (sold separately, 2 SR included);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
10 SR or LR (sold separately, 2 SR included);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
40 Gigabit Fiber Ports (QSFP+):
2 SR4 (sold separately) (QSFP+ optical breakout cable
assemblies available to convert to 10 gigabit ports)
Note: Only optics provided by F5 are supported.
N/A
Power Supply:
Dual 850W included (80+ Platinum efficiency), DC option
Dual 850W included, DC optional
Typical Consumption:
330W (dual supply, 110V input)**
440W (dual A/C power - 110V input)
Input Voltage:
90–240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
90–240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60 hz
Typical Heat Output:
1125 BTU/hour (dual supply, 110V input)**
1501 BTU/hour (110V input)
Dimensions:
3.45” (8.76 cm) H x 17.3” (43.94 cm) W x 21.4” (54.36 cm) D
2U industry standard rack-mount chassis
5.2” (13.2 cm) H x 17.4” (44.2 cm) W x 21.4” (54.36 cm) D
3U industry standard rack-mount chassis
Weight:
43 lbs. (19.5 kg) (Dual power supply)
52 lbs. (23.6 kg) (dual power supply)
Operating Temperature:
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
Operational Relative Humidity:
10 to 90% @ 40º C
5 to 85% at 40° C
Safety Agency Approval:
UL 60950-1 2nd Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07
EN 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
IEC 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
Evaluated to all CB Countries
UL 60950-1:2001, 1st Edition
CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
IEC 60950-1: 2005, 2nd Edition
EN 60950-1: 2005, 2nd Edition
Certifications/
Susceptibility Standards:
EEN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10)
EN 55022:2006 + A1:2007
EN 61000-3-2:2006
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2000 + A2:2005
EN 55024: 2010
USA FCC Class A
EN 55022:2006 + C1:2006
EN 55024:1998 + A1: 2001 + A2:2003
FCC Part 15B Class A
VCCI Class A
NEBS compliant (option)
*Maximum throughput.
**Please refer to the Platform Guide: 12000 Series for the latest power ratings for your specific configurations (SSL, highline input voltage, DC, etc.)
Note: Performance-related numbers are based on local traffic management services only.
6
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
Specifications
11000
10350v-N
Intelligent Traffic
Processing:
L7 requests per second: 2.5M
L4 connections per second: 1M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 30M
Throughput: 24 Gbps L4/L7
L7 RPS: 3M
L4 CPS: 1.2M
L4 HTTP RPS: 14M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 80M
Throughput: 84 Gbps/40 Gbps L4/L7
Hardware SSL:
Included: 500 TPS
Maximum: 20,000 TPS (2K keys)
15 Gbps bulk encryption*
Included: 42K TPS (2K keys)
Maximum: 42K TPS (2K keys)
24 Gbps bulk encryption
FIPS SSL:
FIPS 140-2 Level 2 (option)
9,000 TPS (2K keys)
15 Gbps bulk encryption*
N/A
Hardware DDoS Protection:
N/A
80 M SYN-Cookies Per Second
Hardware Compression:
Included: 50 Mbps
Maximum: 16 Gbps
Included: 24 Gbps
Maximum: 24 Gbps
Software Compression:
N/A
N/A
Software Architecture:
64-bit TMOS
64-bit TMOS
On-Demand Upgradable:
N/A
N/A
Virtualization (Maximum
Number of vCMP Guests):
N/A
20
Processor:
Dual CPU, hex core (12 processing cores)
One ten core Intel Xeon processor
(total 20 hyperthreaded logical processor cores
Memory:
48 GB
128 GB
Hard Drive:
Two 600 GB drives, 10,000 RPM (RAID 1)
800 GB SSD
Gigabit Ethernet CU Ports:
Optional SFP
Optional SFP
Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP):
Optional SFP (SX or LX)
Optional SFP (SX or LX)
10 Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP+):
10 SR or LR (sold separately, 2 SR included);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
16 SR or LR (sold separately, 2 SR included);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
40 Gigabit Fiber Ports (QSFP+):
N/A
2 SR4 (sold separately) (QSFP+ optical breakout cable
assemblies available to convert to 10 gigabit ports)
Note: Only optics provided by F5 are supported.
Power Supply:
Dual 850W included, DC optional
Dual 850W included (80+ Platinum efficiency), DC-only.
Typical Consumption:
440W (dual A/C power - 110V input)
320W (dual supply, 48VDC input)**
Input Voltage:
90–240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60 hz
Operating range: 44 to 72 VDC
Minimum start up voltage: 44 VDC
Typical Heat Output:
1501 BTU/hour (110V input)
1092 BTU/hour (dual supply, 48V input)**
Dimensions:
5.2” (13.2 cm) H x 17.4” (44.2 cm) W x 21.4” (54.36 cm) D
3U industry standard rack-mount chassis
3.45“ (8.76 cm) H x 17.3” (43.94 cm) W x 21.4” (54.36 cm) D
2U industry standard rack-mount chassis
Weight:
52 lbs. (23.6 kg) (dual power supply)
43 lbs. (19.5 kg) (Dual power supply)
Operating Temperature:
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
Operational Relative Humidity:
5 to 85% at 40° C
10 to 90% @ 40º C
Safety Agency Approval:
UL 60950-1:2001, 1st Edition
CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
IEC 60950-1: 2005, 2nd Edition
EN 60950-1: 2005, 2nd Edition
UL 60950-1 2nd Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07
EN 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
IEC 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
Evaluated to all CB Countries
Certifications/
Susceptibility Standards:
EN 55022:2006 + C1:2006
EN 55024:1998 + A1: 2001 + A2:2003
FCC Part 15B Class A
VCCI Class A
EEN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10)
EN 55022:2006 + A1:2007
EN 61000-3-2:2006
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2000 + A2:2005
EN 55024: 2010
USA FCC Class A
*Maximum throughput.
**Please refer to the Platform Guide: 10000 Series for the latest power ratings for your specific configurations (SSL, SSD, highline input voltage, DC, etc.)
Note: Performance-related numbers are based on local traffic management services only.
7
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
Specifications
10250v/10200v-SSL
10050s/10000s
Intelligent Traffic
Processing:
L7 requests per second: 2M
L4 connections per second: 1M
L4 HTTP requests per second: 14M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 36M
Throughput: 80 Gbps/40 Gbps L4/L7
L7 requests per second: 1M
L4 connections per second: 500K
L4 HTTP requests per second: 7M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 36M
Throughput: 80 Gbps/40 Gbps L4/L7
Hardware SSL:
Included: 42,000 TPS (2K keys)
Max for 10200v: 42,000 TPS (2K keys)
Max for 10200v-SSL: 75,000 TPS (2K keys)
22 Gbps bulk encryption* for 10200v
33 Gbps bulk encryption* for 10200v-SSL
Included: 21,000 TPS (2K keys)
Maximum: 21,000 TPS (2K keys)
22 Gbps bulk encryption*
FIPS SSL:
FIPS 140-2 Level 2 (10200v option)***
9,000 TPS (2K keys), 22 Gbps bulk encryption*
N/A
Hardware DDoS Protection:
80M SYN cookies per second
40M SYN cookies per second
Hardware Compression:
Included: 24 Gbps , Maximum: 24 Gbps
N/A
Software Compression:
N/A
Included: 12 Gbps
Maximum: 12 Gbps
Software Architecture:
64-bit TMOS
64-bit TMOS
On-Demand Upgradable:
N/A
Yes
Virtualization (Maximum
Number of vCMP Guests):
12 (10250v), 6 (10200v)
N/A
Processor:
Intel hex core (total 12 hyperthreaded logical
processor cores)
Intel hex core (total 12 hyperthreaded logical
processor cores)
Memory:
48 GB
48 GB
Hard Drive:
Two 1 TB drives (RAID 1) (10200v)
400 GB solid state drive (10250v)
Two 1 TB drives (RAID 1) (10000s)
400 GB solid state drive (10050s)
Gigabit Ethernet CU Ports:
Optional SFP
Optional SFP
Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP):
Optional SFP (SX or LX)
Optional SFP (SX or LX)
10 Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP+):
16 SR or LR (sold separately, 2 SR included);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
16 SR or LR (sold separately, 2 SR included);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
40 Gigabit Fiber Ports (QSFP+):
2 SR4 (sold separately) (QSFP+ optical breakout cable
assemblies available to convert to 10 gigabit ports)
Note: Only optics provided by F5 are supported.
2 SR4 (sold separately) (QSFP+ optical breakout cable
assemblies available to convert to 10 gigabit ports)
Note: Only optics provided by F5 are supported.
Power Supply:
Dual 850W included (80+ Platinum efficiency), DC optional
Dual 850W included (80 Plus Platinum efficiency), DC optional
Typical Consumption:
320W (dual supply, 110V input)**
320W (dual supply, 110V input)**
Input Voltage:
90–240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
90–240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
Typical Heat Output:
1090 BTU/hour (dual supply, 110V input)**
1090 BTU/hour (dual supply, 110V input)**
Dimensions:
3.45” (8.76 cm) H x 17.3” (43.94 cm) W x 21.4” (54.36 cm) D
2U industry standard rack-mount chassis
3.45” (8.76 cm) H x 17.3” (43.94 cm) W x 21.4” (54.36 cm) D
2U industry standard rack-mount chassis
Weight:
43 lbs. (19.5 kg) (dual power supply)
43 lbs. (19.5 kg) (dual power supply)
Operating Temperature:
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
Operational Relative Humidity:
5 to 85% at 40° C
5 to 85% at 40° C
Safety Agency Approval:
UL 60950-1 2nd Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07
EN 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
IEC 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
Evaluated to all CB Countries
UL 60950-1 2nd Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07
EN 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
IEC 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
Evaluated to all CB Countries
Certifications/
Susceptibility Standards:
EEN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10); EN 55022:2006 + A1:2007
EN 61000-3-2:2006; EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2000 + A2:2005
EN 55024: 2010; USA FCC Class A
EEN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10); EN 55022:2006 + A1:2007
EN 61000-3-2:2006; EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2000 + A2:2005
EN 55024: 2010; USA FCC Class A
*Maximum throughput.
**Please refer to the Platform Guide: 10000 Series for the latest power ratings for your specific configurations (SSL, SSD, highline input voltage, DC, etc.)
*** vCMP guest access to FIPS resources not supported.
Note: Performance-related numbers are based on local traffic management services only.
8
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
Specifications
7250v/7200v-SSL
7050s/7000s
Intelligent Traffic
Processing:
L7 requests per second: 1.6M
L4 connections per second: 775K
L4 HTTP requests per second: 7M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 24M
Throughput: 40 Gbps/20 Gbps L4/L7
L7 requests per second: 800K
L4 connections per second: 390K
L4 HTTP requests per second: 3.5M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 24M
Throughput: 40 Gbps/20 Gbps L4/L7
Hardware SSL:
Included: 25,000 TPS (2K keys)
Maximum for 7200v: 25,000 TPS (2K keys)
Maximum for 7200v-SSL: 60,000 TPS (2K keys)
18 Gbps bulk encryption for 7200v
19 Gbps bulk encryption* for 7200v-SSL
Included: 15,000 TPS (2K keys)
Maximum: 15,000 TPS (2K keys)
18 Gbps bulk encryption*
FIPS SSL:
FIPS 140-2 Level 2 (7200v option)***
9,000 TPS (2K keys); 18 Gbps bulk encryption*
N/A
Hardware DDoS Protection:
40M SYN cookies per second
20M SYN cookies per second
Hardware Compression:
Included: 18 Gbps, Maximum: 18 Gbps
N/A
Software Compression:
N/A
Included: 9 Gbps, Maximum: 9 Gbps
Software Architecture:
64-bit TMOS
64-bit TMOS
On-Demand Upgradable:
N/A
Yes
Virtualization (Maximum Number
of vCMP Guests):
8 (7250v), 4 (7200v)
N/A
Processor:
1 quad core Intel Xeon processor (total 8 hyperthreaded
logical processing cores)
1 quad core Intel Xeon processor (total 8 hyperthreaded
logical processing cores)
Memory:
32 GB
32 GB
Hard Drive:
Two 1TB (RAID 1) (7200v)
400 GB solid state drive (7250v)
Two 1TB (RAID 1) (7000s)
400 GB solid state drive (7050s)
Gigabit Ethernet CU Ports:
4
4
Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP):
Optional SFP (SX, LX, or copper)
Optional SFP (SX, LX, or copper)
10 Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP+):
8 SR or LR (sold separately, 2 SR included);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
8 SR or LR (sold separately, 2 SR included);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
40 Gigabit Fiber Ports (QSFP+):
N/A
N/A
Power Supply:
Two 400 W included (80 Plus Gold Efficiency), DC optional
Two 400 W included (80 Plus Gold Efficiency), DC optional
Typical Consumption:
205W (dual supply, 110V input)**
205W (dual supply, 110V input)**
Input Voltage:
90-240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
90-240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
Typical Heat Output:
700 BTU/hour (dual supply, 110V input)**
700 BTU/hour (dual supply, 110V input)**
Dimensions:
3.45” (8.76 cm) H x 17.3” (43.94 cm) W x 21.4” (54.36 cm) D
2U industry standard rack-mount chassis
3.45” (8.76 cm) H x 17.3” (43.94 cm) W x 21.4” (54.36 cm) D
2U industry standard rack-mount chassis
Weight:
43 lbs. (19.5 kg) (dual power supply)
43 lbs. (19.5 kg) (dual power supply)
Operating Temperature:
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
Operational Relative Humidity:
5 to 85% @ 40° C
5 to 85% @ 40° C
Safety Agency Approval:
ANSI/UL 60950-1-2011
CSA 60950-1-07, including Amendment 1:2011
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
CB Scheme
EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011
IEC 60950-1:2005, A1:2009
ANSI/UL 60950-1-2011
CSA 60950-1-07, including Amendment 1:2011
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
CB Scheme
EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011
IEC 60950-1:2005, A1:2009
Certifications/
Susceptibility Standards:
EN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10); EN 55022:2010
EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1:2009+A2:2009; EN 61000-3-3:2008
EN 55024:2010; EN 55022:2010; EN 61000-3-3:2008
EN 55024:2010; USA FCC Class A
EN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10); EN 55022:2010
EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1:2009+A2:2009; EN 61000-3-3:2008
EN 55024:2010; EN 55022:2010; EN 61000-3-3:2008
EN 55024:2010; USA FCC Class A
*Maximum throughput.
**Please refer to the Platform Guide: 7000 Series for the latest power ratings for your specific configurations (SSL, SSD, highline input voltage, DC, etc.).
*** vCMP guest access to FIPS resources not supported.
Note: Performance-related numbers are based on local traffic management services only.
9
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
Specifications
5250v/5200v
5050s/5000s
Intelligent Traffic
Processing:
L7 requests per second: 1.5M
L4 connections per second: 700K
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 24M
L4 HTTP requests per second: 7M
Throughput: 30 Gbps/15 Gbps L4/L7
L7 requests per second: 750K
L4 connections per second: 350K
L4 HTTP requests per second: 3.5M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 24M
Throughput: 30 Gbps/15 Gbps L4/L7
Hardware SSL:
Included: 21,000 TPS (2K keys)
Maximum: 21,000 TPS (2K keys)
12 Gbps bulk encryption*
Included: 10,000 TPS (2K keys)
Maximum: 10,000 TPS (2K keys)
12 Gbps bulk encryption*
FIPS SSL:
FIPS 140-2 Level 2 (5250v option)***
5,000 TPS (2K keys); 12 Gbps bulk encryption*
N/A
Hardware DDoS Protection:
40M SYN cookies per second
20M SYN cookies per second
Hardware Compression:
Included: 12 Gbps, Maximum: 12 Gbps
N/A
Software Compression:
N/A
Included: 6 Gbps
Maximum: 6 Gbps
Software Architecture:
64-bit TMOS
64-bit TMOS
On-Demand Upgradable:
N/A
Yes
Virtualization (Maximum Number
of vCMP Guests)
8 (5250v), 4 (5200v)
N/A
Processor:
1 quad core Intel Xeon processor (total 8 hyperthreaded
logical processing cores)
1 quad core Intel Xeon processor
(total 8 hyperthreaded logical processing cores)
Memory:
32 GB
32 GB
Hard Drive:
1 TB (5200v); 400 GB solid state drive (5250v)
1 TB (5000s)
400 GB solid state drive (5050s)
Gigabit Ethernet CU Ports:
4
4
Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP):
Optional SFP (SX, LX, or copper)
Optional SFP (SX, LX, or copper)
10 Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP+):
8 SR or LR (sold separately);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
8 SR or LR (sold separately);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
40 Gigabit Fiber Ports (QSFP+):
N/A
N/A
Power Supply:
One 400 W included (80 Plus Gold Efficiency),
dual power and DC options
One 400 W included (80 Plus Gold Efficiency),
dual power and DC options
Typical Consumption:
165W (single supply, 110V input)**
165W (single supply, 110V input)**
Input Voltage:
90-240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
90-240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
Typical Heat Output:
564 BTU/hour (single supply, 110V input)**
564 BTU/hour (single supply, 110V input)**
Dimensions:
1.75” (4.45 cm) H x 17” (43.18 cm) W x 21” (53.34 cm) D
1U industry standard rack-mount chassis
1.75” (4.45 cm) H x 17” (43.18 cm) W x 21” (53.34 cm) D
1U industry standard rack-mount chassis
Weight:
21 lbs. (9.53 kg) (one power supply)
21 lbs. (9.53 kg) (one power supply)
Operating Temperature:
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
Operational Relative Humidity:
5 to 85% at 40° C
5 to 85% at 40° C
Safety Agency Approval:
ANSI/UL 60950-1-2011
CSA 60950-1-07, including Amendment 1:2011
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
CB Scheme
EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011
IEC 60950-1:2005, A1:2009
ANSI/UL 60950-1-2011
CSA 60950-1-07, including Amendment 1:2011
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
CB Scheme
EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011
IEC 60950-1:2005, A1:200
Certifications/
Susceptibility Standards:
EN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10); EN 55022:2010
EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1:2009+A2:2009; EN 61000-3-3:2008
EN 55024:2010; EN 55022:2010; EN 61000-3-3:2008
EN 55024:2010; USA FCC Class A
EN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10); EN 55022:2010
EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1:2009+A2:2009; EN 61000-3-3:2008
EN 55024:2010; EN 55022:2010; EN 61000-3-3:2008
EN 55024:2010; USA FCC Class A
*Maximum throughput.
**Please refer to the Platform Guide: 5000 Series for the latest power ratings for your specific configurations (dual power supplies, SSD, highline input voltage, DC, etc.).
*** vCMP guest access to FIPS resources not supported.
Note: Performance-related numbers are based on local traffic management services only.
10
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
Specifications
4200v
4000s
Intelligent Traffic
Processing:
L7 requests per second: 850K
L4 connections per second: 300K
L4 HTTP requests per second: 2.5M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 10M
Throughput: 10 Gbps L4/L7
L7 requests per second: 425K
L4 connections per second: 150K
L4 HTTP requests per second: 1.25M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 10M
Throughput: 10 Gbps L4/L7
Hardware SSL:
Included: 9,000 TPS (2K keys)
Maximum: 9,000 TPS (2K keys)
8 Gbps bulk encryption*
Included: 4,500 TPS (2K keys)
Maximum: 4,500 TPS (2K keys)
8 Gbps bulk encryption*
FIPS SSL:
N/A
N/A
Hardware DDoS Protection:
N/A
N/A
Hardware Compression:
Included: 8 Gbps
Maximum: 8 Gbps
N/A
Software Compression:
N/A
Included: 4 Gbps
Maximum: 4 Gbps
Software Architecture:
64-bit TMOS
64-bit TMOS
On-Demand Upgradable:
N/A
Yes
Processor:
1 quad core Intel Xeon processor
(total 8 hyperthreaded logical processing cores)
1 quad core Intel Xeon processor (total 8 hyperthreaded
logical processing cores)
Memory:
16 GB
16 GB
Hard Drive:
500 GB
500 GB
Gigabit Ethernet CU Ports:
8
8
Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP):
Optional SFP (SX, LX, or copper)
Optional SFP (SX, LX, or copper)
10 Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP+):
2 SR or LR (sold separately);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
2 SR or LR (sold separately);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
40 Gigabit Fiber Ports (QSFP+):
N/A
N/A
Power Supply:
One 400W included (80 Plus Platinum efficiency),
dual power and DC options
One 400W included (80 Plus Platinum efficiency),
dual power and DC options
Typical Consumption:
95W (single supply, 110V input)**
95W (single supply, 110V input)**
Input Voltage:
90-240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
90-240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
Typical Heat Output:
324 BTU/hour (single supply, 110V input)**
324 BTU/hour (single supply, 110V input)**
Dimensions:
1.75” (4.45 cm) H x 17” (43.18 cm) W x 21” (53.34 cm) D
1U industry standard rack-mount chassis
1.75” (4.45 cm) H x 17” (43.18 cm) W x 21” (53.34 cm) D
1U industry standard rack-mount chassis
Weight:
20 lbs. (9.1 kg) (one power supply)
20 lbs. (9.1 kg) (one power supply)
Operating Temperature:
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
Operational Relative Humidity:
5 to 85% at 40º C
5 to 85% at 40º C
Safety Agency Approval:
UL 60950-1 2nd Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07
EN 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
IEC 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
Evaluated to all CB Countries
EN 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
IEC 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
Evaluated to all CB Countries
UL 60950-1 2nd Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07
EN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10); EN 55022:2006 + A1:2007
EN 61000-3-2:2006; EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2000 + A2:2005
EN 55024:2010; USA-FCC Class A
EN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10)
EN 55022:2006 + A1:2007
EN 61000-3-2:2006
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2000 + A2:2005
EN 55024: 2010
USA FCC Class A
Certifications/
Susceptibility Standards:
*Maximum throughput.
**Please refer to the Platform Guide: 4000 Series for the latest power ratings for your specific configurations (dual power supplies, highline input voltage, DC, etc.).
Note: Performance-related numbers are based on local traffic management services only.
11
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
Specifications
2200s
2000s
Intelligent Traffic
Processing:
L7 requests per second: 425K
L4 connections per second: 150K
L4 HTTP requests per second: 1.1M
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 5M
Throughput: 5 Gbps L4/L7
L7 requests per second: 212K
L4 connections per second: 75K
L4 HTTP requests per second: 550K
Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 5M
Throughput: 5 Gbps L4/L7
Hardware SSL:
Included: 4,000 TPS (2K keys)
Maximum: 4,000 TPS (2K keys)
4 Gbps bulk encryption*
Included: 2,000 TPS (2K keys)
Maximum: 2,000 TPS (2K keys)
4 Gbps bulk encryption*
FIPS SSL:
N/A
N/A
Hardware DDoS Protection:
N/A
N/A
Hardware Compression:
Included: 4 Gbps
Maximum: 4 Gbps
N/A
Software Compression:
N/A
Included: 2.5 Gbps
Maximum: 2.5 Gbps
Software Architecture:
64-bit TMOS
64-bit TMOS
On-Demand Upgradable:
N/A
Yes
Processor:
Intel dual core (total 4 hyperthreaded logical processing cores)
Intel dual core (total 4 hyperthreaded logical
processing cores)
Memory:
8 GB
8 GB
Hard Drive:
500 GB
500 GB
Gigabit Ethernet CU Ports:
8
8
Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP):
Optional SFP (SX, LX, or copper)
Optional SFP (SX, LX, or copper)
10 Gigabit Fiber Ports (SFP+):
2 SR or LR (sold separately);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
2 SR or LR (sold separately);
Optional 10G copper direct attach
40 Gigabit Fiber Ports (QSFP+):
N/A
N/A
Power Supply:
One 400W included (80+ Platinum efficiency),
dual power and DC options
One 400W included (80+ Platinum efficiency),
dual power and DC options
Typical Consumption:
74W (single supply, 110V input)**
74W (single supply, 110V input)**
Input Voltage:
90–240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
90–240 VAC +/- 10% auto switching, 50/60hz
Typical Heat Output:
252 BTU/hour (single supply, 110V input)**
252 BTU/hour (single supply, 110V input)**
Dimensions:
1.75” (4.45 cm) H x 17” (43.18 cm) W x 21” (53.34 cm) D
1U industry standard rack-mount chassis
1.75” (4.45 cm) H x 17” (43.18 cm) W x 21” (53.34 cm) D
1U industry standard rack-mount chassis
Weight:
20 lbs. (9.1 kg) (one power supply)
20 lbs. (9.1 kg) (one power supply)
Operating Temperature:
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
Operational Relative Humidity:
5 to 85% at 40° C
5 to 85% at 40° C
Safety Agency Approval:
UL 60950-1 2nd Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07
EN 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
IEC 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
Evaluated to all CB Countries
UL 60950-1 2nd Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07
EN 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
IEC 60950-1:2006, 2nd Edition
Evaluated to all CB Countries
Certifications/
Susceptibility Standards:
EN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10)
EN 55022:2006 + A1:2007
EN 61000-3-2:2006
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2000 + A2:2005
EN 55024: 2010
USA FCC Class A
EN 300 386 V1.5.1 (2010-10)
EN 55022:2006 + A1:2007
EN 61000-3-2:2006
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2000 + A2:2005
EN 55024: 2010
USA FCC Class A
*Maximum throughput.
**Please refer to the Platform Guide: 2000 Series for the latest power ratings for your specific configurations (dual power supplies, highline input voltage, DC, etc.)
Note: Performance-related numbers are based on local traffic management services only.
12
HARDWARE DATASHEET
BIG-IP System
Simplified Licensing
Meeting your applications’ needs in a dynamic environment has never been easier.
F5’s Good, Better, Best provides you with the flexibility to provision advanced modules
on-demand, at the best value.
• Discover the right F5 solutions for your application environment.
• Provision the modules needed to run your applications with F5’s Good, Better, Best
offerings.
• Implement complete application flexibility with the ability to deploy your modules on a
virtual or physical platform.
F5 Global Services
F5 Global Services offers world-class support, training, and consulting to help you get
the most from your F5 investment. Whether it’s providing fast answers to questions,
training internal teams, or handling entire implementations from design to deployment,
F5 Global Services can help ensure your applications are always secure, fast, and reliable.
For more information about F5 Global Services, contact [email protected] or visit
f5.com/services.
More Information
To learn more about BIG-IP, visit f5.com to find these and other resources:
Datasheets
BIG-IP Local Traffic Manager
BIG-IP Global Traffic Manager
BIG-IP Advanced Firewall Manager
BIG-IP Application Security Manager
BIG-IP Access Policy Manager
BIG-IP Application Acceleration Manager
BIG-IP Carrier-Grade NAT
BIG-IP Policy Enforcement Manager
Report
F5 Comparative Performance Report ADC 2013
White papers
ScaleN: Elastic Infrastructure
BIG-IP Application Delivery Hardware: A Critical Component
Clustered Multiprocessing: Changing the Rules of the Performance Game
Virtual Clustered Multiprocessing (vCMP)
F5 Networks, Inc. 401 Elliott Avenue West, Seattle, WA 98119
Americas
[email protected]
Asia-Pacific
[email protected]
888-882-4447
Europe/Middle East/Africa
[email protected]
www.f5.com
Japan
[email protected]
©2014 F5 Networks, Inc. All rights reserved. F5, F5 Networks, and the F5 logo are trademarks of F5 Networks, Inc. in the U.S. and in certain other countries. Other F5 trademarks are identified at f5.com.
Any other products, services, or company names referenced herein may be trademarks of their respective owners with no endorsement or affiliation, express or implied, claimed by F5. DC0314 | DS-BIG-IP-HW-32551 1114
6/30/14
Re: Barrow, Alaska
Thank you for allowing Stowers Industrial Power to offer the following equipment and services.
Below is a BUDGETARY QUOTE for a propane fueled, 175kW generator, a diesel fueled, 175kW generator and
associated packaging and transferring gear. Please note that the harsh conditions make the enclosures considerably
more expensive than just getting a factory package. See below the pricing for details:
OPTION #1
One Olympian G175LG4, natural gas fueled generator as described below. This price is f.o.b. Wisconsin and
does not include start up services…………………………………………………………………………………...$133,450.00
-Approximate enclosure size is 88” high x 260” long x 74” wide
-Approximate weight of the generator and enclosure is 13,500 lbs
OPTION #2
One Caterpillar C6.6, 175kW diesel fueled generator as described below. This price is f.o.b. Wisconsin and does
not include start up services…………………………………………………………………………………………,,$156,100.00
-Approximate enclosure and fuel tank size is112” high x 360” long x 120” wide
-Note that this enclosure houses the generator and the gear that is detailed in Option #3
-Approximate weight of the generator, enclosure, fuel tank, and gear is 23,000 lbs
OPTION #3
ASCO transfer gear. In the instance of a power outage, this gear would start both generators and close the first
one that reaches speed and frequency to the buss. After the gas generator reaches speed and frequency, it will
be chosen as the primary generator and the diesel generator will go into cool down mode. This price is f.o.b.
Wisconsin and does not include start up services………………………………………………………………..$113,955.00
-Approximate size is 92” high x 54” deep x 96” wide. This unit will be installed and wired inside of the Option #2
package.
-Weight is included in option #2
OPTION #1
Olympian G175LG4 with the following:
UL2200 LISTING
UL2200 Listed
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
UL Mainline Circuit Breaker
CONTROL PANELS
Digital H-Series Control Panel (NFPA 110 Compliant)
High Coolant Temperature Shutdown
Low Oil Pressure Shutdown
Low Coolant Level Automatic Shutdown
Over Speed Automatic Shutdown
Crank Timer
Exercise Timer
Watertight Electrical Connectors
Quiet Test for Low Noise Level Exercise
Isochronous Governor (Internal)
Digital Voltage Regulator (Internal)
COOLING SYSTEM
Cool Flow Radiator
Closed Coolant Recovery System
Fan & Belt Guards
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Critical Muffler
INSTRUMENTATION
Block Heater
MOUNTING SYSTEM
Flexible Fuel Line(s)
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEM
10amp Battery Charger
Battery, Cables and Rack
Battery Charge Alternator
1
ALTERNATOR SYSTEM
Permanent magnet excitation
Cool Flow Radiator
Closed Coolant Recovery System
Fan & Belt Guards
HEATING
Battery heater
Block heater
Anti-condensation heater
Two 5kW space heaters in the enclosure
Radiator warm air recirculation system
ENCLOSURE
Weatherproof enclosure
Roxul 8lb acoustic/thermal insulation
Front discharge air plenum
Rear air intake plenum
Critical grade internal mounted silencer and exhaust
4 incandescent vapor tight lights w/ 100 watt bulbs and guards
2 GFI outlets
Motorized air intake louvers (spring open/motor closed) 120vac
Wire block heater and battery charger to load center
Motorized air discharge louvers (Spring open/motor closed) 120 vac
120 mph wind resistant enclosure
Snow hood for air discharge section of enclosure with motorized louvers.
GENERAL WARRANTY
24 months limited to 500 hours/year for a standby operation
TESTING AND START UP SERVICES
Testing is not included in this quote. The local Caterpillar dealership will have to perform the start up.
Price for One Olympian G175LG4 with equipment listed, price f.o.b. Wisconsin, less taxes (if applicable)…………..
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… $133,450.00
OPTION #2
Caterpillar C6.6, 175kW Generator with the following:
AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage within +/- 0.5% at steady state from no load to full load
Provides fast recovery from transient load changes
CHARGING SYSTEM
CAT Premium High Output Battery(s) with rack & cables
Installed (dry);950CCA;90amp hr;12V
CONTROL PANEL
NEMA 1 enclosure with hinged door
Wiring loom
DC and AC wiring harness
EMCP 4.2 controls including:
std -Run / Auto / Stop Control
std -Speed Adjust
std -Engine Cycle Crank
std -Emergency Stop pushbutton
EMCP 4.2 controller features:
std -12-volt DC operation
std -Environmental sealed front face
std -Text alarm/event descriptions
Digital indication for:
std -RPM
std -DC Volts
std -Operating Hours
std -Oil Pressure (psi)
std -Coolant Pressure
std -Volts (L-L & L-N), frequency (Hz)
std -Amps (per phase & average)
std -Power Factor (per phase & average)
std -kW (per phase,average & percent)
std -kVA (per phase,average & percent)
std -kVAr (per phase,average & percent)
std -kW-hr (total)
std -kVAr-hr (total)
Warning/shutdown with common LED indication of shutdowns for:
std -Low Oil pressure
2
std -Low Coolant temp alarm (detects jkt water heater failure)
std -High Coolant temperature shutdown
Programmable protective relaying functions:
std -Generator phase sequence
std -Over/Under voltage (27/59)
std -Over/Under Frequency (81 o/u)
std -Reverse Power (KW) (32)
std -Reverse Reactive Power (kVAr) (32RV)
std -Overcurrent (50/51)
Communications
std -Customer DATA link (Modbus RTU)
std -RS485 Serial DATA link (terminals only)
std -8 programmable digital outputs available
std -2 relays pre-programmed
std -8 programmable digital inputs available
std -2 pre-programmed
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
UL/CSA listed mainline breaker
Single Breaker 100% Rated 3-pole with solid neutral
NEMA 1 steel enclosure
Electrical stub-up area directly below circuit breaker
COOLING SYSTEM
Radiator and cooling fan complete with protective guards
Standard ambient temperatures up to 50degC (122degF)
50% coolant antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
GENERATOR
Insulation system, class H
Drip proof generator air intake (NEMA 2,IP23)
Electrical design in accordance with BS5000 Part 99,EN61000-6,
IEC60034-1,NEMA MG-1.33
Digital voltage regulator
Permanent magnet excitation
EQUIPMENT FINISH
All electroplated hardware
Anticorrosive paint protection
High gloss polyurethane paint for durability and scuff resistance
MOUNTING SYSTEM
Heavy-duty fabricated steel base with lifting points
Anti-vibration pads to ensure vibration isolation
Complete OSHA guarding
Stub-up pipe ready for connection to silencer pipework
Flexible fuel lines to base with NPT connections
HEATING
Battery heater
Block heater
Anti-condensation heater
Two 5kW space heaters in the enclosure
Radiator warm air recirculation system
WARRANTY
24 months limited to 500 hours/year for a standby operation
ENCLOSURE
Weatherproof enclosure
Roxul 8lb acoustic/thermal insulation
Front discharge air plenum
Rear air intake plenum
Critical grade internal mounted silencer and exhaust
4 incandescent vapor tight lights w/ 100 watt bulbs and guards
2 GFI outlets
Motorized air intake louvers (spring open/motor closed) 120vac
Wire block heater and battery charger to load center
Motorized air discharge louvers (Spring open/motor closed) 120 vac
120 mph wind resistant enclosure
Snow hood for air discharge section of enclosure with motorized louvers.
NOTE: THIS ENCLOSURE IS EXTENDED TO HOUSE THE BELOW DETAILED TRANSFERRING GEAR
TESTING AND START UP SERVICES
Testing is not included in this quote. The local Caterpillar dealership will have to perform the start up.
Price for One Caterpillar C6.6, 175kW with equipment listed, price f.o.b. Wisconsin, less taxes (if applicable) ….…
………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. $156,100.00.00
3
OPTION #3
The details for this piece of equipment will not be in until tomorrow. The price listed is an estimate but they assure me
that it is very close.
Quotation Notes:
1. WE HAVE DETAILED THE EQUIPMENT PROPOSED. PLEASE REVIEW YOUR SPECIFICATIONS TO BE SURE
THAT THE EQUIPMENT DESCRIBED ABOVE MEETS YOUR REQUIREMENTS.
2. This quotation covers items listed herein and does not constitute a specific job proposal.
3. All equipment furnished loose for installation by others unless specifically listed as installed.
4. We are quoting this equipment as a material supplier only; we do not include any offloading, installation, concrete pad,
conduit, wiring, lugs, fuel, fuel piping, and other misc. hardware.
5. Start-Up, Testing, & Training to be performed during normal business hours unless specifically indicated otherwise.
6. Relay and/or System Coordination Study are not included unless specifically noted.
7. Telephone and verbal orders are to be confirmed in writing.
8. We reserve the right to correct errors or omissions.
9. Stowers Machinery is not responsible for occurrences beyond our control.
10. Sale is contingent upon customer signing a Stowers Machinery Purchaser Agreement Form.
11. This quotation is made subject to Stowers Machinery Standard Terms and Conditions.
12. Contracts which include penalties or liquidated damage clauses for failure to meet promised shipping dates are not
accepted by or binding on Stowers Machinery, unless accepted, and confirmed in writing
13. Delivery dates listed above are only estimates based on current delivery times from the manufacturers; they are subject to
change at any time. Firm delivery dates can only be obtained after the manufacturer has released equipment for
production. Release for production occurs after the customer has approved submittals in writing or the customer’s
representative.
14. Standard payment terms are net due upon invoice or customer account status is final determination
15. This quotation is good for 30 days from date listed at the top of quotation
NEW WARRANTY:
The Equipment and/or machinery described herein are sold subject only to those warranties provided by the
manufacturer. Caterpillar standard two-year limited warranty on Caterpillar parts. The Seller does not join in any such
manufacturer's warranties. The Seller gives no warranty, express of implied, as to description, quality, merchant ability,
fitness for any particular purpose, productiveness, or any other matter, of any equipment which Seller shall supply. The
seller shall be no way responsible for their proper use and service, and the Purchaser hereby waives all rights of refusal
and return of equipment.
Please call Neal Reinhardt for additional information or to place an order. We look forward to working with you.
Signed__________________________________ Date____________________ Firm_________________________
Sincerely,
Neal Reinhardt
Commercial Engine Sales
865-546-1414 main
865-595-1034 office direct (with voice mail option)
865-771-1036 mobile
[email protected]
4
DESIGNJET Z5200 PostScript®
PRINTER
Instant large-format printing
Easy and intuitive
With this printer you save half the steps needed
to get a print(1—so it’s easier, and you’re more
productive. Take advantage of a printer that is so
easy and intuitive, you’ll wonder why you waited
to bring large-format printing in house.
•Eliminate and automate many of the steps involved with traditional large-format printing. HP Instant Printing Pro streamlines the printing process from beginning to
end with fast, easy file preparation and automatic nesting, preview, orientation, and crop marks.
•Achieve your desired colors quickly while minimizing unnecessary and expensive trial-and-error printing. This printer’s embedded spectrophotometer enables automatic calibration and profiling for greater color accuracy
and consistency.
Quick printing
Save up to 5 minutes on every print. Add
large-format printing to your offering without
slowing down your workflow. Eliminate
time-consuming steps, see fast speeds, and
process and manage jobs more effectively with
high productivity.
•Speed up the printing process by eliminating some of the time-consuming steps along the way. The HP Designjet Z5200 PostScript® Printer lets you submit many files at a time, directly to the printer, without having to wait to open an application.
•Turn around orders quickly and still deliver the high quality that customers demand. With the HP Designjet Z5200 PostScript® Printer and
HP Vivera pigment inks, you can print up to
445 ft²/hr at production speed without sacrificing quality.
Comparison made between printing with HP Instant Printing Pro versus printing from an application and using the driver for any of the files
supported with HP Instant Printing Pro
(2
Program features and availability may vary by country. For more information, visit: www.hp.com/go/lfprinting/materials-supplies .
(1
•Streamline your workflow to achieve greater productivity. The printer’s 160 GB hard disk provides a large buffer, reducing the chance that your workstation will lock up when printing large files and simplifying the process when you need to reprint.
•Go to unattended printing with 300-ml
HP cartridges. Take advantage of the
HP Designjet Excel Accounting Report to track
jobs by customer, job, or costs. Receive low supplies alerts and use convenient reordering enabled by technology built into HP supplies.(2
Any file format
Experience dependable, high-quality results on
a range of applications, no matter the file format
your customer brings. Get high-impact color
that’s delivered accurately and consistently. Gain
efficient operation and a low TCO with this
HP printing system.
•Count on a truly dependable printing experience
with a built-in PostScript interpreter for in-printer processing of PS and PDF files. And with
HP Professional PANTONE Emulation you can meet customer color expectations more quickly
and reliably.
• Save time and money by minimizing trial and error printing. This printer’s embedded spectrophotometer provides automatic calibration and media profiling for greater consistency and accuracy with the first and
every print.
•Impress your customers with long-lasting,
high-quality color and black-and-white prints.
•Optimize your everyday printing and achieve a new level of quality and value. HP Universal Bond Paper and HP Bright White Inkjet Paper feature ColorPRO Technology, providing visibly enhanced print quality and cost-effective everyday printing.
DESIGNJET Z5200 PostScript® PRINTER
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Print
Product
Line drawings(1
42 sec/page on D, 42.1 D prints per hour
CQ113A
Color images(2
Fast: 445 ft²/hr on plain media
Accessories
HP Designjet Z5200 44-in PostScript® Printer
Best: 5.1 min/page on D or up to 58 ft²/hr on glossy media
Q6699A
HP Designjet Z 44-in Spindle
Print resolution
Up to 2400 x 1200 optimized dpi
J7961G
HP Jetdirect 635n IPv6/IPsec Print Server
Margins
Roll: 0.2 x 0.2 x 0.2 x 0.2 in (borderless on glossy/satin roll media)
CN088A
Serif PosterDesigner Pro for HP
(top x bottom x left x right) Sheet: 0.2 x 0.67 x 0.2 x 0.2 in
Original HP printheads
Technology
HP Thermal Inkjet
C9404A
HP 70 Matte Black and Cyan Printhead
Ink cartridge colors
Cyan, magenta, yellow, light cyan, light gray, light magenta, matte black, photo black
C9405A
HP 70 Light Magenta and Light Cyan Printhead
Ink types
HP Vivera pigment inks
C9406A
HP 70 Magenta and Yellow Printhead
Ink drop
4 pl (lc, lm, lg, pK), 6 pl (C, M, Y, mK)
C9407A
HP 70 Photo Black and Light Gray Printhead
Ink cartridge size
300 ml or 130 ml
Original HP ink cartridges
Line accuracy
+/- 0.2%(3
CN629A
HP 772 300-ml Magenta Designjet Ink Cartridge
Minimum line width
0.0015 in (HP-GL/2 addressable)
CN630A
HP 772 300-ml Yellow Designjet Ink Cartridge
Guaranteed minimum
0.003 in (ISO/IEC 13660:2001(E))(4
CN631A
HP 772 300-ml Light Magenta Designjet Ink Cartridge
line width
CN632A
HP 772 300-ml Light Cyan Designjet Ink Cartridge
Image quality
CN633A
HP 772 300-ml Photo Black Designjet Ink Cartridge
Color accuracy
Median < 1.6 dE2000, 95% of colors < 2.8 dE2000(5
CN634A
HP 772 300-ml Light Gray Designjet Ink Cartridge
Short term color stability
< 1 dE2000 in less than 5 minutes(6
CN635A
HP 772 300-ml Matte Black Designjet Ink Cartridge
Print-to-print repeatability
Average < 0.5 dE2000, 95% of colors < 1.4 dE2000(6
CN636A
HP 772 300-ml Cyan Designjet Ink Cartridge
Maximum optical density
4 L* min/2.5 D(7
C9448A
HP 70 130-ml Matte Black Ink Cartridge
C9449A
HP 70 130-ml Photo Black Ink Cartridge
Media
Handling
Sheet feed, roll feed, automatic cutter (cuts all media except canvas)
C9451A
HP 70 130-ml Light Gray Ink Cartridge
Types
Photographic, proofing, fine art printing material, self-adhesive, banner and sign, bond C9453A
HP 70 130-ml Magenta Ink Cartridge
and coated, backlit, fabric/textile
C9454A
HP 70 130-ml Yellow Ink Cartridge
Weight
Up to 500 g/m²
C9455A
HP 70 130-ml Light Magenta Ink Cartridge
Size
8.5 x 11 to 44 x 66-in sheets; 11 to 44-in rolls
C9452A
HP 70 130-ml Cyan Ink Cartridge
Thickness
Up to 31.5 mil
C9390A
HP 70 130-ml Light Cyan Ink Cartridge
Processing and memory
Original HP large-format printing materials
Intel® LE80578 800 MHz, 32 GB (virtual memory capacity), 160 GB hard disk
Connectivity
HP Bright White Inkjet Paper with C1860A, C1861A, C6035A, C6036A, C6810A, Q1444A, ColorPRO Technology
Q1445A, Q1446A
Interfaces (standard)
Gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-T); Hi-Speed USB 2.0 certified; EIO Jetdirect accessory slot
HP Universal Bond Paper with ColorPRO Technology
Q1396A, Q1397A, Q1398A, Q8003A, Q8004A, Q8005A
Print languages
Adobe® PostScript® 3™, Adobe PDF, TIFF, JPEG, CALS G4, HP PCL 3 GUI, HP-GL/2(8
HP Recycled Bond Paper
CG889A, CG890A, CG891A
Drivers (included)
HP PCL 3 GUI and PostScript drivers for Windows® (optimized for AutoCAD 2000 and HP Heavyweight Coated Paper
C6029C, C6030C, C6569C, C6570C, C6977C, Q1956A, higher) and Mac OS X; support for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenServer environments
Q1957A
Included software
Printer drivers, HP Instant Printing Pro, HP Printer Utility including HP Color Center,
HP Universal Coated Paper
Q1404A, Q1405A, Q1406A, Q1408A
HP Designjet Excel Accounting Report, Serif PosterDesigner Pro for HP (free trial)
HP Coated Paper
C6019B, C6020B, C6567B, C6568B, C6980A, Q1441A, Q1442A, Q1443A
Dimensions (w x d x h)
Printer
69.7 x 27.2 x 41.2 in
HP Premium Instant-dry Satin Photo Paper
Q7992A, Q7994A, Q7996A, Q7998A, Q8000A
Shipping
76 x 30.2 x 30.3 in
HP Universal Instant-dry Gloss Photo Paper
Q6574A, Q6575A, Q6576A, Q6578A
HP Universal Instant-dry Semi-gloss Photo Paper
Q6579A, Q6580A, Q6581A, Q6582A, Q6583A
Weight
Printer
189 lb
HP Universal High-gloss Photo Paper
Q1426A, Q1427A, Q1428A, Q1429A, Q1430A
Shipping
271 lb
HP Universal Semi-gloss Photo Paper
Q1420A, Q1421A, Q1422A, Q1423A, Q1424A
HP Premium Vivid Color Backlit Film
Q8747A, Q8748A, CG924A, Q8749A, Q8750A
What’s in the box
Printer, printheads, introductory ink cartridges, 44-in stand, Original HP sample media HP Adhesive-backed Polypropylene
Q8044A, Q8045A, Q8884A
roll, quick reference guide, setup poster, start-up software, power cord
HP Opaque Scrim
Q8675A, Q1898B, Q1899B, Q1901B, Q1902B
HP Artist Matte Canvas
Q8704A, Q8705A, Q8706A, Q8707A
Environmental ranges
Operating temperature
41 to 104º F
Storage temperature
-13 to 131º F
Operating humidity
20 to 80% RH
For more HP large-format printing materials and detailed information on sizes and region availability, please
visit us online at: www.hp.com/go/lfprinting/materials-supplies
With the addition of ColorPRO Technology, HP papers provide professional quality and
striking results at production speed for high-quality, high-productivity printing of graphics
and technical applications.
Acoustic
Sound pressure, active
49 dB(A)
Sound pressure, standby
29 dB(A)
Sound power, active
6.5 B(A)
Sound power, standby
4.4 B(A)
Power
Maximum
170 watts
Powersave
< 12 watts (< 30 watts with embedded DFE)
Off
0.1 watts
Requirements
Input voltage (auto ranging) 100 to 240 VAC (+/- 10%), 50/60 Hz (+/- 3 Hz), 2 A max
Certification
Service and support
UV210E
UV216E
UV219E
UV222PE
UV223PE
UV225PE
UV226PE
H4518E
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
3 year Next Business Day Onsite Support
3 year 4 hour response, 9x5 Onsite Support
3 year 4 hour response, 13x5 Onsite Support
1 year, Post Warranty, Next Business Day Onsite Support
2 year Post Warranty, Next Business Day Onsite Support
1 year Post Warranty, 4 hour response, 9x5 Onsite Support
1 year Post Warranty, 4 hour response, 13x5 Onsite Support
Network Installation Service Designjet 400-6100 SVC
(1
Safety
USA and Canada (CSA certified); EU (LVD and EN 60950-1 compliant); Russia (GOST); Mechanical printing time. Printed in Fast mode on HP Bright White Inkjet Paper (Bond).
(2
Mechanical printing time.
Singapore (PSB); China (CCC); Argentina (IRAM); Mexico (NYCE)
(3
+/- 0.2% of the specified vector length or +/- 0.1 mm (whichever greater) at 73º F, 50-60% relative humidity, on E-sized Electromagnetic
Compliant with Class B requirements, including: USA (FCC rules), Canada (ICES),
EU (EMC Directive), Australia (ACMA), New Zealand (RSM), China (CCC), Japan (VCCI); (4
Measured on HP Matte Film.
Certified as Class A product: Korea (KCC)
(5
ICC absolute colorimetric accuracy on HP Proofing Matte paper.
Environmental
WEEE; EU RoHS; China RoHS; REACH; EuP; FEMP
ENERGY STAR®
See: www.hp.com/go/energystar .
qualified models
(6
With HP premium instant-dry photo Satin media, right after calibration.
(7
With HP Premium Instant Dry Photo Gloss media.
(8
HP-GL/2 printing only available via HP Instant Printing Pro, which can be downloaded for free at
www.hp.com/go/hpinstantprintingutility
Warranty
HP Matte Film in Best or Normal mode.
One-year limited hardware warranty
For more information, visit our website at www.hp.com/go/designjetZ5200
© Copyright 2010 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Adobe PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. ENERGY STAR
and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Pantone is the property of Pantone, Inc.
4AA1-2613ENUC, April 2010
PW-Series
Modular Access
Control System
Intelligent Controllers
The PW-Series Modular Control System is an advanced access
control hardware architecture capable of providing solutions for
large enterprise applications. The Intelligent Controller (PW6K1IC,
PW3K1IC or PW6K1ICE) provides power and flexibility with its
32-bit architecture, TCP/IP support, flash memory, large local
cardholder database, and large reader and I/O module support.
The Intelligent Controller is designed to operate off-line, making
access control decisions independently from a PC or other
controlling device. It can also be connected to a host computer
for system configuration, alarm monitoring and direct control.
Connectivity to the host computer is accomplished via direct
serial communication (RS232 or RS485), dial-up modem, or
TCP/IP network connection. The PW-6000 has Ethernet directly
embedded and will support a second Ethernet connection.
The PW6K1IC Intelligent Controllers support any combination of
up to 32 I/O or reader boards (16 for the PW3K1IC) to monitor
alarm input points, relay output points and access control reader
interfaces. By offering a modular design, the system can be
tailored to meet a wide range of applications, while optimizing
cost and mounting space.
The PW-6000 will support up to 600,000 cards and 50,000
transactions. The PW-6101 will support up to 240,000 cards
and 50,000 transactions. The PW-3000 Intelligent Controller
accommodates a card database of 7,800 cards and a standard
transaction buffer of 5,000 transactions.
The PW-Series access modules have been designed to
accommodate various mounting options. Units can be wall
mounted in a high density configuration (PW5K2ENC1) when
space is limited, a 19" rack configuration (PW5K2ENC2), or
in a tile mount configuration (PW5K1ENC3). The PW-6000
controller utilizes a built-in Web server to configure the hardware
attributes of the controller.
K E Y F E AT U R E S
• Up to 12 intervals per time zone where
each interval is a start time, stop time
and day map. The day map indicates
the day of the week or holiday
• 255 possible holidays are defined by a
starting date and duration
• Automatic calculation of leap year and
Daylight Saving Time
• 9-digit (32-bit) user ID standard /
15-digit maximum - PW-3000, 19-digit
(64-bit) user ID - PW-6000/PW-6101
• Support for FIPS long card numbers
• Activation and deactivation dates by card
• Up to 32 access levels per card or
individual time zones per readers
• Up to 8-digit Personal Identification
•
•
•
•
•
•
Numbers (PIN) - PW-3000,
15-digit - PW6000/PW-6101
Operating modes include locked,
unlocked, facility code, card only, card
and PIN, card or PIN, and PIN only
Strike modes include fail-safe and
fail-secure
Up to eight card formats per reader
Entire card bit-stream reported with
invalid facility code or invalid card format
Anti-passback support – free pass
and exempt flags, last area accessed,
last reader accessed and time/date of
last access
Configurable as standard, entry delay
latching, entry delay non-latching
and exit delay
• Configurable as standard (energize
to activate) or fail-safe (de-energize
to activate)
• Pulse control: single pulse (up to 24
hours) or repeating pulses (on/off in 0.1
second increments, up to 255 times)
• Any combination of 32 I/O or reader
modules may be connected to the
PW6K1IC RS485 ports. 4,000 feet /
1,250 meters total bus length per port
(a max 16 I/O or reader board may
connect to the PW3K1IC)
• UL294, UL1076 Listed
• AES FIPS 197 Encryption
• PW-6000 Web server for
hardware configuration
PW-Series Modular Access Control System
Intelligent Controllers
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
Database:
• Cardholders:
- 7,800 on PW-3000
- 600,000 on PW-6000
- 240,000 on PW-6101
• Transaction storage:
- 5,000 standard, 35,000
with memory expansion
on PW-3000
- 50,000 on PW-6000/PW-6101
• Flash programming for firmware
revision updates
• Access codes: virtually unlimited
• Holidays: virtually unlimited
• Time codes: 255
• Card reader formats: 8 per reader
• Credential facility codes: 8
• Elevator support: 128 floors
• Dedicated tamper alarm
• Dedicated power fail alarm
• Real time clock:
- Geographic time zone support
- Daylight Saving Time
- Leap year support
- 4 bit parallel accurate to 50 ppm
Database values may exceed current limitations of some
security management systems.
Communication Modules:
• Primary communication support:
- RS232
- RS485
- Dial up modem
- Ethernet (TCP/IP)
• Communication speed: 38.4 KBps
• Redundant communication support,
automatic dial back: (PW6K1IC)
- Dial back on alarm condition
- Dial back on transaction buffer
capacity reached
- Dial back on primary power loss
• Download functionality:
- System functional during system
download: Yes
- System functional during
credential download: Yes
Access Modules:
PW-6000
• 2 RS485 ports supporting
32 total devices
PW-6101
• POE - Supporting 16 Single Reader
Modules via ethernet (PW6K1ICE or
PW6K1R1E)
PW-3000
• 2 RS485 ports supporting
16 total devices
• Access modules available:
- Single reader module (PW5K1R1)
- Dual reader module (PW6K1R2)
- 16 relay output module
(PW6K1OUT) (12 from the
front edge)
- 16 alarm input module (PW6K1IN)
• Module connectivity via RS485
protocol (4000')
Operational Functionality:
• Duress detection
• Operational modes:
- Credential only
- PIN only
- Credential or PIN
- Credential and PIN
- Facility code only
• Maximum PIN size: 8 digit
• Door object support
• Threat level support: 100 levels
• Two person access rule
• Offline modes (selectable per reader):
- Facility code access
- Locked (no access)
- Unlocked (free access)
• Anti-passback support:
- While preventing access (hard)
- While allowing access (soft)
• Transaction prioritization: 999 levels
Reader Support:
• HID
• Indala
• OmniProx
• OmniClass
• DigiReaders
• Wiegand
• Keypads
• Ingersoll Rand AD-400 Wireless
Lock Sets (PW-6000 panels only)
Readers and Credentials:
• Prox:
- OmniProx
- HID Prox
- DigiReaders
- Indala Readers
• Smart:
- OmniClass
- iClass
- Mifare
- DESFire
• Keypad
• Magstripe
• Wiegand
C O M M O N S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
Enclosure Dimensions:
• Board:
PW-3000/PW-6000
9.0" H x 5.5" W x 1.0" D
(228.6 mm H x 139.7 mm W x 25.4 mm D)
Environment:
• Temperature: 32 to 158° F (0 to 70° C) operational;
-67 to 185° F (-55 to 85° C) storage
• PW-6101 IC and 0.96" H x 5.5" W x 2.75" D
Reader Module: (24mm H x 140mm W x 92mm D)
Wire requirements:
• Power - twisted pair, 18 AWG
• PW5K2ENC1:
13.9" H x 17" W x 9" D
(353.0 mm H x 431.8 mm W x 228.6 mm D)
• RS485 - 24 AWG, 4,000' (1,200m) max, 2 twisted pairs
with shield (120W, 23 pF, Belden 9842 or equiv.)
• PW5K2ENC2:
13.9" H x 18.9" W x 9" D
(353.0 mm H x 480.0 mm W x 228.6 mm D)
• PW5K1ENC3:
14" H x 16" W x 4.5" D
(355.6 mm H x 406.4 mm W x 114.3 mm D)
• Humidity: 0 to 95% RHNC
• RS232 - 24 AWG, 25' (7.6m) max
• Alarm input - twisted pair, 30 ohms max
Communication Features:
• RS485 port, 4000’ (1,250m) total bus length
• Standard speed is 38,400 bps
BENEFITS
• True 32-bit microprocessor provides
fast transaction processing for the
most demanding network applications
• Modular hardware architecture provides
flexibility and expansion capabilities
• Flash memory allows new versions of
firmware to be downloaded from the
host computer to the controller(s)
through the central network
• Large, local controller database allows
access control decisions to be made
by controller in real time without the
need to communicate to the server
• Scalable architecture ensures optimal
performance with a seamless upgrade
path to accommodate future growth
beyond its initial installation
• Seamless support for TCP/IP
protocols to allow intelligent
controllers to tap into a LAN
or WAN connectivity
• Supports multiple reader and card
formats for maximum flexibility and
security options
• Multiple communication methods
provide redundant paths for more
robust system connectivity
P W - S E R I E S C O N F I G U R AT I O N
• Supervised communication and
Lithium battery backup ensures
system reliability
• System offline modes customizable
per reader include facility code
access, locked (no access), and
unlocked (full access)
• Redundant communication port
feature allowing secondary port
communication if primary fails
PW-Series Modular Access Control System
Intelligent Controllers
ORDERING
Order #
Order #
Description
PW-3000 and PW-6000 Intelligent Control System
PW6K1IC
PW-6000 Intelligent Controller – Capacity for 32 I/O or reader boards
PW3K1IC
PW-3000 Intelligent Controller – Capacity for 16 I/O or reader boards
PW6K1IN
PW-Series 16 input module
PW6K1OUT
PW-Series 16 relay output module
PW5K1R1
PW-Series single reader module (only for use in PW5K1ENC4)
PW6K1R2
PW-Series dual reader module
PW5K1MX8
8-Port multiplexer
PW-6101 Intelligent Control System
PW6K1ICE
Intelligent Controller
PW6K1R1E
One door reader module
Enclosures and Accessories
PW5K2ENC1
PW-Series high density enclosure (power supply and battery not
included) PW-Series high density enclosure for 19" rack installations
(power supply and battery not included)
PW6K2E2PS
PW-Series 110/220 VAC, 4 amp power supply for PW5K2ENC1
and PW5K2ENC2 enclosures
PW5K1ENC3
PW-Series remote enclosure with plug-in with 110V
transformer/power supply
PW5K1ENC4
Single reader enclosure (for use with PW5K1R1)
PW5K1DCC
PW-Series daisy chain cable
Pro-Watch® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.
Microsoft®, Microsoft® BackOffice® and Windows® 2000 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
For more information: www.honeywellintegrated.com
Automation and Control Solutions
Honeywell Security Products Americas
2700 Blankenbaker Pkwy, Suite 150
Louisville, KY 40299
1.800.323.4576
www.honeywell.com
Description
L/PWSMACSD/D
October 2012
© 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Catalog
Number
Notes
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE — For applications that require the clean appearance of a low-profile, brightnesscontrolled wraparound. Provides broad distribution of light for offices, schools and corridors. Certain
airborne contaminants can diminish integrity of acrylic. Click here for Acrylic Environmental
Compatibility table for suitable uses.
Type
2LB-2-32-MVOLT-GEB10IS
2 LAMP IN WIDE BODY
TYPE 9
Low-Profile Wraparound
Attributes: Curved prismatic diffuser with linear side prisms minimize lamp image and provides high
angle brightness control. Luminous end plates soften appearance for improved aesthetics.
LB
CONSTRUCTION — Metal parts are die formed from code-gauge steel. Prismatic diffuser is 100% acrylic
with sonically welded luminous ends. Continuous side flanges on fixture body provide light trap and
continuous diffuser support to prevent accidental opening and simplify maintenance.
Finish: Five stage iron-phosphate pretreatment assure superior paint adhesion and rust resistance.
Painted parts finished with high-gloss, high-reflectivity baked white polyester enamel (low VOC).
T5 and T8
WIDE BODY
4' length
2 or 4 lamps
ELECTRICAL — Thermally-protected, resetting, Class P, HPF, non-PCB, UL Listed, CSA Certified ballast
is standard. Luminaire is suitable for damp locations. AWM, TFN or THHN wire used throughout, rated
for required temperatures.
UL/CSA listed ballast disconnect w/strain relief and leads provided standard.
LISTINGS — UL Listed (standard). Optional: Canada CSA or C-UL. Mexico NOM.
WARRANTY — 1-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at
www.acuitybrands.com/CustomerResources/Terms_and_conditions.aspx
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
13-3/8
(34.0)
13-3/8
(34.0)
3-5/8
(9.2)
Specifications
T8 Length: 48 (121.9)
T5 Length: 46-1/2 (118.1)
Width: 15-1/2 (39.4)
Height: 2-15/16 (7.5)
Series
LB
2LB
4 lamps, 15-1/2" wide
2 lamps, 15-1/2" wide
For tandem double-length unit, add
prefix T. Example: TLB
13-3/8
(34.0)
1-5/16
(3.3)
1-1/2
(3.8)
1-5/16 1-9/16
(3.3) (4.0)
2-15/16
(7.5)
2-1/2 2-1/2
(6.4) (6.4)
4-3/4
4-3/4
(12.1)
(12.1)
15-1/2
(39.4)
2-1/2 2-1/2
(6.4)
(6.4)
4-3/4
4-3/4
(12.1)
(12.1)
15-1/2
(39.4)
Example: LB 4 32 MVOLT GEB10IS
For shortest lead times, configure product using standard options (shown in bold).
Number of lamps
Lamp type
Voltage
Options
2
4
17
32
14T5
28T5
54T5HO
120
277
347
MVOLT
1/4
GEB10IS
GEB10PS
EL
GLR
GMF
CSA
SSR
Not
included.
Swivel-stem hanger (specify in 2" increments).
Ceiling spacer (adjusts from 1-1/2" to 2-1/2" from ceiling).
17W T8 (24")
32W T8 (48")
14W T5 (22-1/2")1
28W T5 (46-1/2")
54W T5HO (46-1/2")2
3-5/8
(9.2)
15-1/2
(39.4)
2-15/16
(7.5)
Accessories: Order as separate catalog number.
SQ_
1B
15-1/2
(39.4)
3-5/8
(9.2)
3-5/8
(9.2)
13-3/8
(34.0)
All dimensions are inches (centimeters)
unless otherwise indicated.
ORDERING INFORMATION
1-7/16
(3.7) 2-15/16
(7.5)
1-7/16
(3.7) 2-15/16
(7.5)
2-15/16
(7.5)
Others
available.
One, four-lamp ballast
Electronic ballast, ≤10% THD, instant start
Electronic ballast, ≤10% THD, programmed start
Emergency battery pack (nominal 300 lumens, see Life Safety Section)
Internal fast-blow fuse3
Internal slow-blow fuse3
Listed and labeled to comply with Canadian Standards
Specular silver interior finish (95% reflective)
Notes
1 Not available in 4 lamp.
2 T5HO only available in two-lamp configuration.
3 Must specify voltage.
FLUORESCENTLB-W
LB Low-Profile Wraparound, Wide Body
MOUNTING DATA
DIMENSIONS
For unit or row installation, surface or stem mounting. Stem mounting not available on TLB units.
All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise indicated. Specifications subject to change without notice.
Individual installation — Two single-stem hangers required.
Row installation — One hanger per fixture plus one per row required.
See ACCESSORIES below for hanging devices.
1-13/16
(4.6)
SQ
23
(58.4)
3-1/2
(8.9)
2-9/16
(6.5)
1B
B
46-1/16
(117.0)
B
13-3/8
(34.0)
B
3-3/16
(8.1)
A
A = 1/4 x 1/2 (.635 x 1.27) Oval Hole
B = 7/8 (2.22) Dia. K.O.
C = 11/16 (1.74) Dia. K.O.
24
(61.0)
3-9/16
(9.0)
1-13/16
(4.6)
A
C
C
11/16
(1.7)
48
(121.9)
2-9/16
(6.5)
B
B
13-3/8
(34.0)
B
3-3/16
(8.1)
A
C
C
A
11/16
(1.7)
PHOTOMETRICS
Calculated using the zonal cavity method in accordance with IESNA LM41 procedure. Floor reflectances are 20%. Lamp configurations shown are typical. Full photometric data on these and other configurations
available upon request.
LB 4 32
Report LTL 5614 - Lumens per lamp = 2900
S/MH (along) 1.2 (across) 1.3
Ceiling
80%
70%
50%
Wall70% 50% 30% 70%
50% 30% 50% 30% 10%0%
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
86
78
72
66
61
56
52
48
44
41
38
89
81
75
69
63
58
54
50
46
42
39
89
78
69
62
55
49
44
40
36
32
29
89
75
64
56
49
43
38
34
30
26
23
86
75
67
60
54
48
43
39
35
31
29
86
73
63
55
48
42
37
33
29
26
23
80
71
63
57
51
45
41
37
33
30
27
80
69
59
52
46
40
36
32
28
25
22
0%
80
67
56
49
42
36
32
28
24
21
19
68
58
50
43
38
33
29
25
22
19
16
Zonal Lumens Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp
%Fixture
0-30
0-40
0-60
0-90
90-180
0-180
2376
3914
6499
7883
932
8815
20.5
33.7
56.0
68.0
8.0
76.0
27.0
44.1
73.7
89.4
10.6
100.0
LB-W
FLUORESCENT: One Lithonia Way, Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800-858-7763 Fax: 770-929-8789 www.lithonia.com
© 1999-2013 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 02/06/13
Catalog
Number
2LB-2-32-MVOLT-GEB10IS
Notes
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE — RT8S is designed for applications that require the extremely energy efficient delivery
of comfortable volumetric light from a lay-in fixture that is appealing and shallow in depth and where
room-side ballast access is required. Ideal for offices, schools, hospitals and numerous other commercial
applications. Certain airborne contaminants can diminish integrity of acrylic.
Click here for Acrylic Environmental Compatibility table for suitable uses.
OPTICAL SYSTEM — Delivers volumetric lighting by filling the entire volume of space with light, providing
the ideal amount to walls, cubicles, work surfaces and people.
Luminous characteristics are carefully managed at high angles, distributing just enough intensity to deliver
the volumetric effect.
98% reflective Alanod MIRO® silver optical assembly efficiently redirects lamp output to the refractor.
Regressed refractive system obscures and softens the lamp and smoothly washes the reflector with light.
Linear faceted reflector softens and distributes light into the space and minimizes the luminance ratio
between the fixture and the ceiling.
Mechanical cut-off across the reflector and fresnel refraction along the refractor provide high angle shielding
and a quiet ceiling.
Sloped endplates provide a balanced fixture to ceiling ratio while enhancing the perception of fixture depth.
CONSTRUCTION — Rugged, steel reflector with embossed facets. Painted after fabrication.
Fixtures may be mounted end-to-end.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM — High-efficiency, CEE qualified, instant-start, < 10% THD, universal voltage and
sound rated A are available as quick-ship items.
Optional program-start and step-dimming ballasts available.
Designed and optimized for use with CEE (Consortium for Energy Efficiency) qualified, high-lumen, long life
T8 lamps and energy-efficient electronic ballasts.
MAINTENANCE — Lamps accessed by unlatching trim and allowing it to hinge open for easy maintenance.
Ballast is accessed from below by removing channel cover.
LISTING — UL Listed to U.S. and Canadian standards.
WARRANTY — 1-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at
www.acuitybrands.com/CustomerResources/Terms and conditions.aspx
Protected by one or more of US Patents Nos. 7,229,192; D541,467; D541,468; D544,633; D544,634; D544,992;
D544,933 and additional patent pending.
Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application.
2 LAMP IN WIDE BODY
TYPE 9
Type
2RT8S
2X4
2 Lamps T8
Specifications
D
Length: 48 (121.8)
Width: 24 (61.0)
W
Depth: 3-3/16 (8.1)
All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise specified.
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
ORDERING INFORMATION
2RT8S
Series
2RT8S
2
Trim type
(blank) Lay-in grid
F Overlapping
flanged
Example: 2RT8S 2 32 MVOLT BINP L835HT8
For shortest lead times, configure products using bolded options.
32
Number
of lamps Wattage
2
32 32W T8
(48")
Voltage
MVOLT
347
Ballast
1
BILP IS, high efficiency,
.78 bf (low)2
BINP IS, high efficiency,
.88 bf (normal)2
GEB10IS IS, .88 ballast
factor
BIHP IS, high efficiency,
120 bf (high)2
BSNP PS, step-dimming,
high efficiency, .88 bf
(normal)2,3
Lamp
Options
L835HT8 3100 lumen long
life, 3500° K
LP735 2800 lumen,
3500°K
GLR Fast-blow fuse4
EL Emergency battery pack (see Life Safety
section)
EL14 Emergency battery pack (see Life
Safety section)
PWS1836 6' prewire, 3/8" diameter, 18 gauge,
3-wires5
PWS1846 6' prewire, 3/8" diameter, 18 gauge,
4-wires6
QFC_ Quick-flex fixture cable, factory installed
prewired cable (RELOC®)4
Notes
1 MVOLT standard for 120V-277V applications.
2 CEE qualified HPT8, NEMA premium ballast to qualify for many utility rebates.
3 Not available with 347 volt.
4 Must specify voltage, 120 or 277.
5 For use with standard ballast.
6 For use with step-dimming ballast.
FLUORESCENT2 RT8S_2X4
2RT8S Volumetric Recessed Lighting 2' x 4'
MOUNTING DATA
System
T8 Energy Comparison
Lamp Ballast
Input
Type
Factor
Watts
3-lamp T8 Parabolic
F32T8
0.88
85
–
2RT8B 2-lamp BINP T8
F32T8
0.88
55
30
2RT8B 2-lamp BILP T8
F32T8
0.78
48
37
Continuous row mounting of flanged units requires CRE and CRM trim options (see Options).
Watts Saved
Compared to 3 lamp T8
NOTES:
1 Recommended rough-in dimensions for F-trim fixtures 24"x48" (Tolerance is +1/4"-0"). Swing-gate range
1-3/16" to 3-15/16". Swing-gate span 23-3/8" to 26-11/16". Fixture swing-gate points require additional 1-1/16"
over nominal fixture height.
PHOTOMETRICS
2RT8S 2 32, FO32 lamps, 2800 lumens per lamp, s/m 1.28 (along) 1.4 (across), test no. LTL18481
90°
80°
300
60°
600
900
1200
40°
15000°
20°
0°
CP Summary
0°
90
0° 1490 1490
5° 1507 1464
15° 1459 1461
25° 1362 1430
35° 1198 1352
45° 975 1215
55° 707 1017
648
65° 438
208
75° 205
20
85° 35
0
0
90
Coefficients of Utilization
pf
20%
pc
80%
70%
50%
pw 70%50%30% 50%30%10% 50%30%10%
0 96 96 96
94 94 94
90 90 90
1 88 84 81
82 79 77
79 77 74
2 80 73 68
72 67 63
69 65 61
3 73 64 58
63 57 52
61 56 51
4 67 57 50
56 49 44
54 48 44
5 61 51 43
50 43 38
48 42 37
6 56 46 38
45 38 33
43 37 33
7 52 41 34
41 34 29
39 33 29
8 49 38 31
37 30 26
36 30 26
9 45 34 28
34 28 23
33 27 23
10 42 32 25
31 25 21
30 25 21
RCR
180°
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens % Lamp % Fixture
0° - 30°
1198
21.4
26.5
0° - 40°
1997
35.7
44.2
0° - 60°
3630
64.8
80.4
0° - 90°
4515
80.6
100.0
90° - 180°
0
0.0
0.0
0° - 180°
4515
80.6
100.0
Efficiency: 80.6%
90°
*The LER (Luminaire Efficacy Rating) is the lumens per watt rating for this fixture. It is used to compare the energy efficiency of various products. This photometric report is based upon IES testing procedures, as stated in LM-41-1998.
2RT8S_2X4
FLUORESCENT: One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800-858-7763 Fax: 770-929-8789
www.lithonia.com
©2010-2014 Acuity Brands, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 06/03/14
Catalog
Number
Notes
Features & Specifications
INTENDED USE
Ideal for a wide variety of low- to medium-height ceiling applications including commercial, retail and
hospitality spaces where a baffled fixture is required.
Type
OPTICS
Compact Fluorescent Downlighting
Aluminum full reflectors are optically designed to maximize lumen output and to provide superior glare control.
The black or white baffled reflectors have a semi-specular upper finish with white painted flange standard.
6” 6HF
Construction
Galvanized steel mounting frame with mechanical trim retention (yoke) ensures secure and flush reflector
mounting to ceiling. Mounting frame has cutout section for remodel applications when installation from below is
necessary.
Galvanized bar hangers span up to 24” o.c. and feature built-in T-bar clips and nailers for T-bar or wood joist
installation.
Frames equipped with galvanized junction box UL Listed for through wire applications.
Maximum 1-1/2” ceiling thickness.
ELECTRICAL
baffle
Horizontal, 2-Lamp Double Twin-Tube (DTT)
Electronic ballast with end of lamp life protection standard. Class P thermally protected ballast protects against
improper contact with insulation. Minimum starting temperature is 0°F/-18°C.
11-3/8
(28.9)
Rated for #12 AWG conductor thru-branch wiring. Minimum 90° supply wire. Ground wire provided.
12-1/4
(31.1)
Lamp Socket Base:
DTT 4-pin lamps – 13W (G24Q-1); 18W (G24Q-2); 26W (G24Q-3)
8-3/4
(22.2)
6-3/8
(16.2)
LISTING
Fixtures are UL Listed for thru-branch wiring, Non-IC recessed mounting, damp location, and to U.S. and
Canadian Safety Standards.
7-1/2
(19.1)
13-1/4
(33.7)
Specifications
Max. height: 6-3/8 (16.2)
Ceiling opening: 7 (17.8)
Overlap trim: 7-1/2 (19.1)
Length: 13-1/4 (33.7)
6-3/8
(16.2)
6
(15.2)
7-1/2
(19.1)
Width: 12-1/4 (31.1)
All dimensions are inches (centimeters).
Ordering information
For shortest lead times, configure products using bolded options.
Example: 6HF 2/26DTT F6B3 MVOLT
6HF
Series
Wattage/Lamp
Reflector/Color2
Voltage
Options7
6HF
2/13DTT
2/18DTT
2/26DTT
F6B3
F6B3W
MVOLT
120
277
3474
ADEZ
1
Black baffle
White baffle
Accessories: Order as separate catalog number.
SCA6
CTE6
Sloped ceiling adaptor. Degree of slope must be
specified (10D, 15D, 20D, 25D, 30D) Ex: SCA6 10D.
Ceiling thickness extender is used when ceiling thickness
is greater than 1-1/2 (3.8). Maximum thickness 2 (5.1).
Downlighting & Track
3
Advance Mark 10™ electronic dimming ballast, 120V or 277V. Minimum dimming level 5%.
Must be voltage specific.
ECOS
Lutron EcoSystem electronic dimming ballast, 120-277V. Must be wattage-specific. Minimum
dimming level 5%.
EL
Emergency PSDL3 DL battery pack with integral test switch5
ELR
Emergency PSDL3 DL battery pack with remote test switch5
ELRHL2LP OTA I-162 emergency battery pack with remote test switch. Operates two 26W, two 32W or two
42W CFL lamps in emergengy mode with battery back-up in case of power disruption. Avereage
output is 2,600 lumens for two 26W lamps; 2,750 lumens for two 32W lamps and 2,800 lumens
for two 42W lamps.6
GMF
Single slow-blow fuse, must specify voltage
BDP
Ballast disconnect plug (meets codes that require in-fixture disconnect)4
RIF1
Radio interference filter
WLP
35K lamp (shipped separately)
Notes
1 Not available with ADEZ or ECOS.
2 White painted flange standard.
3 Electronic multi-volt ballast capable of operating any line voltage from 120-277V, 50 or 60Hz.
4 Not available with EL or ELR.
5 Ships standard for 1-lamp operation. For 2-lamp operation, consult installation instructions or
factory. Add 3” (7.6) to width and 4-1/2” (11.4) to length.
6 Not recommended for field installation.
7For additional options, see www.lithonia.com.
6HF-Baffle-2-DTT
6” 6HF Horizontal, 2-Lamp Double Twin-Tube (DTT), Baffle
Distribution Curve
Distribution Data
Output Data
Coefficient of Utilization
Illuminance Data at 30” Above Floor for
a Single Luminaire
6HF 2/26DTT F6B3W MVOLT, (2) Philips PL-C 26W/27SH lamp, 1.0 s/mh, 3600 rated lumens, test no. 2195072603
rf
20%
50%10%
rc 80%70%50%
Beam angle 52.2°
Beam angle
rw 50%30%50%30%50%30% 88.6°
1424140 3938 38 Initial fc fc at fc at
Beam beam
Beam beam
2393737 3535 34 Mount at beam
3353334 3233 31 height center diameter edge diameter edge
From 0°
cp. Lumens
Zone Lumens%lamp
0°
5°
15°
25°
35°
45°
55°
65°
75°
85°
90°
949
946 90
878 246
682 314
447 282
247 197
148 134
83 84
39 41
7 10
0
0°-30° 650 18.08
0°-40° 932 25.90
0°-60° 1264 35.11
0°-90° 1398 38.85 4333031 2930 29
5302729 2728 26
90°-180° 0
0.00 6282527 2526 24
0°-180° 1398 38.85* 7262325 2224 22
8242123 2123 20
*Total Efficiency
9221921 1921 19
10201820 1820 17
8’
10’
12’
14’
16’
31.4
16.9
10.5
7.2
5.2
5.4 15.7
7.4 8.4
9.3 5.3
11.3 3.6
13.2 2.6
10.7 3.1
14.6 1.7
18.5 1.1
22.4
.7
26.4
.5
6HF-BAFFLE-2-DTT
DOWNLIGHTING & TRACK: One Lithonia Way, Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800-315-4963 Fax: 770-981-8191 www.lithonia.com © 2010-2013 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 06/24/13
Catalog
Number
2LB-2-32-MVOLT-GEB10IS
Notes
2 LAMP IN WIDE BODY
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE — For wall or ceiling mounting - vertical or horizontal. Ideal for stairwells, corridors,
lavatories or any utility application. Certain airborne contaminants can diminish integrity of
acrylic. Click here for Acrylic Environmental Compatibility table for suitable uses.
Type
TYPE 9
Commercial Wall Bracket
CONSTRUCTION — Easy maintenance design for individual or tandem mounting. For row mounting,
order RMT option.
WC
Heavy-duty code grade steel. Metal parts are die-formed.
Finish: Five-stage iron-phosphate pretreatment ensures superior paint adhesion and rust resistance.
Standard finish is high-gloss, high reflectivety, baked white polyester (architectural black available).
OPTICS — Available with high performance A12 pattern clear acrylic or low brightness matte white opal
acrylic. Front metal fascia eliminates direct illumination. Provides up/down distribution.
ELECTRICAL — AWM, TFN or THHN wire used throughout, rated for required temperatures. UL/CSA
Ballast disconnect provided where required to comply with US and Canadian codes.
T5 and T8
2', 3' or 4' Lengths
1 or 2 Lamps
INSTALLATION — End caps spring-loaded for easy diffuser removal.
LISTINGS — UL Listed to US and Canadian safety standards. Optional: Mexico NOM.
WARRANTY — 1-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at
www.acuitybrands.com/CustomerResources/Terms_and_conditions.aspx
Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application.
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
Specifications
Length: 24 (609), 36 (914) or 48 (1218)
Width: 4-5/8 (118)
Depth: 4-9/16 (116)
Weight: 14 lbs (6.3 kg)
All dimensions are inches (millimeters) unless otherwise indicated.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: WC 2 32 120 MVOLT GEB10IS
For shortest lead times, configure product using standard options (shown in bold).
WC
Series
WC
All purpose
wall bracket
Number of lamps Lamp type
Diffuser type
Voltage
Options
1
2
(blank) Matte white opal acrylic
A12
#12 pattern acrylic
FAC
Matte white opal acrylic
with front metal fascia
FA12
#12 pattern acrylic with
front metal fascia
120
277
347
MVOLT
CO
S1
17
25
32
14T5
21T5
28T5
24T5HO
39T5HO
54T5HO
17W T8 (24")
25W T8 (36")
32W T8 (48")
14W T5 (24")
21W T5 (36")
28W T5 (48")
24W T5HO (24")
39W T5HO (36")
54W T5HO (48")
Grounded convenience outlet, 120V only (bottom right)1
Pull-chain switch; installed bottom left; on/off operation of
all lamps only (120V only)1
GEB10IS Electronic ballast, ≤ 10% THD, instant-start
GEB10PS T5 and T8 electronic ballasts, ≤ 10% THD, programmed start
MB
Architectural black finish
RMT
Row mount2
CSA
CSA Certified.
EL
Emergency battery pack (nominal 300 lumens; see Life
Safety Section)3
Notes
1 For optional locations, consult factory.
2 Includes continuous row joiner band. Not available with CSA;
models requiring CSA labeling ship standard with joiner band.
Cannot field install.
3 Not available on 2ft.
FLUORESCENTWC
WC Wall Bracket, All Purpose
MOUNTING DATA
DIMENSIONS
All dimensions are inches (millimeters) unless otherwise indicated.
C = 7/8 (22) Dia. K.O.
D = 11/16 (18) Dia. K.O.
E = 2(51) Dia. K.O.
G = 1-1/8 (29) Dia. K.O.
PHOTOMETRICS
Calculated using the zonal cavity method in accordance with IESNA LM41 procedure. Vertical and horizontal illuminance is calculated with fixture mounting 7' above floor. Reflectances 80/50/20%. Full photometric
data available upon request.
WC 2 32
Report LTL 5736
Initial point illuminance on wall and horizontal work surface (fc)
X and Y coordinates are on 12" centers.
X
9
8
7
6
Vert. 5
4
3
2
1
Y
1
2
3
4
5
Horiz. 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
B
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
C
6
6
3
5
4
3
2
2
2
D
11
18
E
15
31
F
16
33
G
15
31
H
11
18
16
6
4
3
2
2
I
6
6
3
5
4
3
2
2
2
J
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
K
4
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
16
6
3
3
2
2
28
8
4
3
2
2
30
9
4
3
2
2
28
8
4
3
2
2
6
6
6
7
6
6
5
5
5
4
3
3
2
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
5
5
4
3
3
2
8
8
8
8
8
7
6
6
5
4
4
3
3
9
10
10
10
9
9
7
6
6
4
4
4
3
10
11
11
11
10
9
7
7
6
5
4
4
3
10
11
11
11
10
9
7
7
6
5
4
4
3
10
11
11
11
10
9
7
7
6
5
4
4
3
9
10
10
10
9
9
7
6
6
4
4
4
3
8
9
9
9
9
8
7
6
6
4
4
4
3
6
7
7
8
7
7
6
5
5
4
3
3
2
5
6
7
7
7
6
5
5
5
4
3
3
2
WC
FLUORESCENT:
One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012
Phone: 800-858-7763
Fax: 770-929-8789
www.lithonia.com
© 2000-2013 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 10/31/2013
Intended Use
Louvered (2PM4 deep-cell)
parabolic luminaires for
use in open-area indoor
applications where optical
control, visual comfort and
light cut-off are important.
Construction
4"-deep, (2PM2: 2"-deep),
premium-grade aluminum
louvers in choice of finishes,
shipped in thermally sealed
polyethylene wrapper.
Design optimized for
use with T8 lamps and
electronic ballasts.
Hemmed sides and ends provide smooth edges for easy
handling during installation.
Integral T-bar safety clips
standard.
Mitered louver corners and
interlocking construction assure precise parabolic shape.
Choice of cell configuration
and lamping.
Electrical
Ballast disconnect provided
standard where required
to comply with U.S. and
Canadian electrical codes.
2PM4
2PM2
Paramax®
Listings
UL Listed, CUL Listed or
CSA Certified to Canadian
standards – optional. NOM
certified – optional.
RECESSED
Parabolic Lighting
PRODUCT INFORMATION
2PM4
Compatible with virtually all
ceiling types and air functions.
PM2: Contoured housing for
superior light control.
2PM2
ORDERING INFORMATION
Series
Trim
2PM4 Paramax®
4" deep,
cell louver
parabolic,
2' wide
2PM2 Paramax®
2" deep,
cell louver
parabolic,
2' wide
G
F
ST
Lay-in grid
Flanged
Screw slot
Ballast configuration
Air function
Number of lamps1
Lamp type1
Number of cells/Louver
Voltage
B No air function
A Air supply/return
D Dual function supply/
return/ heat removal
2
3
4
Not included.
17
U31
U316
32
CF40
Number of cells
6
9
12
16
18
24
32
MVOLT
3473
17W T8 (24")
31W T8 U (1-5/8" leg)
31W T8 U (6" leg)2
32W T8 (48")
40W TT5 (24")
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
GEB10IS
GEB10RS
BINP
BSNP
Louver
LD Low-iridescent
anodized diffuse silver
LS Low-iridescent
anodized specular silver
Options6,7
Ballast
(blank) 1- and/or 2-lamp ballasts per
Lithonia Lighting standards
1/3
One 3-lamp ballast
1/4
One 4-lamp ballast
T8 electronic ballast, ≤10% THD, instant start
T8 electronic ballast, ≤10% THD, progammed rapid start
T8 high-performance ballast, normal ballast factor (.88), instant start4
T8 high-performance ballast, normal ballast factor (.87), step-dim programmed start, 2-lamp only5
EL
EL14
CSA
NOM
Emergency battery pack
Emergency battery pack
Meets Canadian standards
Meets Mexican standards
For additional product information, visit www.lithonia.com.
LAMP TYPE
U316
17, U31, CF40
17, U31, CF40
17, CF40
32
32
32
CONFIGURATIONS
NUMBER OF CELLS
(ROWS X NUMBER IN ROW)
6 (2x3), 9 (3x3), 12 (3x4), 16 (4x4)
6 (2x3), 9 (3x3), 12 (4x3), 16 (4x4)
9 (3x3), 12 (3x4), 16 (4x4)
6 (2x3), 9 (3x3), 12 (4x3), 16 (4x4)
12 (2x6), 16 (2x8), 18 (3x6), 24 (4x6), 32 (4x8)
18 (3x6), 24 (3x8), 32 (4x8)
12 (2x6), 16 (2x8), 18 (3x6), 24 (4x6), 32 (4x8)
2PM2 HEIGHT7
IN. (CM)
4-1/2 (11.4)
4-1/2 (11.4)
4-1/2 (11.4)
4-1/2 (11.4)
4-1/2 (11.4)
4-1/2 (11.4)
4-1/2 (11.4)
2PM4 HEIGHT7
IN. (CM)
6 (15.2)
6 (15.2)
6 (15.2)
6 (15.2)
6 (15.2)
6 (15.2)
6 (15.2)
Drawings are for dimensional detail only and may not represent actual
mechanical configuration. Dimensions are shown in inches (centimeters)
unless otherwise noted.
4-1/2
(11.4)
6
(15.2)
24
(61.0)
2PM4
PSG10
www.lithonia.com | 1-800-858-7763
24
(61.0)
2PM2
Notes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
See Configurations table for lamp and cell compatibility.
Not available on three-lamp fixtures. Use U31.
Available only with CSA option.
Consult www.lithonia.com for additional high-performance ballast options.
Not available in 347V.
Consult www.lithonia.com for other options.
Some options increase fixture depth. Consult factory if plenum depth is a factor.
LITHONIA COMMERCIAL & INDUSTRIAL FLUORESCENT
NOMINAL NUMBER
SIZE
OF LAMPS
2'x2'
2
2'x2'
2
2'x2'
3
2'x2'
4
2'x4'
2
2'x4'
3
2'x4'
4
Example: 2PM4 G B 3 32 18LD MVOLT 1/3 GEB10IS
For shortest lead times, configure products using bolded options.
39
EXIT SIGNS
Specification
PRODUCT INFORMATION
Intended Use
Ideal for applications
requiring general-purpose
emergency lighting exit sign.
LQC
Quantum® Die-Cast Aluminum
Fully overlapping light
seal prevents light leaks.
Universal direction chevron
knockouts are concealed and
easily removed.
Construction
Die-cast aluminum construction - compact housing.
Brushed aluminum faceplate
with matte black electrostatic polymeric trim. Clear
lacquer finish on brushed
face inhibits fingerprints and
other surface contaminants.
Also available in white housing and face.
ORDERING INFORMATION
mounting knockouts and hole
plugs. No exposed hardware.
Die-cast aluminum canopy
provided. Faceplate accessory
kit available for one-face to
two-face field conversion.
Provisions for conduit entry
and pendant mounting.
Dual-voltage input capability
120 or 277 VAC. Emergency
models provided with testswitch, status indicator and
a battery that automatically recharges when normal
power is restored.
U.S. Patent No. 5,739,639.
Other patents pending.
Expected LED life of more
than 10 years.
Universal (top, end or back
mounting). Completely
concealed, easily removed
nickel-cadmium battery to
provide 90 minutes of emergency power if necessary.
Listings
UL Listed. Meets UL924.
Damp location listing 50° to
104°F (10° to 40°C) standard.
Emergency models provided
with maintenance-free, sealed
Example: LQC 1 R EL N
For shortest lead times, configure products using bolded options.
Series
Housing
Number of faces
Letter color
Options
LQC LED
(blank) Matte black, brushed aluminum face
W
White
1 Single face
2 Double face
R Red
G Green
(blank) AC only 120/277V
EL N
120/277 VAC input with nickel-cadmium battery back-up
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
TYPE
Standard LED Red
Standard LED Red
Standard LED Green
Standard LED Green
Emergency LED Red
Emergency LED Red
Emergency LED Green
Emergency LED Green
ELA WG1
ELA WGEXT
ELA WGEXE
ELA B US12
ELA LQCFPK
ELECTRICAL APPLICATION DATA
VOLTAGE
INPUT WATTS
120
.6
277
.7
120
1.0
277
1.2
120
.6
277
.7
120
1.0
277
1.2
MAXIMUM AMPS
.05
.06
.05
.06
.05
.06
.05
.06
ACCESSORIES
ORDER SEPARATELY
Back-mount wireguard
Top-mount wireguard
End-mount wireguard
12" pendant-mount kit with black canopy. To order white canopy,
replace B with W in catalog number. To order 24" or 36" lengths,
replace 12 with 24 or 36.
Brushed/black faceplate kit with red and green sign panel for
one-face to two-face field conversion
White faceplate kit with red and green sign panel for one-face to
two-face field conversion
Drawings are for dimensional detail only and may not represent actual
mechanical configuration. Dimensions are shown in inches (centimeters)
unless otherwise noted.
4-3/4
(12.1)
Shipping weight 4.5 lbs (2.0 kg)
5-3/4
(14.6)
8-1/4
(21.0)
11-3/4
(29.8)
End Mount
8-3/4
(22.2)
8-1/4
(21.0)
2
(5.1)
11-3/4
(29.8)
Back Mount
Top Mount
LITHONIA EMERGENC Y SYSTEMS
ELA W LQCFPK
For additional product information, visit www.lithonia.com.
446
1-800-334-8694 | www.lithonia.com
PSG10
Catalog
Number
Notes
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE — For applications that require medium to high light levels such as manufacturing,
warehousing, storage, retail or task lighting. Ideal for mounting heights up to 25'.
Type
2 LAMP IN WIDE BODY
TYPE 9
Attributes: Heavy-duty design for demanding industrial environments. Pressure-lock lampholders enclosed
in snap-in turret housing. Available in 4' or 8' lengths. 6" lamp spacing of 2-lamp models, 3" lamp spacing
on 3-lamp models. Solid top, 10% or 20% uplight reflectors available, painted after fabrication.
Heavy-Duty Turret Industrial
CONSTRUCTION — Die-embossed reflector constructed of heavy gauge cold-rolled steel.
AF
Finish: Five-stage iron-phosphate pretreatment ensures superior paint adhesion and rust resistance.
Finish is high-gloss baked white enamel.
ELECTRICAL — Thermally protected, resetting, Class P, HPF, UL listed, CSA Certified ballast is standard.
Energy saving and electronic ballasts are sound rated A.
Fixture is suitable for damp locations. AWM, TFN or THHN wire used throughout, rated for required
temperatures.
4' or 8' lengths
1, 2, 3 or 4 lamps
INSTALLATION — For surface or suspended mounting, unit or row installation.
LISTINGS — UL Listed for 25oC ambient temperatures. 120V, 277V and MVOLT are UL Listed and CSA
Certified (standard). 347V is CSA Certified (see Options). NOM Certified (see Options).
WARRANTY — 1-year limited warranty. Full warranty terms located at
www.acuitybrands.com/CustomerResources/Terms_and_conditions.aspx.
Specifications
Ballast warranties provided through the component manufacturers.
Length: 49-13/16 (126.5) or 99-5/8 (253.0)
Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application.
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
H
Width: 13-3/8 (34.0)
Height: 6-5/8 (16.8)
All dimensions are inches (centimeters)
unless otherwise indicated.
ORDERING INFORMATION
For shortest lead times, configure product using bolded options.
Series
Number
of lamps
AFST Solid reflector
AF10 10% uplight apertured
reflector
AF 20% uplight apertured
reflector
For tandem double-length unit,
add prefix T.
Example: TAF10
1
2
3
4
Not
included
Lamp type
32
32W T8 (48”)
48
38W T12 slimline (48”)
96T8
59W T8 slimline (96”)
HO lamps
48HO
60W T12 800MA (48”)
48T8HO 60W T8 slimline (48”)
96HO
110W T12 800mA (96”)
96T8HO 86W T8 300mA (96”)
Voltage
120
277
347
MVOLT
W
Example: AF 3 32 MVOLT GEB10IS
Options
Shipped installed in fixture
GEB
Electronic ballast, <20% THD1
GEB10IS T8 electronic ballast, <10% THD, instant start
GEB10RS T8 electronic ballast, <10% THD, rapid start2
GEB10PS Electronic ballast, <10% THD, programmed start
EL
Emergency battery pack (nominal 300 lumens),
see Life Safety Section3
GLR
Internal fast-blow fusing (add X for external)3
GMF
Internal slow-blow fusing (add X for external) 3
PLF_
TILW
CSA
Plug-in wiring, Specify 1, 2 or
3 branch circuits & hot wires
(A = black, B = red, C = blue,
AB or AC)
Tandem in-line wiring
CSA Certified (347V only)
Accessories
Order as separate catalog number
ACEP
HRUN
HRUN1
SQ_
1B
HC36
THUN
WGAFPV
DLAF ME
DLAF A12
Full-depth endplates (1 pair)
Hooker® T-bar hanger for 5" channel (flush to ceiling)
Hooker® T-bar hanger for 5" channel (1-1/2" from ceiling)
Swivel stem hanger (specify length in 2" increments)
Ceiling spacer (1-1/2" to 2-1/2" from ceiling).
Chain hangers (1 pair, 36" long).
Tong hanger for 5" channel
Wireguard, 4' white (order 2 for 8' fixtures)
4' 30° x 30° metal eggcrate louver (order 2 for 8' fixtures)
4' framed acrylic prismatic lens (order 2 for 8' fixtures)
Notes
1 Available for 96 (T12) and 48HO (T12).
2 Available for 96HO and 347V.
3 Specify voltage.
INDUSTRIAL
AF
AF
MOUNTING DATA
DIMENSIONS
For unit or row installation. Surface or stem mounting.1
A = 1/4 x 1/2 (64 x 13) Oval Hole
UNIT INSTALLATION — Minimum of two hangers required.
C = 7/8 (22) Dia.K.O.
ROW INSTALLATION — One hanger per fixture plus one per row required.
D = 11/16 (17) Dia. K.O.
E = 2 (51) Dia. K.O.
F = 7/16 (111) Dia. K.O.
All dimensions are inches (millimeters).
Specifications subject to change without notice.
SQ
1B
6-5/8
(16.8)
6-5/8
(16.8)
2
(5.1)
HC36
13-3/8
(34.0)
HRUN
13-3/8
(34.0)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Energy (Calculated in accordance with NEMA standard LE-5)
.
LER.FW
ANNUAL
ENERGY COST*
LAMP
DESCRIPTION
LAMP
LUMENS
BALLST
FACTOR
WATTS
74
$3.24
(2) F32T8
2800
.88
60
.
.
.
.
.
.
*Calculated in accordance with NEMA Standards LE-5.
.
.
PHOTOMETRICS
Calculated using the zonal cavity method in accordance with IESNA LM41 procedure. Floor reflectances are 20%. Lamp configurations shown are typical. All data based on 25°C.
Full photometric data on these and other configurations available upon request.
AF 2 32
Report ITL 5711
S/MH 1.4
Coefficient of Utilization
Ceiling80%
70%
50%
Wall 70%50%30% 70%50%30% 50%30%10%
1
2
3
4
5
10
949086
867973
786962
726154
655446
433124
908683
827570
746660
685952
625244
413023
797674
696561
615652
544844
484137
282218
Zonal Lumens Summary
Zone Lumens%Lamp %Fixture
0-30
0-40
0-60
0-90
90-180
0-180
998
1677
3126
4074
1175
5249
17.2
28.9
53.9
70.2
20.3
90.5
19.0
31.9
59.6
77.6
22.4
100.0
AF
INDUSTRIAL: One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012
Phone: 800-315-4963 Fax: 770-981-8191 www.lithonia.com
©1996-2014 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 03/31/14
Catalog Number
Notes
Type
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE
Deep cell parabolic luminaires for use in open area applications and electronic offices where optical control, visual comfort and light cut-off are
important.
ATTRIBUTES
Design optimized for use with T8 lamps and low-profile electronic ballasts.
Choice of diffuse or specular louvers utilizing the latest developments in
louver finishing for minimized louver iridescence.
CONSTRUCTION
Black reveal provides floating louver appearance, conceals optional airsupply slots.
Square cornered end plates improve strength and durability.
Integral T-bar safety clips hold fixture to T-bar securely; no fasteners
required.
Heavy gauge hinges die-formed for maximum strength; spring action
latches concealed in black reveal.
Housing formed from cold-rolled steel. Louver formed from anodized aluminum. No asbestos used in this product.
Overlapping flange and modular ceiling trims available factory installed
with swing gate hangers or field convertible with optional trim and hangers.
FINISH
Five-stage iron-phosphate pretreatment ensures superior paint adhesion.
Painted parts finished with high-gloss, baked white enamel.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Thermally-protected, resetting, Class P, HPF, non-PCB, UL Listed, CSA certified ballast is standard.
Electronic ballasts are sound rated A.
Fixture conforms to UL1570 and is suitable for damp locations. AWM, TFN or
THHN wire used throughout, rated for required temperatures.
LISTING
UL Listed (Standard), CSA Certified or NOM Certified (see Options).
WARRANTY
Guaranteed for one year against mechanical defects in manufacture.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
PARAMAX® Parabolic Troffer
2PM4 2'x4'
4" Deep Louver
Specifications
Length: 24 (609)
Width: 48 (1218)
Depth: 6 (152)
Weight: 36 lbs (16 kg)
Series
2PM4 Paramax
4" deep
cell
parabolic,
2' wide
Trim type
24
(609)
Example: 2PM4 G B 3 32 18LD MVOLT 1/3 GEB10IS
32
Air function
Lamp type
A Air supply/return
32 32W T8 (48")
(slots in side trim)
H Heat removal
(through lamp
cavity, dampers
Number
available)
of lamps
B No air function
2, 3, 4
D Dual function
Not included.
supply/return/
removal
Options2
Voltage
120, 277, 347,
MVOLT1
Others
available.
1/3
1/4
GEB10IS
GEB10RS
EL
LST
PWS1836
GLR
Louver finish
Number
GMF
of cells
LP__
LD Low iridescent
CRE
anodized
12 , 16 , 18 ,
diffuse silver
24, 32
CRM
LS Low iridescent
ACS
anodized
HRD
specular silver
APB
PAF
2R
JP
NOTES:
CSA
1 MVOLT standard for 120V and 277V applications. Some options require voltage specified.
2 Some options increase fixture depth. Consult factory if plenum space is a concern.
NOM
G Grid
F Overlapping
flange
MT Modular fit-in
ST Screw slot
6
(152)
All dimensions are inches (millimeters) unless otherwise specified.
ORDERING INFORMATION
2PM4
48
(1218)
One 3-lamp ballast
One 4-lamp ballast
Electronic ballast, <10% THD, Instant Start
Electronic ballast, <10% THD, Rapid Start
Emergency battery pack (nominal 300 lumens; see
Fluorescent Battery Packs tab)
Tandem fixture pairs (shared ballasts)
6' prewire, 3/8" dia., 18-gauge, 3 wires
Internal fast-blow fuse4
Internal slow-blow fuse4
Lamped; specify lamp type and color
Flanged trim for continuous row mounting (end)
Flanged trim for continuous row mounting (middle)
Air closure strips (A and D models only)
Heat-removal dampers
Air-pattern control blades (A and D models only)
Painted after fabrication (white enamel)
Two reflector channel covers3
Palletized and stretch-wrapped (G and MT trim only)
CSA Certified
NOM Certified
3 Available with 3-lamp 18 or 24 cell only.
4 Must specify voltage.
Fluorescent
Sheet #: PM42x4
PAR-390
2PM4 2'x4' 4" Louver Family
MOUNTING DATA
DIMENSIONS
Continuous row mounting of flanged units requires CRE and CRM trim options
(see options).
Appropriate
Trim Type
Ceiling Type
Exposed grid tee
Concealed grid tee
Concealed Z-spline
Metal pan (consult factory)
Screw slot (consult factory)
Acoustical tile, plaster or plasterboard
on rigid support parallel to lamps
5-1/4
(133)
CL
G
G, ST
F, MT
MT
ST
6
5 (152)
4 (127)
(102)
24
(610)
F
7
(178)
CL
6
5 (152)
4 (127)
(102)
24
(610)
7
(178)
3-1/4
(83)
CL
6
5 (152)
4 (127)
(102)
NOTE:
1 Recommended rough-in dimensions for F trim fixtures 24"x48"
(Tolerance is +1/4", -O”). Swing-gate range 1-7/16" to 3-7/16", span
23-1/2" to 26-7/16".
24
(610)
Energy (Calculated in accordance with NEMA standard LE-5)
PHOTOMETRICS
Calculated using the zonal cavity method in accordance with IESNA LM41 procedures.
Floor reflectances are 20%. Lamp configurations shown are typical. Full photometric data
on these and other configurations available upon request.
LER.FP
ANNUAL
ENERGY COST *
61 (LD louver)
55 (LD louver)
50 (LD louver)
$3.93
$4.36
$4.80
LAMP
DESCRIPTION
LAMP
LUMENS
BALLAST
FACTOR
WATTS
(2) 32WT8
(3) 32WT8
(4) 32WT8
2850
2850
2850
.87
.88
.88
58
85
112
* Comparative yearly lighting energy cost per 1000 lumens.
Coefficients of Utilization
20%
80%
70%
50% 30% 10%
50% 30% 10%
72 72 72
74 74 74
65 63 62
66 64 63
58 55 53
59 56 53
52 48 45
53 49 46
47 43 39
48 43 40
43 38 35
43 38 35
39 34 31
39 34 31
35 31 27
36 31 27
32 28 25
33 28 25
30 25 22
30 25 22
28 23 20
28 23 20
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone Lumens % Lamp % Fixture
0° - 30° 1859.3 21.7
35.2
0° - 40° 3105.6 36.3
58.8
0° - 60° 4948.2 57.9
93.7
0° - 90° 5282.5 61.8
100.0
90° - 180° 0.0
0.0
0.0
0° - 180° 5282.5 61.8
100.0
50%
50% 30% 10%
69 69 69
63 61 60
56 54 51
51 47 45
46 42 39
41 37 34
38 33 30
34 30 27
32 27 24
29 25 22
27 23 20
pf
pc
pw
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Coefficients of Utilization
20%
80%
70%
50% 30% 10%
50% 30% 10%
84 84 84
82 82 82
75 73 71
74 71 69
67 63 59
65 62 58
59 54 50
58 53 50
53 47 43
52 47 43
47 41 37
47 41 37
43 37 32
42 36 32
39 33 29
38 33 29
35 29 25
35 29 25
32 27 23
32 26 23
30 24 21
29 24 21
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone Lumens % Lamp % Fixture
0° - 30° 1189.9 20.9
29.6
0° - 40° 2033.4 35.7
50.6
0° - 60° 3673.1 64.4
91.5
0° - 90° 4015.0 70.4
100.0
90° - 180° 0.0
0.0
0.0
0° - 180° 4015.0 70.4
100.0
50%
50% 30% 10%
78 78 78
71 69 67
63 60 57
56 52 49
50 46 42
45 40 37
41 36 32
37 32 28
34 29 25
31 26 23
29 24 21
TEST NO: LTL14436
LUMINAIRE CATALOG NO.: 2PM4 G B 4 32 32LD 1/4 GEB
LUMENS PER LAMP: 2850
LAMPS PER LUMINAIRE: 4
pf
pc
pw
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RCR
RCR
pf
pc
pw
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TEST NO: LTL14494
LUMINAIRE CATALOG NO.: 2PM4 G B 2 32 12LD GEB
LUMENS PER LAMP: 2850
LAMPS PER LUMINAIRE: 2
RCR
TEST NO: LTL14421
LUMINAIRE CATALOG NO.: 2PM4 G B 3 32 18LD 1/3 GEB
LUMENS PER LAMP: 2850
LAMPS PER LUMINAIRE: 3
Coefficients of Utilization
20%
80%
70%
50% 30% 10%
50% 30% 10%
67 67 67
65 65 65
60 59 57
59 57 56
54 51 49
53 51 48
49 45 42
48 45 42
44 40 37
43 40 37
40 36 33
39 35 32
36 32 29
36 32 29
33 29 26
33 29 26
31 26 23
30 26 23
28 24 21
28 24 21
26 22 19
26 22 19
50%
50% 30% 10%
62 62 62
57 55 54
51 49 47
46 44 41
42 39 36
38 35 32
35 31 29
32 28 26
30 26 23
27 24 21
25 22 19
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone Lumens % Lamp % Fixture
0° - 30° 2446.4 21.5
38.4
0° - 40° 3921.0 34.4
61.5
0° - 60° 6078.7 53.3
95.4
0° - 90° 6374.3 55.9
100.0
90° - 180° 0.0
0.0
0.0
0° - 180° 6374.3 55.9
100.0
Lithonia Lighting
Sheet #: PM4-2x4
©1995 Acuity Lighting Group, Inc., Rev. 10/06
Fluorescent
One Lithonia Way, Conyers, GA 30012
Phone: 800-858-7763 Fax: 770-929-8789
www.lithonia.com
Catalog
Number
2LB-2-32-MVOLT-GEB10IS
Notes
2 LAMP IN WIDE BODY
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE — For wall or ceiling mounting - vertical or horizontal. Ideal for stairwells, corridors,
lavatories or any utility application. Certain airborne contaminants can diminish integrity of
acrylic. Click here for Acrylic Environmental Compatibility table for suitable uses.
Type
TYPE 9
Commercial Wall Bracket
CONSTRUCTION — Easy maintenance design for individual or tandem mounting. For row mounting,
order RMT option.
WC
Heavy-duty code grade steel. Metal parts are die-formed.
Finish: Five-stage iron-phosphate pretreatment ensures superior paint adhesion and rust resistance.
Standard finish is high-gloss, high reflectivety, baked white polyester (architectural black available).
OPTICS — Available with high performance A12 pattern clear acrylic or low brightness matte white opal
acrylic. Front metal fascia eliminates direct illumination. Provides up/down distribution.
ELECTRICAL — AWM, TFN or THHN wire used throughout, rated for required temperatures. UL/CSA
Ballast disconnect provided where required to comply with US and Canadian codes.
T5 and T8
2', 3' or 4' Lengths
1 or 2 Lamps
INSTALLATION — End caps spring-loaded for easy diffuser removal.
LISTINGS — UL Listed to US and Canadian safety standards. Optional: Mexico NOM.
WARRANTY — 1-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at
www.acuitybrands.com/CustomerResources/Terms_and_conditions.aspx
Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application.
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
Specifications
Length: 24 (609), 36 (914) or 48 (1218)
Width: 4-5/8 (118)
Depth: 4-9/16 (116)
Weight: 14 lbs (6.3 kg)
All dimensions are inches (millimeters) unless otherwise indicated.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: WC 2 32 120 MVOLT GEB10IS
For shortest lead times, configure product using standard options (shown in bold).
WC
Series
WC
All purpose
wall bracket
Number of lamps Lamp type
Diffuser type
Voltage
Options
1
2
(blank) Matte white opal acrylic
A12
#12 pattern acrylic
FAC
Matte white opal acrylic
with front metal fascia
FA12
#12 pattern acrylic with
front metal fascia
120
277
347
MVOLT
CO
S1
17
25
32
14T5
21T5
28T5
24T5HO
39T5HO
54T5HO
17W T8 (24")
25W T8 (36")
32W T8 (48")
14W T5 (24")
21W T5 (36")
28W T5 (48")
24W T5HO (24")
39W T5HO (36")
54W T5HO (48")
Grounded convenience outlet, 120V only (bottom right)1
Pull-chain switch; installed bottom left; on/off operation of
all lamps only (120V only)1
GEB10IS Electronic ballast, ≤ 10% THD, instant-start
GEB10PS T5 and T8 electronic ballasts, ≤ 10% THD, programmed start
MB
Architectural black finish
RMT
Row mount2
CSA
CSA Certified.
EL
Emergency battery pack (nominal 300 lumens; see Life
Safety Section)3
Notes
1 For optional locations, consult factory.
2 Includes continuous row joiner band. Not available with CSA;
models requiring CSA labeling ship standard with joiner band.
Cannot field install.
3 Not available on 2ft.
FLUORESCENTWC
WC Wall Bracket, All Purpose
MOUNTING DATA
DIMENSIONS
All dimensions are inches (millimeters) unless otherwise indicated.
C = 7/8 (22) Dia. K.O.
D = 11/16 (18) Dia. K.O.
E = 2(51) Dia. K.O.
G = 1-1/8 (29) Dia. K.O.
PHOTOMETRICS
Calculated using the zonal cavity method in accordance with IESNA LM41 procedure. Vertical and horizontal illuminance is calculated with fixture mounting 7' above floor. Reflectances 80/50/20%. Full photometric
data available upon request.
WC 2 32
Report LTL 5736
Initial point illuminance on wall and horizontal work surface (fc)
X and Y coordinates are on 12" centers.
X
9
8
7
6
Vert. 5
4
3
2
1
Y
1
2
3
4
5
Horiz. 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
B
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
C
6
6
3
5
4
3
2
2
2
D
11
18
E
15
31
F
16
33
G
15
31
H
11
18
16
6
4
3
2
2
I
6
6
3
5
4
3
2
2
2
J
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
K
4
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
16
6
3
3
2
2
28
8
4
3
2
2
30
9
4
3
2
2
28
8
4
3
2
2
6
6
6
7
6
6
5
5
5
4
3
3
2
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
5
5
4
3
3
2
8
8
8
8
8
7
6
6
5
4
4
3
3
9
10
10
10
9
9
7
6
6
4
4
4
3
10
11
11
11
10
9
7
7
6
5
4
4
3
10
11
11
11
10
9
7
7
6
5
4
4
3
10
11
11
11
10
9
7
7
6
5
4
4
3
9
10
10
10
9
9
7
6
6
4
4
4
3
8
9
9
9
9
8
7
6
6
4
4
4
3
6
7
7
8
7
7
6
5
5
4
3
3
2
5
6
7
7
7
6
5
5
5
4
3
3
2
WC
FLUORESCENT:
One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012
Phone: 800-858-7763
Fax: 770-929-8789
www.lithonia.com
© 2000-2013 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 10/31/2013
1(76&5((1
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
9HUVLRQ
31
5HY%
Copyright Notice
Copyright © 1998-2002 NetScreen Technologies, Inc. All rights
reserved.
NetScreen, NetScreen Technologies, and the NetScreen logo are
registered trademarks of NetScreen Technologies, Inc. and
NetScreen-5, NetScreen-5XP, NetScreen-10, NetScreen-25,
NetScreen-50, NetScreen-100, NetScreen-204, NetScreen-208,
NetScreen-500, NetScreen-1000, NetScreen-5200, NetScreen5400, NetScreen-Global PRO, NetScreen-Global PRO Express,
NetScreen-Remote, GigaScreen, and NetScreen ScreenOS are
trademarks of NetScreen Technologies, Inc. All other trademarks
and registered trademarks are the property of their respective
companies.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose,
without receiving written permission from NetScreen
Technologies, Inc.
NetScreen Technologies, Inc.
350 Oakmead Parkway
Sunnyvale, CA 94085 U.S.A.
www.netscreen.com
FCC Statement
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A
devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the
FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. The equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case users will be required to correct the
interference at their own expense.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B
devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and
may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in
accordance with NetScreen’s installation instructions, it may cause
interference with Radio and television reception. This equipment
has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital devices in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of
the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide
reasonable protection against such interference in a residential
installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
•
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
Caution: Changes or modifications to this product could void the
user's warranty and authority to operate this device.
Disclaimer
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR
THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE
INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE
PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS
REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE
SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT
YOUR NETSCREEN REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
3UHIDFHY
*XLGH2UJDQL]DWLRQ Y
&RPPDQG/LQH,QWHUIDFH&/,&RQYHQWLRQVY
&/,&RPPDQG9DULDEOHV Y
9DULDEOH1RWDWLRQY
&RPPRQ&/,9DULDEOHV YL
&/,&RPPDQG6\QWD[ YLL
'HSHQGHQF\'HOLPLWHUV YLL
1HVWHG'HSHQGHQFLHV YLL
$YDLODELOLW\RI&/,&RPPDQGVDQG)HDWXUHVYLLL
1HW6FUHHQ3XEOLFDWLRQV YLLL
+RZ7R*HW0RUH,QIRUPDWLRQ YLLL
2YHUYLHZ 7KH1HW6FUHHQ0RGHO 7KH)URQW3DQHO $VVHW5HFRYHU\3LQKROH
6WDWXVDQG3RZHU/('V 3&0&,$)ODVK&DUG6ORW '%&RQVROH3RUW (WKHUQHW,QWHUIDFHV
7KH5HDU3DQHO
3RZHU6XSSOLHV ,QVWDOOLQJWKH'HYLFH *HQHUDO,QVWDOODWLRQ*XLGHOLQHV
3HUIRUPLQJ(TXLSPHQW5DFN,QVWDOODWLRQ (TXLSPHQW5DFN,QVWDOODWLRQ*XLGHOLQHV 5DFN0RXQWLQJWKH'HYLFH
&RQQHFWLQJWKH3RZHU :LULQJD'&3RZHU6XSSO\ &RQQHFWLQJWKH1HW6FUHHQ'HYLFHWR2WKHU'HYLFHV ,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
LLL
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
&RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFH 2SHUDWLRQDO0RGHV 7UDQVSDUHQW0RGH 5RXWH0RGH
7KH1HW6FUHHQ,QWHUIDFHV
&RQQHFWLQJWKH'HYLFHDVD6LQJOH6HFXULW\*DWHZD\ &RQQHFWLYLW\([DPSOHV 3HUIRUPLQJ'HYLFH&RQQHFWLRQ (VWDEOLVKLQJDQ+$&RQQHFWLRQ%HWZHHQ'HYLFHV
3HUIRUPLQJ,QLWLDO&RQQHFWLRQDQG&RQILJXUDWLRQ (VWDEOLVKLQJD7HUPLQDO(PXODWRU&RQQHFWLRQ
&KDQJLQJ<RXU/RJLQ1DPHDQG3DVVZRUG
6HWWLQJ3RUWDQG,QWHUIDFH,3$GGUHVVHV 9LHZLQJ&XUUHQW,QWHUIDFH6HWWLQJV 6HWWLQJWKH,3$GGUHVVRIWKH0DQDJHPHQW,QWHUIDFH 6HWWLQJWKH,3$GGUHVVIRUWKH8QWUXVW=RQH,QWHUIDFH $OORZLQJ2XWERXQG7UDIILF
&KDQJLQJ<RXU/RJLQ1DPHDQG3DVVZRUG &RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFHIRU7HOQHWDQG:HE8,6HVVLRQV
6WDUWLQJD&RQVROH6HVVLRQ8VLQJ7HOQHW (VWDEOLVKLQJD*8,0DQDJHPHQW6HVVLRQ
5HVHWWLQJWKH'HYLFHWR)DFWRU\'HIDXOW6HWWLQJV 8VLQJ&/,&RPPDQGVWR5HVHWWKH'HYLFH 8VLQJWKH$VVHW5HFRYHU\3LQKROHWR5HVHWWKH'HYLFH 6SHFLILFDWLRQV $
1HW6FUHHQ$WWULEXWHV (OHFWULFDO6SHFLILFDWLRQ (QYLURQPHQWDO ),36&HUWLILFDWLRQ 6DIHW\&HUWLILFDWLRQV (0,&HUWLILFDWLRQV ,QGH[
LY
L
1HW6FUHHQ
3UHIDFH
The NetScreen-100 is a versatile, purpose-built, high-performance security device that
provides IPSec VPN and firewall services for medium and large enterprise offices and
service-provider environments.
This manual describes the NetScreen-100 device. It also explains how to perform physical
installation, establish connectivity through terminal emulator programs, and perform
initial configuration tasks. It also shows how to establish Telnet and WebUI sessions with
the device.
*8,'(25*$1,=$7,21
This manual has three chapters and one appendix.
Chapter 1, "Overview" provides a detailed overview of the NetScreen-100 device,
including its front-panel and back-panel features.
Chapter 2, "Installing the Device" describes how to rack-mount the NetScreen-100 device,
and connect the device on a network.
Chapter 3, "Configuring the Device" details how to connect the device to the network and
perform initial configuration.
Appendix A, "Specifications" provides a list of physical specifications about the NetScreen100 device.
&200$1'/,1(,17(5)$&(&/,&219(17,216
Some of the instructions and examples provided in this manual contain CLI commands,
most of which perform initial configuration of the NetScreen-100 device. The command
examples use conventions for variables and syntax.
&/,&RPPDQG9DULDEOHV
Most NetScreen CLI commands have changeable parameters that affect the outcome of
command execution. NetScreen documention represents these parameters as variables.
Such variables may include names, identification numbers, IP addresses, subnet masks,
numbers, dates, and other values.
9DULDEOH1RWDWLRQ
The variable notation used in this manual consists of italicized parameter identifiers. For
example, the set arp command uses four identifiers, as shown here:
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
Y
3UHIDFH
set arp
{
ip_addr mac_addr interface
age number |
always-on-dest |
no-cache
}
where
•
ip_addr represents an IP address.
•
mac_addr represents a MAC address.
•
interface represents a physical or logical interface.
•
number represents a numerical value.
Thus, the command might take the following form:
ns-> set arp 172.16.10.11 00e02c000080 ethernet2
where 172.16.10.11 is an IP address, 00e02c000080 is a MAC address, and ethernet2 is
a physical interface.
&RPPRQ&/,9DULDEOHV
The following list shows the CLI variable notation used in NetScreen documents.
YL
date_str
A date value.
dom_name
A domain name, such as “acme” in www.acme.com.
filename
The name of a file.
interface
A physical or logical interface.
id_num
An identification number.
ip_addr
An IP address.
key_str
A key, such as a session key, a private key, or a public key.
loc_str
A location of a file or other resource.
mac_addr
A MAC address.
mask
A subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.0 or /24.
name_str
The name of an item, such as an address book entry.
number
A numeric value, usually an integer, such as a threshold or a maximum.
pol_num
A policy number.
port_num
A number identifying a logical port.
pswd_str
A password.
ptcl_num
A number uniquely identifying a protocol, such as TCP, IP, or UDP.
serv_name
The name of a server.
shar_secret
A shared secret value.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&RPPDQG/LQH,QWHUIDFH&/,&RQYHQWLRQV
spi_num
A Security Parameters Index (SPI) number.
string
A character string, such as a comment.
time_str
A time value.
url_str
A URL, such as www.acme.com.
vrouter
A local virtual router, such as trust-vr or untrust-vr.
zone
The name of a security zone.
&/,&RPPDQG6\QWD[
Each CLI command description in this manual reveals some aspect of command syntax.
This syntax may include options, switches, parameters, and other features. To illustrate
syntax rules, some command descriptions use dependency delimiters. Such delimiters
indicate which command features are mandatory, and in which contexts.
'HSHQGHQF\'HOLPLWHUV
Each syntax description shows the dependencies between command features by using
special characters.
•
The { and } symbols denote a mandatory feature. Features enclosed by these
symbols are essential for execution of the command.
•
The [ and ] symbols denote an optional feature. Features enclosed by these
symbols are not essential for execution of the command, although omitting such
features might adversely affect the outcome.
•
The | symbol denotes an “or” relationship between two features. When this
symbol appears between two features on the same line, you can use either
feature (but not both). When this symbol appears at the end of a line, you can
use the feature on that line, or the one below it.
1HVWHG'HSHQGHQFLHV
Many CLI commands have nested dependencies, which make features optional in some
contexts, and mandatory in others. The three hypothetical features shown below
demonstrate this principle.
[ feature_1 { feature_2 | feature_3 } ]
In this example, the delimiters [ and ] surround the entire clause. Consequently, you can
omit feature_1, feature_2, and feature_3, and still execute the command successfully.
However, because the { and } delimiters surround feature_2 and feature_3, you must
include either feature_2 or feature_3 if you include feature_1. Otherwise, you cannot
successfully execute the command.
The following example shows some of the set interface command’s feature dependencies.
set interface vlan1 broadcast { flood | arp [ trace-route ] }
1HW6FUHHQ
YLL
3UHIDFH
The { and } brackets indicate that specifyng either flood or arp is mandatory. By contrast,
the [ and ] brackets indicate that the arp option’s trace-route switch is not mandatory.
Thus, the command might take any of the following forms:
ns-> set interface vlan1 broadcast flood
ns-> set interface vlan1 broadcast arp
ns-> set interface vlan1 broadcast arp trace-route
$YDLODELOLW\RI&/,&RPPDQGVDQG)HDWXUHV
As you execute CLI commands using the syntax descriptions in this manual, you may find
that certain commands and command features are unavailable for your NetScreen device
model.
Because NetScreen devices treat unavailable command features as improper syntax,
attempting to use such a feature usually generates the unknown keyword error
message. When this message appears, confirm the feature’s availability using the ?
switch. For example, the following commands list available options for the set vpn
command:
ns-> set vpn ?
ns-> set vpn vpn_name ?
ns-> set vpn gateway gate_name ?
1(76&5((138%/,&$7,216
To obtain technical documentation for any NetScreen product, visit www.netscreen.com/
support/manuals.html. To access the latest NetScreen documentation, see the Current
Manuals section. To access archived documentation from previous releases, see the
Archived Manuals section.
To obtain the latest technical information on a NetScreen product release, see the release
notes document for that release. To obtain release notes, visit www.netscreen.com/support
and select Software Download. Select the product and version, then click Go. (To
perform this download, you must be a registered user.)
If you find any errors or omissions in the following content, please contact us at the e-mail
address below:
[email protected]
+2:72*(7025(,1)250$7,21
To receive important news on product updates, please visit our Web site at
www.netscreen.com.
YLLL
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&KDSWHU
2YHUYLHZ
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the NetScreen-100 system devices,
interfaces, power supplies, and fan assemblies.
Topics in this chapter include:
•
“The NetScreen-100 Model” on page 2
•
“The Front Panel” on page 2
•
–
“Status and Power LEDs” on page 3
–
“Asset Recovery Pinhole” on page 2
–
“PCMCIA Flash Card Slot” on page 3
–
“DB25 Console Port” on page 3
–
“Ethernet Interfaces” on page 4
“The Rear Panel” on page 4
–
“Power Supplies” on page 4
Note: For safety warnings and instructions, please refer to the NetScreen Safety Guide.
The instructions in this guide warn you about situations that could cause bodily injury.
Before working on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical
circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&KDSWHU2YHUYLHZ
7+(1(76&5((102'(/
The NetScreen-100 is a chassis-based, rack-mountable network security device with three
ethernet 10/100 BaseT interface ports (Trusted, DMZ, and Untrusted). The figure below
shows a NetScreen-100 device.
Asset Recovery Pinhole
PCMCIA Flash Card Slot
Status and Power LEDs
Trusted
DMZ
Untrusted
DB25 Console Port
7+()52173$1(/
The front panel of the NetScreen-100 device includes:
•
An Asset Recovery Pinhole
•
A Status LED
•
A Power LED
•
A PCMCIA Flash Card slot
•
A DB25 Console port
•
Three Ethernet interfaces (Trusted, DMZ, and Untrusted)
$VVHW5HFRYHU\3LQKROH
The Asset Recovery Pinhole is a switch that resets the device to its original default
settings. To use this switch, insert a stiff wire (such as a straightened paper clip) into the
pinhole.
Warning! Because resetting the device restores it to the original factory default
configuration, any new configuration settings are lost, and the firewall and all VPN service
become inoperative.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
7KH)URQW3DQHO
6WDWXVDQG3RZHU/('V
The front panel of each NetScreen-100 device has a Status LED and a Power LED.
LED Name Purpose
Status
Power
System Status
Power Supply
Color
Meaning
solid amber
At initial power up.
solid green
At startup and while performing diagnostics.
blinking green
Normal operation.
blinking red
Error detected.
green
Power supply is functioning correctly.
dark
Power supply failure.
3&0&,$)ODVK&DUG6ORW
The NetScreen-100 device supports a PCMCIA ATA-compatible flash card. Supported
cards include the SanDisk 96-MB and 20-MB CompactFlash. The device automatically
detects the presence of a flash card and records the event log to it.
'%&RQVROH3RUW
The Console port is a DB-25 serial console port connector. This port is for performing local
configuration and administration using a vt100 terminal emulator program.
1HW6FUHHQ
&KDSWHU2YHUYLHZ
(WKHUQHW,QWHUIDFHV
Each Ethernet port is a 10/100 auto-sensing Interface with two link LEDs. The left LED
indicates network traffic, and the right LED indicates an active network link.
Network Traffic:
Blinking = link activity
Network Link:
On = link is up
Off = link is down
7+(5($53$1(/
The figure below shows the back panel of a NetScreen-100 device (with an AC power
supply.)
Power Outlet
Power Switch
Fuse Cover
Note: Certain export restrictions may apply to international customers. Check with your
sales representative.
3RZHU6XSSOLHV
A NetScreen-100 device can have an AC power supply or a DC power supply.
The DC power supply can operate on one or two DC feeds ranging from -36V to -72V.
When you use two feeds, they share the load. If one feed fails, the other automatically
assumes the full load.
The internal fuse for the DC power supply is a 3.15A/250V, fast-acting fuse. This is not
replaceable.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&KDSWHU
,QVWDOOLQJWKH'HYLFH
This chapter describes how to install a device on an equipment rack or desktop, and how
to configure the device on a network.
Topics in this chapter include:
•
•
•
•
“General Installation Guidelines” on page 6
“Performing Equipment-Rack Installation” on page 6
– “Equipment Rack Installation Guidelines” on page 6
– “Rack-Mounting the Device” on page 7
“Connecting the Power” on page 7
“Wiring a DC Power Supply” on page 8
Note: For safety warnings and instructions, please refer to the NetScreen Safety Guide.
The instructions in this guide warn you about situations that could cause bodily injury.
Before working on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical
circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&KDSWHU,QVWDOOLQJWKH'HYLFH
*(1(5$/,167$//$7,21*8,'(/,1(6
Observing the following precautions can prevent injuries, equipment failures and
shutdowns.
•
Never assume that the power supply is disconnected from a power source.
Always check first.
•
Room temperature might not be sufficient to keep equipment at acceptable
temperatures without an additional circulation system. Ensure that the room in
which you operate the device has adequate air circulation.
•
Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist.
•
Look carefully for possible hazards in your work area, such as moist floors,
ungrounded power extension cables, frayed power cords, and missing safety
grounds.
Warning! To prevent abuse and intrusion by unauthorized personnel, it is extremely
important to install the NetScreen system in a locked-room environment.
3(5)250,1*(48,30(175$&.,167$//$7,21
Although you can install a NetScreen-100 device on a desktop, it is advisable to install the
device in an equipment rack if possible.
(TXLSPHQW5DFN,QVWDOODWLRQ*XLGHOLQHV
The location of the chassis and the layout of your equipment rack or wiring room are
crucial for proper system operation.
Use the following guidelines while configuring your equipment rack.
•
Enclosed racks must have adequate ventilation. An enclosed rack should have
louvered sides and a fan to provide cooling air.
•
When mounting a chassis in an open rack, ensure that the rack frame does not
block the intake or exhaust ports. If you install the chassis on slides, check the
position of the chassis when it is seated all the way into the rack.
•
In an enclosed rack with a ventilation fan in the top, equipment higher in the
rack can draw heat from the lower devices. Always provide adequate ventilation
for equipment at the bottom of the rack.
•
Baffles can isolate exhaust air from intake air. The best placement of the baffles
depends on the airflow patterns in the rack.
You can mount the device in a standard 19-inch equipment rack. Rack mounting requires
the following tools:
•
1 Phillips-head screwdriver
•
Rack-compatible screws
•
The supplied front-mount brackets
You can only front-mount a NetScreen-100 device.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&RQQHFWLQJWKH3RZHU
5DFN0RXQWLQJWKH'HYLFH
To mount the NetScreen-100 device on your equipment rack:
1.
Screw the front mount bracket to the side of the chassis.
2.
Screw the front mount bracket to the rack, as shown below.
&211(&7,1*7+(32:(5
To connect the power supply to the NetScreen-100 device:
1.
Plug the female end of a power cable into the male power receptacles on the back
of the system.
2.
Turn the Power switch ON.
1HW6FUHHQ
&KDSWHU,QVWDOOLQJWKH'HYLFH
:,5,1*$'&32:(56833/<
The DC power supply, ON/OFF switch, and terminal blocks, are located in the back of the
chassis of the power supply unit.
Power Switch
DC Power
Terminal Blocks
Warning: You must shut off current to the DC feed wires before connecting the wires to the
power supplies. Also, make sure that the ON/OFF switches are in the OFF position (right
side pressed in).
NetScreen-100 devices can operate on one feed alone or two feeds. To connect DC power
feeds to the terminal blocks, do the following:
1.
Strip the ends of the power cables.
2.
Loosen the three screws in the top of the block. (These are captive screws, which
you cannot completely remove.)
3.
Insert the -48V DC power feed wires into the two outside receptacles of the
terminal block
4.
Insert the 0V DC feed wires into the center receptacle.
5.
Tighten the screws over the receptacles.
&211(&7,1*7+(1(76&5((1'(9,&(7227+(5
'(9,&(6
To connect the device, use the ethernet interfaces (Trusted, DMZ, and Untrusted). The
purpose of each interface depends upon the security zone to which it is bound.
By default, the zone and interface bindings are as follows:
•
Trusted is bound to the Trust security zone by default.
Connect this interface using a twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors.
•
DMZ is bound to the DMZ security zone by default.
Connect this interface using a twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&RQQHFWLQJWKH1HW6FUHHQ'HYLFHWR2WKHU'HYLFHV
•
Untrusted is bound to the Untrust security zone by default.
Connect this interface using a twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors.
The default IP address of each ethernet interface is 0.0.0.0.
For information on interfaces and security zones, see “The NetScreen-100 Interfaces” on
page 13.
1HW6FUHHQ
&KDSWHU,QVWDOOLQJWKH'HYLFH
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&KDSWHU
&RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFH
This chapter describes how to perform initial configuration on a NetScreen-100 device
once you have mounted it in a rack or desktop, plugged in the necessary cables, and
turned the power on.
Topics in this chapter include:
•
“Operational Modes” on page 12
–
“Transparent Mode” on page 12
–
“Route Mode” on page 12
•
“The NetScreen-100 Interfaces” on page 13
•
“Connecting the Device as a Single Security Gateway” on page 13
–
“Connectivity Examples” on page 14
–
“Performing Device Connection” on page 15
•
“Establishing an HA Connection Between Devices” on page 16
•
“Performing Initial Connection and Configuration” on page 18
•
•
–
“Establishing a Terminal Emulator Connection” on page 18
–
“Changing Your Login Name and Password” on page 19
–
“Setting Port and Interface IP Addresses” on page 19
“Configuring the Device for Telnet and WebUI Sessions” on page 21
–
“Starting a Console Session Using Telnet” on page 21
–
“Establishing a GUI Management Session” on page 22
“Resetting the Device to Factory Default Settings” on page 23
Note: For safety warnings and instructions, please refer to the NetScreen Safety Guide.
The instructions in this guide warn you about situations that could cause bodily injury.
Before working on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical
circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&KDSWHU&RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFH
23(5$7,21$/02'(6
The NetScreen-100 device supports two device modes, Transparent mode and Route
mode. The default mode is Transparent.
7UDQVSDUHQW0RGH
In Transparent mode, the NetScreen-100 device operates as a Layer-2 bridge. Because the
device cannot translate packet IP addresses, it cannot perform Network Address
Translation (NAT). Consequently, for the device to access the Internet, any IP address in
your trusted (local) networks must be routable and accessible from untrusted (external)
networks.
In Transparent mode, the IP addresses for the Layer-2 security zones V1-Trust, V1-DMZ,
and V1-Untrust are 0.0.0.0, thus making the NetScreen device invisible to the network.
However, the device can still perform firewall, VPN, and traffic management according to
configured security policies.
5RXWH0RGH
In Route mode, the NetScreen-100 device operates at Layer 3. Because you can configure
each interface using an IP address and subnet mask, you can configure individual
interfaces to perform NAT.
•
When the interface performs NAT services, the device translates the source IP
address of each outgoing packet into the IP address of the untrusted port. It also
replaces the source port number with a randomly-generated value.
•
When the interface does not perform NAT services, the source IP address and
port number in each packet header remain unchanged. Therefore, to reach the
Internet your local hosts must have routable IP addresses.
For more information on NAT, see the NetScreen Concepts and Examples ScreenOS
Reference Guide.
Important! Performing the setup instructions below configures your device in Route
mode. To configure your device in Transparent mode, see the NetScreen Concepts and
Examples ScreenOS Reference Guide.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
7KH1HW6FUHHQ,QWHUIDFHV
7+(1(76&5((1,17(5)$&(6
Each NetScreen-100 device provides ethernet interfaces for access and connectivity. In
addition, there are logical (non-physical) interfaces that perform special Layer-2 or
management functions.
Status and Power LEDS
Console Port
Ethernet Interfaces
Trusted, DMZ, Untrusted
The configurable interfaces available on a NetScreen-100 device are as follows:
Interface Type
Ethernet interfaces
Description
• Trusted Bound to the V1-Trust security zone by default. Connect this
interface using a twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors.
• DMZ Bound to the V1-DMZ security zone by default. Connect this interface
using a twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors.
• Untrusted Bound to the V1-Untrust security zone by default. Connect this
interface using a twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors.
Layer-2 interfaces
vlan1 specifies logical interface used for management and for VPN traffic
termination while the NetScreen device is in Transparent mode.
v1-trust specifies a logical Layer-2 interface bound to the V1-Trust zone.
v1-untrust specifies a logical Layer-2 interface bound to the V1-Untrust zone.
v1-dmz specifies a logical Layer-2 interface bound to the V1-DMZ zone.
Tunnel interfaces
tunnel.n specifies a logical tunnel interface. This interface is for VPN traffic.
&211(&7,1*7+('(9,&($6$6,1*/(6(&85,7<*$7(:$<
There are many ways to connect a NetScreen-100 device to your network system. In most
cases, the device serves as a single security gateway that protects a LAN (usually
connected to the device from a switch or a hub).
1HW6FUHHQ6HULHV
&KDSWHU&RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFH
&RQQHFWLYLW\([DPSOHV
In the following example, a NetScreen-100 device connects to the protected LAN through
the Trusted interface (bound to the Trust security zone). The device connects externally
to a router through the Untrusted interface (bound to the Untrust security zone).
Internet
5RXWHU
Straight-Through Cable
Trust Zone
Untrust Zone
Cross-Over Cable
LAN
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&RQQHFWLQJWKH'HYLFHDVD6LQJOH6HFXULW\*DWHZD\
In the following example, a NetScreen-100 device connects to a protected LAN through
the Trusted ethernet interface (bound to the Trust security zone) and to a protected DMZ
through the DMZ ethernet interface (bound to the DMZ security zone). The device
connects externally to a router through the Untrusted ethernet interface (bound to the
Untrust security zone).
Internet
Router
Untrust Zone
Straight-Through Cable
Trust Zone
DMZ Zone
Cross-Over Cables
3HUIRUPLQJ'HYLFH&RQQHFWLRQ
Note: If you have multiple NetScreen-100 devices, install and configure them one at a time.
Because they all share the same default vlan1 IP address and subnet mask (192.168.1.1/
24), you might encounter IP address conflicts.
To set up the NetScreen-100 network connections:
1.
Place the NetScreen-100 device in a rack (see “Rack-Mounting the Device” on
page 11) or on a desktop.
2.
Confirm that the power connection to the device is turned OFF (“0” pressed in).
3.
Connect the provided power cable from the power outlet to the power supply.
4.
Connect the device to the network (see examples above).
5.
Turn the NetScreen-100 device power switch ON, then turn the other network
device power switches ON. (If all cables are connected correctly, the link light for
each connection glows.)
1HW6FUHHQ6HULHV
&KDSWHU&RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFH
(67$%/,6+,1*$1+$&211(&7,21%(7:((1'(9,&(6
To assure continuous traffic flow in the event of system failure, you can cable and
configure two NetScreen devices in a redundant cluster. The devices propagate all
network, configuration and session information to each other. Should one device fail, the
other takes over the traffic processing.
Note: For the NetScreen-100, the HA interface is usually DMZ.
The following diagram shows a typical HA setup for NetScreen-100 devices.
Internet
Router
Router
Layer-3 Switch 1
Layer-3 Switch 2
Straight-Through Cable
Straight-Through Cable
Device 1
To Untrusted
Device 2
To Untrusted
10/100 BaseT Cable
From DMZ to DMZ
From Trusted
From Trusted
Cross-Over Cable
Cross-Over Cable
Switch 3
LAN
Switch 4
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
(VWDEOLVKLQJDQ+$&RQQHFWLRQ%HWZHHQ'HYLFHV
To cable two NetScreen-100 devices together for HA and connect them to the network:
Note: The cabling instructions given below reproduce the configuration shown here.
However, this is not the only possible HA configuration. In addition, the instructions
assume that all physical ports and interfaces are still set at their default settings. If you
have changed the port and interface configurations, the instructions below might not work
properly.
1.
(Optional) Install the NetScreen-100 devices in an equipment rack (see
“Equipment Rack Mounting” on page 12).
2.
Make sure that all ON/OFF power supply switches are OFF.
3.
Connect the power cables to each NetScreen-100 power supply and connect them
to a power source.
Note: Whenever you deploy two NetScreen-100 devices in an HA cluster, connect
each to a different power source, if possible. If one power source fails, the other
source might still be operative.
4.
Connect a 10/100 BaseT cable from the DMZ port on Device 1 to the DMZ port
on Device 2.
'HYLFH
5.
On Device 1, connect a crossover cable from the Trusted port to the switch
labeled “Switch 3.”
6.
On Device 1, connect a straight-through cable from the Untrusted port to the
switch labeled “Layer 3 switch 1.”
'HYLFH
7.
On Device 2, connect a crossover cable from the Trusted port to the switch
labeled “Switch 4.”
8.
On Device 2, connect a straight-through cable from the Untrusted port to the
switch labeled “Layer 3 switch 2.”
6ZLWFKHV
9.
Cable together the switches labeled “Switch 3” and “Switch 4.”
10.
Cable together the switches labeled “Layer 3 switch 1” and “Layer 3 switch 2.”
11.
Cable the switches labeled “Layer 3 switch 1” and “Layer 3 switch 2” to routers.
Note: The switch ports must be defined as 802.1Q trunk ports, and the external routers
must be able to use either Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) or Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol (VRRP). For the best configuration method, see the documentation
for your switch or router.
12.
Turn the power switches for all devices ON.
For more advanced HA configurations, see the NetScreen Concepts and Examples
ScreenOS Reference Guide.
1HW6FUHHQ6HULHV
&KDSWHU&RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFH
3(5)250,1*,1,7,$/&211(&7,21$1'&21),*85$7,21
To establish the first console session with the NetScreen-100 device, use a vt100 terminal
emulation program through the provided DB9/DB25 serial cable.
(VWDEOLVKLQJD7HUPLQDO(PXODWRU&RQQHFWLRQ
To establish an initial console session:
1.
Plug the DB9 end of the supplied DB9/DB25 serial cable into the serial port of
your PC. (Be sure that the DB9 is seated properly and secured with
thumbscrews.)
2.
Plug the DB25 end of the cable into the Console port of the NetScreen-100
device. (Be sure that the DB25 is seated properly and secured with
thumbscrews.)
3.
Launch a Command Line Interface (CLI) session between your PC and the
NetScreen-100 device using a standard serial terminal emulation program such
as Hilgreave Hyperterminal (provided with your Windows PC). The settings
should be as follows:
• Baud Rate to 9600
• Parity to No
• Data Bits to 8
• Stop Bit to 1
• Flow Control to none
4.
Press the ENTER key to see the login prompt.
5.
At the login prompt, type netscreen.
6.
At the password prompt, type netscreen.
Note: Use lowercase letters only. Both login and password are case-sensitive.
7.
(Optional) By default, the console times out and terminates automatically after
10 minutes of idle time. To change this timeout interval, execute the following
command:
set console timeout number
where number is the length of idle time in minutes before session termination.
To prevent any automatic termination, specify a value of 0.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
3HUIRUPLQJ,QLWLDO&RQQHFWLRQDQG&RQILJXUDWLRQ
&KDQJLQJ<RXU/RJLQ1DPHDQG3DVVZRUG
Because all NetScreen products use the same login name and password (netscreen), it is
highly advisable to change your login name and password immediately. Enter the
following commands:
set admin name name_str
set admin password pswd_str
save
For information on creating different levels of administrators, see “Administration” in the
NetScreen Concepts and Examples ScreenOS Reference Guide.
6HWWLQJ3RUWDQG,QWHUIDFH,3$GGUHVVHV
Through the CLI, you can execute commands that set IP address and subnet mask values
for most of the physical interfaces.
9LHZLQJ&XUUHQW,QWHUIDFH6HWWLQJV
To begin the configuration process, it is advisable to view existing port settings by
executing the following command:
get interface
This command displays current port names, IP addresses, MAC addresses, and other
useful information.
6HWWLQJWKH,3$GGUHVVRIWKH0DQDJHPHQW,QWHUIDFH
To make an interface work as the management interface, you must set the IP address and
subnet mask to the same address range as your PC (or LAN).
To configure the Trusted interface to serve as a management interface:
1.
Determine the IP address and subnet mask for your PC (or LAN).
2.
Assign the IP address and subnet mask to the Trusted interface by executing
the following command:
set interface trust ip ip_addr/mask
where ip_addr is the IP address and mask is the subnet mask. For example, to
set the IP address and subnet mask of Trusted ethernet interface to
10.100.2.183/16:
set interface trust ip 10.100.2.183/16
3.
Enable management on the ethernet1 interface by executing the following
command:
set interface trust manage
4.
(Optional) To confirm the new interface settings, execute the following
command:
get interface trust
1HW6FUHHQ6HULHV
&KDSWHU&RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFH
6HWWLQJWKH,3$GGUHVVIRUWKH8QWUXVW=RQH,QWHUIDFH
The NetScreen-100 device usually communicates with external devices through an
interface bound to the Untrust zone (such as the Untrusted interface). To allow an
interface to communicate with external devices, you must assign it a public IP address.
To set the IP address and subnet mask for the Untrusted interface:
1.
Choose an unused public IP address and subnet mask.
2.
Set the Untrusted interface to this IP address and subnet mask by executing
the following command:
set interface untrust ip ip_addr/mask
where ip_addr is the IP address and mask is the subnet mask. For example, to
set the IP address and subnet mask of the Untrusted interface to
172.16.16.183:
set interface untrust ip 172.16.2.183/16
3.
(Optional) To confirm the new port settings, execute the following command:
get interface untrust
$OORZLQJ2XWERXQG7UDIILF
By default, the NetScreen-100 device does not allow inbound or outbound traffic, nor does
it allow traffic to or from the DMZ. To permit (or deny) traffic, you must create access
policies.
The following CLI command creates an access policy that permits all kinds of outbound
traffic, from any host in your trusted LAN to any device on the untrusted network.
set policy from trust to untrust any any any permit
save
Important! Your network might require a more restrictive policy than the one created in
the example above. The example is NOT a requirement for initial configuration. For
detailed information about access policies, see the NetScreen Concepts and Examples
ScreenOS Reference Guide.
You can also use the Outgoing Policy Wizard in the WebUI management application to
create access policies for outbound traffic. See “Establishing a GUI Management Session”
on page 22 for information on accessing the WebUI application.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
&RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFHIRU7HOQHWDQG:HE8,6HVVLRQV
&KDQJLQJ<RXU/RJLQ1DPHDQG3DVVZRUG
Because all NetScreen products use the same default login name and password
(netscreen), it is highly advisable to change them immediately.
To change the login name and password:
set admin name name_str
set admin password pswd_str
save
Note: If you forget your password, see “Resetting the Device to Factory Default Settings” on
page 23.
&21),*85,1*7+('(9,&()257(/1(7$1':(%8,6(66,216
In addition to terminal emulator programs, you can use Telnet (or dialup) to establish
console sessions with the NetScreen-100 device. In addition, you can start management
sessions using the NetScreen WebUI, a web-based GUI management application.
6WDUWLQJD&RQVROH6HVVLRQ8VLQJ7HOQHW
To establish a Telnet session with the NetScreen-100 device:
1.
Connect an RJ-45 cable from the Trusted interface to the internal switch,
router, or hub in your LAN (see “Connecting the Device as a Single Security
Gateway” on page 13).
2.
Open a Telnet session, specifying the current IP address for the Trusted
interface. For example, in Windows, click Start >> Run, enter telnet ip_addr
(where ip_addr is the address of the Trusted interface), and then click OK.
For example, if the current IP address of the Trusted interface is 10.100.2.183,
enter:
telnet 10.100.2.183
3.
At the Username prompt, type your user name (default is netscreen).
4.
At the Password prompt, type your password (default is netscreen).
Note: Use lowercase letters only. Both Username and Password are casesensitive.
5.
(Optional) By default, the console times out and terminates automatically after
10 minutes of idle time. To change this timeout interval, execute the following
command:
set console timeout number
where number is the length of idle time in minutes before session termination.
To prevent any automatic termination, specify a value of 0.
1HW6FUHHQ6HULHV
&KDSWHU&RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFH
(VWDEOLVKLQJD*8,0DQDJHPHQW6HVVLRQ
To access the NetScreen-100 device with the WebUI management application:
1.
To use the Trusted interface as the management interface, you must set the IP
address and subnet mask to the same address range as your PC (or LAN). See
“Setting Port and Interface IP Addresses” on page 19.
2.
Launch your browser, enter the IP address of the Trusted interface in the URL
field, and then press Enter.
For example, if you assigned the Trusted interface an IP address of
10.100.2.183/16, enter the following:
10.100.2.183
The NetScreen WebUI software displays the Enter Network Password prompt.
Figure 3-1 Enter Network Password Dialog Box
3.
Enter netscreen in both the User Name and Password fields, then click OK.
(Use lowercase letters only. The User Name and Password fields are both case
sensitive.)
The NetScreen WebUI application window appears.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
5HVHWWLQJWKH'HYLFHWR)DFWRU\'HIDXOW6HWWLQJV
5(6(77,1*7+('(9,&(72)$&725<'()$8/76(77,1*6
If you lose the admin password, you can use one of the following procedures to reset the
NetScreen device to its default settings. This destroys any existing configurations, but
restores access to the device.
Warning! Resetting the device will delete all existing configuration settings, and the
firewall and VPN service will be rendered inoperative.
Note: After you successfully reset and reconfigure the NetScreen device, you should back up
the new configuration setting. As a precaution against lost passwords, you should back up
a new configuration that contains the NetScreen default password. This will ensure a
quick recovery of a lost configuration. You should change the password on the system as
soon as possible.
8VLQJ&/,&RPPDQGVWR5HVHWWKH'HYLFH
To perform this operation, you need to make a console connection, as described in
“Establishing a Terminal Emulator Connection” on page 18.
Note: By default the device recovery feature is enabled. You can disable it by entering the
following CLI command: unset admin device-reset
1.
At the login prompt, type the serial number of the device.
2.
At the password prompt, type the serial number again.
The following message appears:
!!! Lost Password Reset !!! You have initiated a command to reset the device to
factory defaults, clearing all current configuration, keys and settings. Would you
like to continue? y/[n]
3.
Press the y key.
The following message appears:
!! Reconfirm Lost Password Reset !! If you continue, the entire configuration of
the device will be erased. In addition, a permanent counter will be incremented to
signify that this device has been reset. This is your last chance to cancel this
command. If you proceed, the device will return to factory default configuration,
which is: System IP: 192.168.1.1; username: netscreen; password: netscreen.
Would you like to continue? y/[n]
4.
Press the y key to rest the device.
You can now login in using netscreen as the default username and password.
1HW6FUHHQ6HULHV
&KDSWHU&RQILJXULQJWKH'HYLFH
8VLQJWKH$VVHW5HFRYHU\3LQKROHWR5HVHWWKH'HYLFH
You can also reset the device and restore the factory default settings by pressing the asset
recovery pinhole. To perform this operation, you need to make a console connection, as
described in “Establishing a Terminal Emulator Connection” on page 18.
1.
Locate the asset recovery pinhole on the front panel (see “The Front Panel” on
page 2). Using a thin, firm wire (such as a paper clip), push the pinhole for four
to six seconds and then release.
A serial console message states that the “Configuration Erasure Process has
been initiated” and the system sends an SNMP/SYSLOG alert. The Status LED
blinks amber once every second.
2.
Wait for one-half to two seconds.
After the first reset is accepted, the power LED blinks green; the device is now
waiting for the second push. The serial console message now reads, “Waiting for
2nd confirmation.”
3.
Push the reset pinhole again for four to six seconds.
The Status LED lights amber for one-half second, and then returns to the
blinking green state.
4.
The device resets to its original factory settings.
When the device resets, the Status LED will turn amber for one-half second and
then return to the blinking green state. The serial console message states
“Configuration Erase sequence accepted, unit reset.” The system generates
SNMP and SYSLOG alerts to configured SYSLOG or SNMP trap hosts.
Note: During a reset, there is no guarantee that the final SNMP alert sent to the
receiver before the reset will be received.
5.
The device now reboots.
If you do not follow the complete sequence, the reset process cancels without any
configuration change and the serial console message states, “Configuration Erasure
Process aborted.” The status LED returns to blinking green. If the unit did not reset, an
SNMP alert is sent to confirm the failure.
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
$SSHQGL[$
6SHFLILFDWLRQV
$
This appendix provides general system specifications for the NetScreen-100 device.
•
“NetScreen-100 Attributes” on page 2
•
“Electrical Specification” on page 2
•
“Environmental” on page 2
•
“FIPS Certification” on page 2
•
“Safety Certifications” on page 2
•
“EMI Certifications” on page 2
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
$
$SSHQGL[$6SHFLILFDWLRQV
1(76&5((1$775,%87(6
Height:
1.75 inches
Depth:
10.8 inches
Width:
17.5 inches
Weight:
8 pounds
(/(&75,&$/63(&,),&$7,21
AC voltage:
100-240 VAC +/- 10%
DC voltage:
-36 to -72 VDC
AC Watts:
45 Watts
DC Watts:
50 Watts
(19,5210(17$/
Temperature
Operating
Normal altitude
32 - 105° F, 0 - 40° C
Relative humidity
10-90%
Non-condensing
10-90%
The maximum normal altitude is 0 - 12,000 feet (0 - 3,660 meters)
),36&(57,),&$7,21
FIPS 140-1 Level 1
6$)(7<&(57,),&$7,216
UL, CUL, CSA
(0,&(57,),&$7,216
FCC class A, BSMI, CE class A, C-Tick, VCCI class A
$
1HW6FUHHQ
,QGH[
,QGH[
$
,
asset recovery 23
IP address
conflicts 15
%
Back panel 4
&
Cables
connections 15
power 15
RJ-45 connectors 3, 8, 13
twisted pair 8, 9, 13
cabling
network interfaces 21
power supply 17
changing login and password 19
Configuration
multiple devices 15
connecting the power supply 7
connecting, system to other devices 8
Connectivity 8, 15
console
changing timeout 18, 21
Console port 3
console session, establishing 18
'
DC power supply, wiring 8
*
guide organization v
+
high availability 16
high availability, establishing an HA connection 16
1HW6FUHHQ
/
LEDs 4
Link lights 4, 15
login name
changing (CLI) 21
login, changing 19
0
management port, setting an IP address 19
management session 22
Management sessions 22
mounting 7
Multiple devices 15
1
NetScreen Publications viii
3
password
changing (CLI) 21
forgetting 23
password, changing 19
port settings, viewing 19
Ports
console 3
ethernet 4
Power
supply 15
power supplies
DC, wiring 8
power supply, connecting 7
L
,QGH[
5
9
Rack 6, 15
mounting 6
rack installation guidelines 6
reset 23
Ventilation 6
viewing port settings 19
LL
,QVWDOOHU·V*XLGH
Dimension Info
Cable Diameter Range: 22-26 AWG
Depth Metric: 3.175 mm
Height Metric: 88.9 mm
Width Metric: 482.6 mm
Height U S: 3.5 in
General Info
Mod Jack Wiring: 8 pos (1,2,3,6)
Number Of Ports: 48
10/100Base-T Fast Ethernet Panel, 48 ports / 1,2,3,6
OR-838045326
OVERVIEW
10/100Base-T Fast Ethernet Panel, 48 ports / 1,2,3,6
FEATURES
• High performance design
• Front and rear designation strips
• Supports Ortronics color-coded icons
BENEFITS
• Exceeds 10/100Base-T requirements
• Easy labeling
• Additional identification for designations
Technical Info
Category Rating: Category 5
Performance Rating: 10/100Base-T
Construction Info
Component1: Panel - Material1: 0.125"
Aluminum, Finish_Plating1: Painted black texture, with white silkscreen
Component2: Linear modular contact Material2: Phosphor bronze, Finish_Plating2:
50 micron in gold or GTX
Component3: 25-pair contacts - Material3:
Copper, Finish_Plating3: Gold over nickel
Listing Agency Info
FCC
UL E131600
BUY AMERICAN ACT COMPLIANCE
Country of Origin: MEXICO
Buy American Act Status: Trade Agreement
Act Compliant
Page 1 of 11
Samsung - 60" Class (60" Diag.) - LED
- 1080p - Smart - 3D - HDTV - Silver
Enlarge
Model: UN60H7150AFXZA
Customer Rating:
$ 1,699.99
ON SALE
SKU: 4324008
4.7 (448 customer reviews)
Regular Price: $1,999.99
You Save: $300.00
Screen Class Size
46"
55"
60"
Overview
65"
FREE DELIVERY
on TVs 51" and larger
75"
Specifications
Ratings & Reviews
Accessories
Protection & Services
Specifications
Specs:
Details:
Warranty Terms - Parts
1 year limited
Warranty Terms - Labor
1 year limited
Width
53.63 inches
Color Category
Silver
3D Technology
Yes
Cable(s) Included
HDMI
Curved Screen
No
Digital Tuner
Yes
Description:
Also known as an ATSC (Advanced Television Systems
Committee) tuner; this is a type of television tuner that allows
reception of digital television (DTV) channels transmitted by
television stations that use ATSC standards.
ENERGY STAR Certified
No
Devices carrying the Energy Star service mark, such as computer
products and peripherals, kitchen appliances, buildings and other
products, generally use 20% to 30% less energy than required by
federal standards.
Estimated Annual Electricity Use
102 kilowatt hours
Estimated Annual Operating Cost
11 United States dollars
Headphone Jack
No
Media Card Slot
No
Number Of Component Video Inputs
1
Component video typically offers the best analog video signals
available in consumer electronics. This uses no compression and
offers no real limit in color depth or resolution.
Number Of Composite Video Inputs
2
Composite video relays standard-definition signals, but is
frequently included on HDTVs, as the interface's audio jack can be
shared with a component video input.
Number Of DVI Inputs
0
Digital Visual Interface (DVI) is a video interface standard designed
to maximize the visual quality of digital display devices and is
designed primarily for carrying uncompressed digital video data to
a display.
Number Of HDMI Inputs
4
The High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) is an all-digital
audio/video interface capable of transmitting uncompressed
streams.
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 2 of 11
Specs:
Details:
Description:
Number Of HDMI Outputs
0
The High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) is an all-digital
audio/video interface capable of transmitting uncompressed
streams.
Number Of Speakers
2
Number Of USB Port(s)
1
PC Input
No
Product Depth With Stand
10.5 inches
Product Depth Without Stand
1.38 inches
Product Height With Stand
32.88 inches
Product Height Without Stand
31.25 inches
Product Weight With Stand
46.5 pounds
Product Weight Without Stand
42.1 pounds
Refresh Rate
240Hz
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a serial bus standard to interface
devices.
Refresh rate is how many times per second the image changes on
the screen. Higher refresh rate helps in reducing the motion blur on
fast moving scenes. It is measured in Hertz and is a measurement
of frequency, the number of cycles per second.
Remote Control Type
Smart Touch
Maximum Resolution
1080 x 1920
Resolution is defined by the number of individual dots (pixels) that
a display uses to create an image. The total number of pixels in a
display is expressed as the number of horizontal pixels by the
number of vertical pixels.
Screen Size
60 inches
Screen Size Class
60 inches
Smart Capable
Yes
Instant Content Supported
ESPN ScoreCenter|Facebook|HBO
GO|Hulu
Plus|Netflix|Pandora|Skype|YouTube
Display Type
LED
Vertical Resolution
1080p
VESA Wall Mount Standard
400mm x 400mm
The group size measurement of a screen. This differs from a
screen size measured diagonally from corner to corner.
A series of industry-wide interface standards, created by the Video
Electronics Standards Association and designed to promote
uniformity and intercompatibility among video displays and
mounting hardware. The standards define approved hole patterns
and hardware specifications, ensuring that VESA-compliant
"universal" mounting brackets will accommodate TVs across
multiple brands.
Video Input(s)
Component video|Composite video|HDMI
Wall Mountable
Yes
EPEAT Qualified
Yes
EPEAT is the definitive global rating system for greener electronics.
It is an easy to use resource for purchasers, manufacturers,
resellers and others to identify environmentally preferable devices.
The EPEAT system combines strict, comprehensive criteria for
design, production, energy use and recycling with ongoing
independent verification of manufacturer claims.
TV/DVD Combo
No
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 3 of 11
Specs:
Details:
Number Of Analog Audio Outputs
1
Number Of Digital Optical Audio
1
Description:
Outputs
V-Chip
Yes
This blocks the display of television programs based on their rating.
Broadcasters are required to encode an electronic signal in TV
programs indicating the level of violence, language, and sexual
content. Parents can program the TV with a rating so that when the
V-Chip reads a show's signal, it will prevent it from displaying if it is
above the rating.
EPEAT Level
Silver
UPC
887276680767
Indicates EPEAT Level to which this devices is certified to.
Product images, including color, may differ from actual product appearance.
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 4 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 5 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 6 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 7 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 8 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 9 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 10 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 11 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/samsung-60-class-60-diag--led-1080p-smart-3d-hdtv-silver/43... 1/6/2015
Page 1 of 11
Sanus - Full-Motion TV Wall Mount for
Most 51" - 70" Flat-Panel TVs - Black
$ 349.99
Model: VLF525-B1
Customer Rating:
FREE SHIPPING
Enlarge
Overview
Specifications
SKU: 9384041
4.6 (232 customer reviews)
Ratings & Reviews
Specifications
Specs:
Details:
Warranty Terms - Parts
10 years limited
Warranty Terms - Labor
10 years limited
Height
18-3/4"
Width
30-9/10"
Depth
3-5/8" - 25"
Weight
23.5 pounds
Compatibility
Most 51" - 70" flat-panel TVs weighing up
to 125 lbs.
Mount Type
Full-Motion
UPC
793795526267
Description:
Product images, including color, may differ from actual product appearance.
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
Page 2 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
Page 3 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
Page 4 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
Page 5 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
Page 6 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
Page 7 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
Page 8 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
Page 9 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
Page 10 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
Page 11 of 11
http://www.bestbuy.com/site/sanus-full-motion-tv-wall-mount-for-most-51-70-flat-panel-tv... 1/6/2015
PREMISES COPPER
Category 6
CMR/CMP
Product Description
PREMISES FIBER
Superior Essex Series 77 product line provides exceptional value for jobs
that require standards compliant Category 6 cable at a cost-effective price.
Applications
•
•
•
•
Specifications
OSP FIBER
Pair Count
4
Conductor
Solid annealed copper
AWG (mm)
23 (0.57)
Insulation
CMR: Polyolefin
CMP: FEP
OSP COMPOSITE
CENTRAL OFFICE COPPER
Insulation Colors
Pair 1: ColorTip Light Blue, Blue
Pair 2: ColorTip Light Orange, Orange
Pair 3: ColorTip Light Green, Green
Pair 4: ColorTip Light Brown, Brown
Jacket
CMR: Flame retardant (FR) PVC
CMP: FR, low smoke PVC
Characteristic Impedance (Ohms)
100 ± 15
Nominal Velocity of Propagation (%)
CMR: 71
CMP: 74
Performance Compliance
UL 444
CSA C22.2 No. 214-08
UL 1666
NFPA 262
ANSI/TIA-568-C.2
Article 800, NEC (NFPA 70)
RoHS-compliant
NRTL Programs
UL Verified CAT 6
UL, c(UL) Listed CMR
UL, c(UL) Listed CMP
10BASE-T through 1000BASE-T Ethernet
Power over Ethernet (PoE) – IEEE 802.3af
PoE+ – IEEE 802.3at Type 1 and 2
ATM and token ring
Features
Benefits
• Meets ANSI/TIA-568-C.2
specification
• Provides cost effective solution
• BrakeBox® payout
control system
• Adjustable tension control
on reel prevents over spin
and entangling of cable
• CableID® alpha numeric code
printed every 2 feet
• Allows both ends of a cable run
to be easily identifiable without
the need to seperately label or
tone the cable
• QuickCount® marking system
in feet and meters
• Provides remaining length
of cable on reel
• ColorTip™ circuit
identification system
• Easily identifiable conductor
mates even in low-light
environments
• Color coded box labels
• Easily identifies jacket colors
RDUP/RUS OSP COPPER
Part Numbers and Physical Characteristics
BELL OSP COPPER
Listing
Part Number1
Nominal Diameter
in (mm)
Approx. Weight
lbs/kft (kg/km)
Package
Packages per Pallet
CMR
77-246-xA
0.22 (5.5)
24 (36)
1,000' BrakeBox
27
CMR
77-272-xA
0.22 (5.5)
24 (36)
1,000' Plywood reel
16
CMR
77-240-xA
0.22 (5.5)
24 (36)
1,000' POP™ box
20
CMP
77-246-xB
0.22 (5.5)
25 (37)
1,000' BrakeBox
27
CMP
77-272-xB
0.22 (5.5)
25 (37)
1,000' Plywood reel
16
CMP
77-240-xB
0.22 (5.5)
25 (37)
1,000' POP box
20
Jacket Colors
1Replace “x” with:
Blue = 2
Gray = 3
White = 4
Green = 5
Yellow = 6
Red = 9
Orange = D
Black = E
OSP COPPER WIRE
CANADIAN OSP COPPER
TECHNICAL INFO
A-14
Toll Free 800.551.8948 | Fax 770.657.6807 | SuperiorEssex.com/Comm
Rev 1/12 Ed 11.1
From: Dallas Dean [mailto:[email protected]]
Sent: Wednesday, July 23, 2014 9:30 AM
To: Coppinger, Lisa/KNV
Subject: RE: APC UPS for Barrow
Lisa:
Heat load is about 2 tons, see my email from Monday below for dimensions.
This is the brochure for the Symmetra product line.
Pricing is $105,000 for a 70 kW N+1 Symmetra with external bypass and internal static bypass.
There is no option to put this up against the wall.
I apologize for the delay. I have been traveling in Alaska and in wall to wall meetings and travel while
here.
Dallas Dean
Sr. Data Center Architect
LDP Associates Inc.
Schneider Electric Manufacturer’s Representative
7735 178th Place NE, Suite A, Redmond, WA 98052
(206) 999-0897 Cell
(602) 559-9262 Office
(602) 494-7170 fax
[email protected]
From: Coppinger, Lisa/KNV Sent: Wednesday, July 30, 2014 7:26 AM To: 'Dallas Dean' Cc: Jorgensen, Lawrence; Alto, Bud/ANC; Pratt, Mark/WDC; Mayuga, Onofre/ATL; Coppinger, Lisa/KNV Subject: FW: APC UPS for Barrow Dallas, Thank you for getting back to us quickly. Yes, we settled on: 70 kW N+1 UPS with 28 min battery at 65 kVA, 208 input and 208 output with external bypass and internal static bypass. Pricing is $105,000. Appears the foot print maximum is 6.9’ on the front/back x 3.52’ Deep x 6.6’ high. Plus added required clearances on front/back. Total weight now is 7083lbs. Mark, see weight distribution is below. There can be variation, but Dallas notes what has to be next to each other to work. Dallas, please confirm. Thank you,
-Lisa Lisa Harbrecht Coppinger
Sr. Electrical Engineer, PE*, LEED Green Associate
CH2M HILL Engineering, Inc.
Facilities & Urban Environments
Knoxville, TN
865-560-2836 * PE in the State of TN From: Dallas Dean [mailto:[email protected]] Sent: Tuesday, July 29, 2014 11:34 PM To: Parent, Mark/ANC; Coppinger, Lisa/KNV Cc: Alto, Bud/ANC Subject: RE: APC UPS for Barrow Mark and Lisa: What configuration did you finally settle on? We discussed Symmetra and Traditional UPS. 480 input and 208 output and also 208 input and output. I think our last discussion was 70 kW N+1 UPS with 28 min battery at 65 kVA, 208 input and 208 output. Is that correct? For the 70 kW N+1 version you will have: Two (2) Symmetra Battery Frame – 2,760 Lbs EACH, 23.62”W x 42.13”D x 79.17”H. The battery frames need 36” front and rear clearance and need to be installed next to each other and next to the UPS, module cabinet. One (1) Symmetra Power Module Frame – 1,192 Lbs with 8 modules installed, 709 kW N+1, 23.62”W x 42.13”D x 79.17” One (1) Bypass Panel, MBP – 371 LB, 11.81”W x 78.43”W x 42.08”D, bypass panel needs to be installed next to the power module frame and requires 36” front and rear clearance. Line up will be , battery, battery, power module then bypass from left to right. Or reverse order as long as the power module cabinet is in between the bypass and batteries. Dallas Dean Sr. Data Center Architect LDP Associates Inc. Schneider Electric Manufacturer’s Representative 7735 178th Place NE, Suite A, Redmond, WA 98052 (206) 999‐0897 Cell (602) 559‐9262 Office (602) 494‐7170 fax [email protected] Symmetra PX
Scalable from 10 kW to 500 kW
Parallel-capable up to 2,000 kW
High-performance, right-sized, modular, hot-scalable, three-phase
power protection with ultra-high availability and efficiency for
any size data center or high-density power zone
Industry-leading efficiency, availability,
and performance for small, medium,
and large data centers and mission
critical environments
•R
edundant power and runtime protection in a
single unit
• Fault-tolerant (N+1) design for the highest level
of availability
• Corrected unity power factor using double conversion technology
• Modular and scalable without forced shutdowns
• Space-saving high-density design
• Rack-based for agility and aesthetics
Features and benefits
The APC Symmetra™ PX UPS units are world-class, redundant, hot-scalable, high-efficiency power
protection systems designed to provide high levels of availability. Seamlessly integrating into today’s
state-of-the-art data center designs, the Symmetra PX UPS units are true modular systems. Made up
of dedicated and redundant, hot-swappable modules — power, intelligence, battery and bypass, all
engineered into a design that is easily and efficiently serviceable. This architecture can scale power and
runtime as demand grows, or as higher levels of availability are required.
The Symmetra PX family serves as the core power train that drives APC InfraStruxure™ systems for small,
medium, and large data centers. Highly manageable, each Symmetra PX offer features self-diagnostic
capabilities and standardized modules which mitigate the risk of human error, resulting in increased
overall data center reliability. Optional N+1 module-level redundancy further enhances power protection
and peace of mind without increasing the footprint of your power protection solution.
The Symmetra PX family delivers high availability, extreme agility, and low TCO in an aesthetic form factor.
With industry-leading power density, the Symmetra PX has the ability to fit seamlessly onto the data
center floor or into the back room. Other features include automated predictive diagnostics and extended
battery life which lead to a highly predictable, efficient, and simplified UPS architecture.
Symmetra PX features
Availability
Total Cost of Ownership
Automatic internal bypass
Unity power factor corrected (kW=kVA)
Self-diagnosing, field-replaceable
power modules, battery modules, and
intelligence modules
Intelligent battery management
Redundant intelligence module
Hot-swappable static bypass switch
Configurable for N+0 or N+1
module-level redundancy
Modules feature less than 10-minute
average mean time to repair (MTTR)
Scalability
Extended battery runtime available
Hot-scalable power modules
Hot-swappable battery modules
Toolless module replacement
Battery modules with integrated monitoring
One-year warranty and startup service included
Manageability
Network management included
Remote access to system data over HTTP,
HTTPS, Telnet, SSH, and SNMP (v1&3)
Secondary network management
card supported
Configurable alarm notifications
StruxureWare™ Data Center Expert compatible
SmartSlot™ environmental monitoring,
dry contact/environmental, or building
management system cards
Aesthetic NetShelter™ form factor
StruxureWare for Data Centers Software Suite
In the data center environment, our Symmetra PX UPSs are fully managed through StruxureWare for Data Centers, an
integrated suite of Data Center Infrastructure Management (DCIM) applications. It enables businesses to prosper by
managing their data centers across multiple domains, providing actionable intelligence for an ideal balance of high availability
and peak efficiency throughout the entire data center life cycle. StruxureWare is a key element of Schneider Electric
EcoStruxure™— an integrated hardware and software system architecture for intelligent energy management.
2 | Symmetra PX
Symmetra PX 20
Modular power protection.
Configurable distribution. One enclosure.
Preserve valuable space in your small data center or
data center closet with the Symmetra PX 20 kW. Its
all-in-one design includes modular power protection,
modular battery backup, and user-configurable
power distribution, optimizing every square inch of
its footprint to ensure that your power-protection and
distribution needs are met.
Features
• Adaptable 10 to 20 kW power capacity, with the
option of N+0 or N+1 redundancy up to 20 kW N+1
• Configurable power distribution: a highly
customizable, factory-tested power distribution
solution fitting the needs of any data center
• Dual-mains input, top or bottom feed
• PowerView™ display interface: an easy-to-read
LCD screen allowing you to view UPS, battery, and
power distribution status and configure settings
• Secondary network management card
• Extended runtime battery frames: Up to four
line-up-and-match battery frames can be added
for increased runtime.
Support and Service
Approvals
Included:
• One-year warranty
• UL 1778
• Startup service
• FCC Part 15 Class A
Optional:
• Preventive maintenance
• IEC 61000-3-2
• On-site warranty extension
• Advantage plans
• CSA
• IEC 61000-3-3
Scalable to 20 kW N+1
3 | Symmetra PX
Symmetra PX 40
Compact footprint, robust protection
With Symmetra PX 40, you don’t have to pay a
footprint penalty for peace of mind. This modular
UPS supports the installation of up to five 10
kW power modules, providing up to 40 kW N+1
redundancy from a single enclosure. Providing
40 kW of power and runtime protection in a
single-rack footprint, Symmetra PX 40 is ideal for
small or medium data centers.
Features
• Adaptable 10 to 40 kW power capacity, with the
option of N+0 or N+1 redundancy up to 40 kW N+1
• PowerView display interface: an easy-to-read LCD
screen allowing you to view UPS, battery, and
power distribution status and configure settings
• Extended runtime battery frames (maximum of four)
• Optional 40 kW configurable power distribution
units: a highly customizable, factory-tested
power distribution
Options
Support and Service
• Configurable 40 kW
InfraStruxure power
distribution units
with maintenance
bypass panel
Included:
• One-year warranty
• Service bypass panel
Approvals
• ULc Listed
• Startup service
Optional:
• Preventive maintenance
• On-site warranty
extension
• Advantage plans
• EN 50091-1
• EN 50091-2
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• ISO 14001
• ISO 9001
• UL 1778
• UL 60950
4 | Symmetra PX
Scalable to 40 kW N+1
Symmetra PX 100
The right-sized UPS for demanding
business critical applications
Providing redundancy and high levels of availability
in a two-rack footprint, the modular, hot-scalable
Symmetra PX 100 provides up to 100 kW of
power protection for 208 V deployments. Its
high-performance, hot-swappable batteries reduce
total cost of ownership.
Features
• Scalable from 10 kW to 100 kW N+0
(10 kW to 90 kW N+1)
• Aesthetic APC NetShelter SX form factor
• Hot-swappable battery modules
• Dual input, top or bottom* feed
• PowerView display interface
• Optional 100 kW modular PDU: providing quick
expansion of the power distribution system with
factory-assembled power distribution modules
• Extended runtime battery frames: Up to four battery
frames can be added for increased runtime.
Options
Support and Service
• 300 mm bottom
feed side car
Included:
• One-year warranty
• 100 kW modular power
distribution unit with
maintenance bypass
panel and fully rated
subfeed breaker
(available without
transformer, or with a
600:208 V, 480:208 V, or
208:208 V transformer)
• Startup service
Optional:
• Assembly
• Preventive maintenance
• On-site warranty
extension
• Advantage plans
Scalable to 100 kW
• Seismic kits
• 300 mm maintenance
bypass panel
Approvals
• UL 1778 second edition
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• CE
• EN/IEC 62040-3
• OSHPD
• ENERGY STAR®
*300 mm bottom feed side car required for some bottom feed configurations
5 | Symmetra PX
Symmetra PX 250/500 kW
Modular, scalable, ultra-high-efficiency
power protection for data centers worldwide
The APC Symmetra PX 250/500 kW is a world-class, ultra-high-efficiency power
protection system designed to cost effectively provide high levels of availability
while simplifying rightsizing of your data center. The Symmetra PX 250/500 kW
systems can scale in increments of 25 kW up to 500 kW, and four systems can
be paralleled to deliver up to 2 MW of power protection (1.5 MW with N+1
system-level redundancy).
> Scalable from 25 kW to 500 kW
> Parallel-capable up to 2 MW
Features
Approvals
• Supporting up to four UPS units in parallel with
custom switchgear
• CE
• Parallelable for capacity (2 MW) or system-level
redundancy (1.5 MW N+1)
• FCC part 15
• Patented ultra-high efficiency (96% at 35%
load, 95% at 25% load)
• EN/IEC 62040-1-1
• EN/IEC 62040-2 (class A)
• EN/IEC 62040-3
• N+0 or N+1 module-level and system-level
redundancy
• UL 1778
• Hot-swappable battery modules with
integrated monitoring
• CSA C22.2 No. 107.3-05
• Energy monitoring displays the kWh output
of each UPS
• ENERGY STAR
• UL 60950-1
• UL/ULc listed
• Dual mains, top or bottom feed
Support and Service
• 10-inch LCD touchscreen providing local
access to UPS status and configuration menus
Included:
• One-year warranty
Optional:
• Assembly
• System-wide firmware updates via the USB
port on back of display
• Startup service
• Preventive maintenance
• Support for remote battery installation (battery
sidecar required)
6 | Symmetra PX
• On-site warranty extension
• Advantage plans
Symmetra PX 250/500 options
Extended Runtime
(XR) Frames
Battery Breaker
Enclosure
Install a maximum of eight
battery frames to increase
runtime. Modular,
hot-swappable batteries
can be replaced by a
trained user in under
10 minutes while the
UPS load remains
fully protected.
Install the battery
breaker enclosure, then
use third-party battery
cabinets to supply
runtime to the load.
Third-Party
Battery Cabinet
Power Distribution
Front-access battery
systems provide high
energy storage density
while eliminating the
need to reach over
energized cables or
battery terminals to
install, maintain, or
replace batteries.
Battery Sidecar
Install the batteries
remotely, then connect
the batteries by cables
to the UPS.
Modular power distribution mitigates the need to
predict the future requirements and configurations
of your data center. Factory-assembled power
distribution modules quickly plug in to a backplane
that shields users from dangerous amperage.
The power distribution system simplifies power
management by including output metering, branch
current/circuit monitoring and auto-detection by the
StruxureWare for Data Centers suite of management
options. Multiple power ratings and power cord
lengths for low-to-high power guarantee compatibility
and convenient installation.
Symmetra PX 250/500 kits
Battery Breaker Enclosure
Fuse Kits (500 A and 1000 A)
Air Filters
Optional Terminal Blocks
Bottom Feed Frame
For some configurations
greater than 250 kW,
use the bottom feed
frame to support dual
bottom-feed utility input.
Parallel Cables
Third-party Switchgear Kit
Seismic Kits (not shown)
7 | Symmetra PX
Technical specifications
Symmetra PX 20 kW
Input
Grid system
3P + N + G
Voltage range
177 – 240 V
Frequency
50/60 Hz +/- 3 Hz (auto sensing)
Frequency range
40 – 70 Hz
Power factor (PF)
0.99 at full load
I thd (full load)
< 6%
Nominal input current
61.3 A @ 208 V
Maximum input current
70.9 A (Nominal Vin, 10% charging batteries)
Input current limit
89.4 A
Ouput
Power rating
20 kW
Grid system
3P + N + G, 3P + G
Voltage (nominal)
208 V
Nominal output current
55.5 A @ 208 V
Maximum output current (in bypass @ 125% overload)
69.4 A @ 208 V
Frequency
Output frequency: 57 – 63 Hz, configurable for +/-0.1 Hz and +/-10 Hz
Synchronized slew rate
1 Hz/s
Overload (normal and battery operation)
150% for 30 seconds
V thd
< 2% 100% resistive load
< 6% computer load as defined by EN 50091-3/IEC 62040-3
Load PF
0.5 to 1.0
Bypass
V nominal
208 V
Frequency (nominal)
60 Hz
Frequency (range)
40 – 70 Hz
Nominal input current
61.3 A
Maximum overload input current (125% continuous)
115 A
Efficiency
AC–AC at nominal mains
91.50%
DC–AC at nominal battery voltage
94%
Mechanical
Dimensions (H x W x D)
2,070 x 610 x 902 mm (81.5 x 24 x 35.5 in.)
Weight
UPS, no modules: 301 kg (665 lb.)
UPS fully populated: 818 kg (1,803 lb.)
Environmental
Storage temperature, UPS, and batteries
-15 to 40 °C (5 to 104 °F)
Operating temperature*
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Full load loss at nominal mains (BTU)
5,942 BTU/hr.
Regulatory compliance
CSA, FCC Part 15 Class A, IEC 61000-3-2, IEC 61000-3-3, UL 1778
*For optimum battery life, the operating temperature range is 18 – 27 °C (64 – 80 °F).
8 | Symmetra PX
Technical specifications
Symmetra PX 40 kW
Input
Grid system
3P + N + G
Voltage range
166 – 240 V
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Frequency range
40 – 70 Hz
Power factor (PF)
> 0.96 @ 50% load
> 0.99 at 100% load
I thd (full load)
< 6%
Nominal input current
123 A @ 208V
Maximum input current
162 A (continuous, at min. mains voltage)
Maximum input short-circuit level
30 kA
Ouput
Power rating
40 kW
Grid system
3P + N + G
Voltage (nominal)
208 V
Nominal output current
111 A @ 208 V
Maximum output current (in bypass @ 125% overload)
139 A @ 208 V
Frequency
Output frequency: 57 – 63 Hz, synchronized to input
Overload (normal and battery operation)
150% for 30 seconds
V thd
100% linear load: < 2% THD max. and 1% single harmonic
100% non-linear load: < 5% THD max.
Load PF
From 0.9 leading to 0.8 lagging without any derating
Bypass
V nominal
208 V
Voltage (range)
+/-15% of nominal
Frequency (nominal)
60 Hz
Frequency (range)
40 – 70 Hz
Nominal input current
125 A
Maximum overload input current (125% continuous)
155 A
Efficiency
AC–AC at nominal mains
> 91.5 % @ 100% load
Mechanical
Dimensions (H x W x D)
2,080 x 600 x 915 mm (82 x 24 x 36 in.)
Weight
UPS, no modules: 275 kg (600 lb.)
UPS fully populated: 775 kg (1,708 lb.)
Environmental
Storage temperature, UPS, and batteries
-15 to 40 °C (5 to 104 °F)
Operating temperature*
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Full load loss at nominal mains (BTU)
11,611 BTU/hr.
Regulatory compliance
ULc Listed, EN 50091-1, EN 50091-2, EN 50091-3, FCC Part 15 Class A, ISO 14001, ISO 9001, UL 1778, UL 60950
*For optimum battery life, the operating temperature range is 18 – 27 °C (64 – 80 °F).
9 | Symmetra PX
Technical specifications
Symmetra PX 100 kW
Input
Grid system
3P + N + G
Voltage range
177 – 239 V
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Frequency Range
40 - 70 Hz
Power factor (PF)
> 0.98% @ > 25% load
I thd (full load)
< 5%
Nominal input current
297 A
Maximum input current
327 A (Nominal Vin, 10% charging batteries)
Input current limit
360 A
Maximum input short-circuit level
30 kA
Ouput
Power rating
100 kW
Grid system
3P + N + G
Voltage (nominal)
208 V
Nominal output current
278 A @ 208 V
Frequency
Frequency regulation: 50/60 Hz bypass synchronized, 50/60 Hz +/-0.1% free running
Synchronized slew rate
Programmable to 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6 Hz/s
Overload (normal and battery operation)
150% for 30 seconds
V thd
< 2% @ 100% resistive load, < 6.5% @ 100% SMPS load
Load PF
From 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging without any derating
Bypass
V nominal
208 V
Voltage (range)
+/-10%
Frequency (nominal)
50/60 Hz
Frequency (range)
+/-0.1 Hz, +/-3 Hz, +/-10 Hz (user-selectable)
Nominal input current
278 A @ 278 V
Maximum overload input current (125% continuous)
347 A
Efficiency
AC–AC at nominal mains
up to 95%
Mechanical
Dimensions (H x W x D)
2,011 x 1,200 x 1,070 mm (79.2 x 47.2 x 42.1 in.)
Maximum weight
2849.5 lb (1292.5 kg)
Environmental
Storage temperature, UPS, and batteries
-15 to 40 °C (5 to 104 °F)
Operating temperature*
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Regulatory compliance
UL 1778 second edition, FCC Part 15, CE, OSHPD, ENERGY STAR
*For optimum battery life, the operating temperature range is 18 – 27 °C (64 – 80 °F).
10 | Symmetra PX
Technical specifications
Symmetra PX 250
Symmetra PX 500
Input
Grid system
Single feed: 3P + N + G, 3P + G
Dual feed: 3P + G
Grid parallel system
Voltage range
Single feed: 3P + N + G
Dual feed: 3P + G
+/- 15% for full performance; 408 – 552 V @ 480 V
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Frequency range
40 – 70 Hz with 10 Hz/s slew rate
Power factor (PF)
> 0.995 at load = 100%
> 0.99 at load > 50%
> 0.97 at load > 25%
I thd (full load)
Nominal input current
Maximum input current
Input current limit
< 5%
315 A @ 480 V
630 A @ 480 V
346 A @ 480 V
(Nominal Vin, 10% charging batteries)
693 A @ 480 V
(Nominal Vin, 10% charging batteries)
372 A @ 480 V
745 A @ 480 V
Maximum input short-circuit level
65 kA (50 kA with standard MBwD)
Ouput
Power rating
250 kW
Grid system
500 kW
3P + N + G, 3P + G
Voltage (nominal)
380 V/400 V/415 V/480 V L-L
Nominal output current
301 A @ 480 V
601 A @ 480 V
Maximum output current (in bypass @ 125% overload)
376 A @ 480 V
752 A @ 480 V
Frequency
Synchronized slew rate
Overload (normal and battery operation)
V thd
Load PF
Output frequency: 55 – 65 Hz, configurable for +/- 0.1, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8%
Frequency regulation: 50/60 Hz bypass synchronized, 50/60 Hz +/-0.1% free running
Programmable to 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6 Hz/s
150% for 60 seconds, 125% for 10 min. 100% continuous
< 2% from 0 to 100% linear load, < 3% full non-linear load according to IEC/EN 62040-3
From 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging without any derating
Bypass
V nominal
380 V/400 V/415 V/480 V L-L
Voltage (range)
+/-10% (from selected voltage)
Frequency (nominal)
50/60 Hz
Frequency (range)
+/-0.5%, +/-1%, +/-2%, +/-4%, +/-6%, and +/-8% (user-selectable)
Nominal input current
301 A @ 480 V
601 A @ 480 V
Maximum overload input current (125% continuous)
376 A @ 480 V
752 A @ 480 V
Efficiency
AC–AC at nominal mains
DC–AC at nominal battery voltage
> 96% at 50 – 100% load
> 95% at 25 – 49% load
11 | Symmetra PX
Technical specifications (continued)
Symmetra PX 250
Symmetra PX 500
Minimum (standalone UPS, no batteries):
1,991 x 1,600 x 1,070 mm (78.7 x 63 x 42.1 in.)
Minimum (standalone UPS, no batteries):
1,991 x 1,600 x 1,070 mm (78.7 x 63 x 42.1 in.)
Maximum (UPS with MBwD and 6 min.
battery runtime): 1,991 x 3,100 x 1,070 mm
(78.7 x 121.9 x 42.1 in.)
Maximum (UPS with MBwD and 6 min.
battery runtime): 1,991 x 5,200 x 1,070 mm
(78.7 x 204.7 42.1 in.)
Minimum (standalone UPS, no batteries):
1,057 kg (2,330 lb.)
Minimum (standalone UPS, no batteries):
1,722 kg (3,797 lb.)
Maximum (UPS with MBwD and 6 min.
battery runtime): 4,509 kg (9,940 lb.)
Maximum (UPS with MBwD and 6 min.
battery runtime): 8,336 kg (18,377 lb.)
Mechanical
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
Environmental
Storage temperature, UPS only
-30 to 70 °C (-22 to 158 °F)
Storage temperature, UPS, and batteries
-15 to 40 °C (5 to 104 °F) battery self discharge: approximately 6 – 8 months @ 25 °C;
1 – 2 months @ 45 °C
Operating temperature*
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Full load loss at nominal mains (BTU)
42,759 BTU/hr.
85,517 BTU/hr.
Regulatory compliance
UL Listed, ULc Listed, CE, EN/IEC 62040-2 (class A), FCC part 15, EN/IEC 62040-3, EN/IEC 62040-1-1, UL 1778, UL 60950-1, CSA C22.2 No. 107.3-05, OSHPD, ENERGY STAR
*For optimum battery life, the operating temperature range is 18 – 27 °C (64 – 80 °F).
A Comprehensive Portfolio of Services
Schneider Electric Critical Power & Cooling Services (CPCS) provides the
expertise, services, and support you need for your building, industry, power, or
data center infrastructure. Our world-class life cycle services offer a smart way to
install and maintain your critical applications, ensuring your systems are always
running at peak performance.
©2013 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. Schneider Electric and APC are trademarks owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies. All other
trademarks are property of their respective owners. email: [email protected] • 132 Fairgrounds Road, West Kingston, RI 02892 USA. • 998-1152939_GMA_US
Communicate and Collaborate Better than Ever
The giant touch PC to present, annotate, and collaborate
with people in the room and around the world
Giant Touch Tablet for Your
Conference Room or Classroom
Present, annotate and collaborate on a giant tablet with meeting
participants in the room and around the world.
An InFocus® Mondopad™ puts everything you need to visually
present, capture and share ideas at your fingertips – all
beautifully integrated into a single, cost-effective device.
Mondopad streamlines meetings and allows people to
communicate clearly to get the job done fast. You'll bridge
communication gaps, save time and money on travel, and never
look back.
Key Features






Advanced multi-touch high definition 55 inch display
Flexible and expandable with built-in Windows PC
Digital interactive whiteboard and document annotation
Business-class video conferencing
Share, view and control from your tablet or smartphone
Full copy of Microsoft® Office ensures file compatibility
Designed for Multi-touch
Mondopad’s natural, touch interface changes the way people interact
with information, collaborate and connect. Meetings are more engaging,
content is more immersive, and audiences are more involved.
Mondopad’s edge-to-edge 5-point multi-touch capabilities provide
smooth, quick and accurate performance for all of its presentation,
annotation and collaboration applications.
Video Connect to the World
Add Mondopad as a SIP endpoint on
your video conference server or
service, or install your video
conferencing desktop client onto
Mondopad, just like you would a PC.
If you don't have a video
conferencing system, we have an
affordable video conferencing
solution from Vidtel.
Industry standard collaboration
tools like GoToMeeting®, WebEx™,
Microsoft Lync™ and Adobe®
Connect™ run seamlessly on a
Mondopad.
It’s as easy as downloading an app.
Upgrade Your Conference Room
Never Lose An Idea
The Mondopad combines a powerful and flexible PC with a giant touch
display to create an elegant and cost effective collaboration solution.
 Expandable to meet your
requirements
 Built around industry standards and
55-inch
leading technologies from Intel and
Microsoft
Full HD 1080p
 Easy to upgrade to the latest
(1920 x 1080)
software and tools
 Securely monitor and manage from
anywhere
Use the whiteboard's writing and drawing tools to take notes on
whatever is being presented on screen. This highly-visual medium allows
your teams to communicate more effectively, collaborate in real time, and
never lose an idea.
 Circle or highlight key information
on PPT slides, spreadsheets,
design comps, web pages, and even
on shared content in a video meeting
 Identify information on-screen
to help remote participants
follow along
 Capture and share the notes with
everyone in the meeting right from
the Mondopad
Whiteboard Wizard
The Mondopad's whiteboard and collaboration apps make it easy to
brainstorm and capture and share the ideas.
 A complete set of writing and
drawing tools, pens, highlighters,
shapes and lines are at your
command
 Whiteboard drawings can be
collected, saved and emailed to
meeting participants right from
the Mondopad
 Paste your backgrounds and images
onto a whiteboard session, such as a
grid, flowchart, or other template
Connect, Share, View & Control Content from Any Device
You and your colleagues can securely connect, share and collaborate with
anyone, anywhere – making your meetings more collaborative, productive
and sustainable.
 Securely connect Mondopad to your network via its built-in WiFi so
any authorized user of your network can share, view and control their
visuals from their PC, tablet or smartphone
 Mondopad's WiFi also creates a wireless access point so guests in the
room can easily deliver documents to the display or access the
Internet without connecting to the organization’s private network
 Remote participants see what's on the Mondopad via a web page
served by the Mondopad
Familiar Applications Optimized for Touch
Sharing documents and switching applications during a meeting is
amazingly easy with the Mondopad's intuitive folder structure and 3rd
party app multitasking.
 Add, remove and launch documents from the Mondopad's View/Share
folder, which anyone in the meeting can access
 Quickly switch between multiple Windows apps and the Mondopad app
 Use all of the office documents (PowerPoint, Word, Excel, PDF, JPGs and
more) that you use every day -- all optimized for touch
The Mondopad's aim is to drain
the boring out of business meetings.
CNET Crave
Specifications*
Display
Size
Resolution
Refresh Rate
Viewing Angle
Display Colors
Pixel Pitch
Picture-in-Picture
Video Input Compatibility
Data Input Compatibility
Speakers (Integrated)
Power
Mount
55”
1920 x 1080
60 Hz
±89˚
1.07G (10-bit)
0.63mm
SBS/4 quadrant PiP
Full NTSC, 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p/24, 1080p/30, 1080p/60
VGA (640x480), SVGA (800x600), XGA (1024x768), SXGA (1280x1024), SXGA+ (1400x1050), UXGA (1600x1200), WXGA+
(1440x900), WSXGA+ (1680x1050), WXGA (1280x800), WUXGA (1920x1200)
USB Type-A x 4, HDMI 1.3 x 2, VGA (HD15 VESA), Component, S-Video, Composite, RS232, RCA stereo audio x 2,
3.5 mm stereo mini-jack, USB B to touch screen controller board, Ethernet (RJ45 x 2)
RCA audio stereo (L/R) output for sound bar or other external A/V system
 Edge-to-edge quad camera multi-touch system with support for 5 point gestures and Windows 8
 Glass protection overlay for LCD surface  USB connection to PC from touch system panel board
Stereo 7W x 2
AC 100 to 240V, 50/60Hz
VESA standard 400 x 400mm M6 screws
Processor
Memory
Hard Drive
LAN (2x)
Wi-Fi
Input connections
Output connections
Operating System
Included Software
Intel® Core i5-2520m, QM67 chipset with support for AMT 7.1
4 GB, 8 MB Flash memory
SATA 6Gb/s SSD Intel 520 series 120GB
802.3 10/100/1000 Base-T with Wake on LAN
Dual band 802.11 a/b/g/n MIMO PCIe half mini card, 2.4 GHz with Intel, AMT support
USB Type-A x 6 (4 on side of the display, 2 on PC (1 used by camera), Ethernet (RJ45 x 2))
Optional USB 2.0 to HDMI adapter (for display out)
Windows 7 Pro 64bit, compatible with Windows 8
Microsoft Office Home & Business 32bit, Mondopad interface software
Inputs
Outputs
Touch Screen
PC
Model Number
INF5520a
Optional Accessories
RealCam Pan/Tilt/Zoom Camera (INF-SPTZ)
Wall Mount (INF-WALLMNT2)
Floor Stand (INF-FLRSTND)
Mobile Cart (INF-MOBCART)
Accessories Shelf for INF-MOBCART or
INF-FLRSTND (INF-ACCYSHELF)
Webcam Shelf for INF-MOBCART or
INF-FLRSTND (INF-VIDSHELF)
Pro Mobile Cart in Silver (INF-MOBCARTPRO-S)
Pro Mobile Cart in Black (INF-MOBCARTPRO-B)
Accessories Shelf for Pro Mobile Cart in Silver
(INF-ACCYSHELFPRO-S)
Accessories Shelf for Pro Mobile Cart in Black
(INF-ACCYSHELFPRO-B)
USB to HDMI Adapter (HW-USB2HDMI)
Extended warranties (EPWINF1, EPWINF2)
Camera
Resolution
Frame rate
Lens and Field of View
Audio support
Interface
Focus
Tilt
Power
38.3 in
973 mm
1280 x 720
22fps at HD with H.264+YUV (2-way)
F/2.0, 3P Lens; FOV(D) 56.8° in HD mode, FOV(D) 50° in VGA mode 1.0x zoom, FOV(D) 30° in VGA mode 1.6x zoom
4 built-in Unidirectional microphones
USB 2.0 High Speed
Auto focus
Manual up/down and left/right ±40˚
Via USB
5.5 in
140 mm
Sound Bar
Power
Speaker Drivers (L&R Channel)
Power Output (RMS)
Frequency Response
53 in
1346 mm
60 Hz AC
Two 3" and one 3/4" Aluminum Neodymium Tweeter (per side)
25 watts/channel @ 1% THD, 1KHz, 2-channels drive, 70 watts total system PEAK
90Hz to 20KHz
System
Accessories Included
Warranty
Product Weight
Shipping Weight
Shipping Dimensions
Operating Conditions
Noise
Energy Star
Approvals**
Interface Languages
Wireless keyboard (where allowed), wireless mouse (where allowed), cleaning cloth, VGA cable, USB cable, security screws, security
screw removal tool, power cord, remote, quick setup guide, sound bar assembly, HD camera assembly, foot assembly
1 year limited, extended warranties available
134.4 lbs/61 kg
Monitor, PC and camera: 136lbs/61.70kg, Sound Bar: 14.33lbs/6.5kg, Feet: 9.26lbs/4.2kg
Monitor, PC and camera: 58.66 x 13.86 x 38.39in/149 x 35.2 x 97.50cm,
Sound Bar: 57.48 x 7.08 x 5.7in/143 x 18 x 14.5cm, Feet: 22.05 x 5.31 x 15.94in/56 x 13.5 x 40.5cm
5° to 35°C at 0 to 3,048 m
<40dBA @ 25°C
5.1 for display and PC
United States (FCC, UL), Europe (CE), Australia (RCM), Brazil (ANATEL), Canada (IC, FCC, cUL), Chile (SUBTEL), China (CCC, CMIT),
Columbia, Costa Rica, India (WPC), Indonesia (PLG), Malaysia (cert required), Mexico (NOM, SCT, Energy Consumption label), New
Zealand (C-tick), Panama, Peru (MTC), Puerto Rico (FCC, UL), Saudi Arabia (SASO, CITC), Singapore (PSB, IDA), Taiwan (BMSI, NCC),
United Arab Emirates (TRA)
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Simp. Chinese, Trad. Chinese, Korean, Vietnamese, Japanese, Malay, Indonesian
www.infocus.com
InFocus Corporate Headquarters
Mondopad
Remote Control
13190 SW 68th Parkway
Portland, Oregon 97223-8368, USA
Phone: (1) 503-207-4700
Toll Free: (1) 877-388-8385
Fax: (1) 503-207-4707
* Product specifications, terms, and offerings are subject to change at any time without notice.
©2013 InFocus Corporation. All rights reserved. Specifications are subject to change without further notice.
InFocus, InFocus The New Way to Collaborate and Mondopad are either trademarks or registered
trademarks of InFocus Corporation in the United States and other countries. All trademarks are used with
permission or are for identification purposes only and are the property of their respective companies.
InFocus_Mondopad_INF5520A_DS_4Page_EN_11JUN13.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement